Sub's Pub -- Where Good Fans meet Bad Fiction

Coming up from the Sub

suborbital — Fri, 04 Feb 2011 23:18:44 GMT

Hi everyone!

Well, I figured I'd make a short post as I've been doing a lot of writing lately and before this fandom goes the way of the dodo now that Voyage has been and gone, I wanted to let you know some of what I've been working on and what's coming.

Just Peter Pevensie

This is something I wrote about gosh, five years ago now? lol so long ago. A short series that follows up Just and Magnificent and is set int he real world during World War II. Obviously Edmund died in Narnia and thus died in the real world. Peter fled school to enlist in the war. Peter is trying to forget Narnia and Edmund but finds he can't. He finds himself drawn to someone who reminds him of Edmund.

Beyond Magnificent

My take on Prince Caspian and the final part of my Narnia epic trilogy. Follows Peter, Susan, and Lucy as they return to Narnia to help Caspian. Finding themselves drawn into a conflict to liberate their kingdom, Peter and Susan are stunned to find a legend has grown of a 'Rogue Warrior'. Their quest to learn more about them leads them to the fabled realm of Salei Barion and the legacy of The Fallen.

---

JPP is done but I never did finish BM, though as a cap to JaM I would like to finish it, even if only one person reads it. Lol. Another series of mine that I dearly wish to finish is this.

---

Breathe

Two chapters away and I faltered lol. I got a book published and stopped posting stuff on LJ. I plan to rectify that by showing what happens with these two.

---

I have a couple of one shots up my sleeve for various pairings in the fandom but if you have a specific choice or wish, prompt me! I am presently taking orders lol. Het will go to Pevensie_Love and Narnia_Wham, and slash will go to Narnia_Slash. So feel free to let me know what you'd like to see, this might be my last run in Narnia!

LJ, I have missed thee.

suborbital — Fri, 25 Jun 2010 06:37:39 GMT

So, where do I begin?

I'm so far behind on LJ, not by choice, and I don't know where to start on my friends page to see what interesting things I have missed lately. I'll tell ya what I am so freaking pumped to see though.

The Narnia 3 trailer!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!

lol, I don't think I am ever going to leave this fandom. I'm not sure how many people on my flist who used to be into Narnia still are, but my goodness when I saw that trailer it just made me gush and pump my fist. Especially the bit at the end with the Pevensies! That's how they should've pushed Prince Caspian!!!

Judging by my tardiness, the discussion for this trailer has long past, so I feel like I'm a bit behind the eight ball. But oh well, couldn't be helped.

When you're behind on emails like after weeks, do you bother sorting through them? I might go and search out emails from certain people, but usually when I open it I am like oh god just fuck it already. Argh.

Anyway, what's everyone been up to lately? I'm feeling itchy to write something Narnian. Not necessary slash, though the wheels were turning in that direction with the trailer. Heck, even Prince Caspian didn't look too bad! hope his acting has improved. I also hope that this might spark some activity in the Narnia comms. The cool part is that right now I'm in Brisbane, which is not far from where they filmed Voyage. I only wish I'd been here last year and could'vebeen one of those people who got to see it filming. Speaking of Brisbane and Australia, is anyone here from Australia? What do you make of the political execution of Kevin Rudd?

Now, if you'll excuse me, I am long behind on one of my guilty pleasures, ONTD, and I need to go catch up and make some trouble there. Luff!

You know what sucks?

suborbital — Wed, 14 Apr 2010 09:31:17 GMT

When you're the last one left.

And everyone else has moved on and just forgets you, or doesn't care as much. I kinda feel like that now. But oh well, that's life, I guess. I seem to be a constant and other people just move on. I'll be here, still the same, as I am now, years after I first showed up here, and everyone else is just gone or going.

I still have Narnia? *shrug*

Wolfsbane 1 - The Seeds of Dissent

suborbital — Wed, 27 May 2009 02:32:19 GMT

Wolfsbane

The Seeds of Dissent

Chapter 1: The Seeds of Dissent
Summary: History is filled with examples of destiny, sacrifice, despair, sorrow, joy, and hope. This is one of them.
Warnings: Slash, Incest, Love, Romance, Adventure, Mystery, Action.
Pairings: Peter/Edmund
Rating: PG-13 [Could be NC-17 in the future]
Disclaimer: I own nozing! It ees all belonging to C.S. Lewis, yo!
Author’s Notes: Read the prologue before this. Return to my OTP P/E!

- - - - - -

-- Present

‘I hear them coming for me. I leave this in the hope that one day someone will read my thoughts and understand the legacy I represent. A Narnia now faded into bittersweet memory.

Queen …’ Lucy began to write before she shook her head and scribbled out the word and simply added ‘Lucy Pevensie’.

Lucy stood up, prepared to be moved back to her cell. This was far earlier than usual. Rehkan’s celebrations were not even over.

She soon realized as the guards entered and led her in a different direction that today would most definitely not be usual. She turned to one of the guards, feeling a well of trepidation as she was led out of the prison and out into the open atop a large platform.

It did not take her long to figure out what was about to happen. She was about to be hanged. She was right after all. Rehkan had tired of her and now his last example would be to hang her as an example to any who might rise up in opposition.

King Rehkan himself emerged onto the platform as Lucy was noosed up. A tall, lean, muscled man with long blonde locks and deep grey eyes. If she did not know his heart so well, Lucy would have considered him stunning. Yet his cruelty and malice caused her to greet the sight of him with nothing but contempt.

Rehkan turned to the large audience as he pointed to Lucy. She was most definitely being made an example of.

“Here stands the last resistance of an old Narnia. As long as such relics are allowed to exist, our future is blighted. I have given you greatness and true civilization and with the death of Lucy the Valiant, the greatness shall never be threatened again! Let it be known to all who would seek to overthrow our glorious existence that they shall meet a fate such as this unfortunate woman.” Rehkan said, scowling at Lucy.

Lucy did not dignify Rehkan’s words with a response. She accepted her fate. She made peace with her past, with her failings and her experiences. In some way, she found the notion of death oddly appealing, for in her heart she hoped she would be reunited finally with her precious loved ones.

As the hangman prepared to kick out the stand from beneath Lucy’s feet, Rehkan stepped up to her. He kissed both her cheeks before he leaned closer to her ear and whispered something that none could hear but Lucy.

“Your brothers live.”

Lucy’s eyes suddenly went wide with disbelief and near horror before she began struggling frantically. She shook her head, sobbing in disbelief as Rehkan sneered wickedly. Satisfied with himself he stepped back and watched as the hangman stepped up behind her.

Yet much to Rehkan’s displeasure, Lucy suddenly stopped struggling. She stared at him confusedly before she finally smiled softly. She looked up at the sun and closed her eyes.

“Hope prevails …” Lucy whispered.

Angered by her change in demeanor and her fearless words, Rehkan yelled at the top of his lungs for the hangman to finish her. Lucy’s eyes remained closed and she held a face of unbreakable calm and peace. Gritting his teeth indignantly, Rehkan raised his thumb and turned it down. The hangman stepped up behind Lucy and kicked out the stand from beneath her feet, consigning her fate to history.

- - - - - -

When Lucy opened her eyes, she wondered vaguely if she was in Heaven, and if so, why it stunk of dumb animals. She then realized it was because she wasn’t in fact dead or in Heaven, but in a stable, on a bed of straw. She was surrounded by animals, and she could tell by the look of them that they were in fact dumb, and not at all the talking variety. Her head hurt, but considering she had previously expected to be dead, that was a minor complaint. Where was she?

“It’s alright, Child, you are safe.” A soft voice spoke as Lucy felt a dabbing of a wet cloth on her temple.

Lucy looked up, for the first time noticing a figure beside her. The figure was hooded and their face could not be seen. Lucy sat up and looked around herself, before turning her attention back to the figure.

“You saved me?” Lucy asked, overcome with emotion at the unfamiliar sensation of freedom.

“We saved you.”

“How?” Lucy asked, confused, “And who are you? Why did you help me?”

- - - - - -

“Die, Queen Lucy, die.” Rehkan said quietly, a half smirk on his face.

He stood facing Lucy as the life was choked from her slight frame. She was hanging now, much to the horror of many who watched. Many who still believed that the Great Lion would not abandon them or their former leaders to this fate.

Of course, Lucy’s fate seemed to be of much concern to many in attendance, including one particular hooded figure in the crowd. They remained anonymous at first, until suddenly their robe was thrown open and a magnificent bow revealed. Before Rehkan even heard the arrow fly, it had sliced through the rope hanging Lucy and she fell under the platform to a pair of centaur who caught her and immediately burst into a gallop.

The next arrow struck Rehkan in the throat before he could even raise the alarm with a cry of indignation. He staggered backward, blood spattering out of his neck as he was suddenly rushed by his loyal guard. He fell against a post, steadying himself as he stared into the crowd. Who would dare attempt this!? Everyone, it seemed. The entire crowd of beasts were aiding in the escape of the former valiant queen. Yet one figure, the hooded figure, remained steadfast, staring at Rehkan as he suffered a fate that was none too gentle.

“I killed you!” Rehkan gasped in disbelief as the hooded figure threw off their hood, revealing a figure that Rehkan believed long dead; Susan the Gentle.

“You failed. Obviously.” Susan said, staring defiantly at him, “But I won’t.”

She immediately took aim with her bow, firing as her own loyal rebellion, also long believed dead, now battled with Rehkan’s soldiers. Her arrows struck dead with every kill, yet none struck Rehkan, for he was protected by a line of rapidly falling soldiers. Yet still Susan remained where she stood, making a statement to those Narnian who would seek to serve Rehkan the Benevolent.

“Your Queen, in the name of the Lion, expects no less than your complete and utter loyalty. When the time comes, we will rise, Narnia, we will rise.” Susan said firmly, before she was plucked by a centaur and spirited away.

- - - - - -

“Susan!” Lucy gasped in disbelief as Susan removed her hood, revealing herself, “It was you!”

Susan’s face was scarred from the attack Rehkan made on her six years ago. An attack that had almost killed her. She had failed then to lead a rebellion uprising. She vowed not to do the same next time.

Susan shied away from Lucy’s gaze, mindful of the burned flesh of her cheeks and near unrecognizable left eye. Lucy covered her mouth in shock and horror at her sister’s state. She meant no harm by it, still completely overwhelmed by the fact that after years of believing Susan was dead, that she was in fact alive. Yet still the small gesture was enough to cause Susan to don her hood and rush away.

“Susan, no please, wait!” Lucy cried, jumping to her own feet to rush after her sister, “Please come back! I’m sorry! I love you!”

Susan stopped, still facing away from Lucy. Lucy grabbed Susan, sobbing and clutching her with all her might. Lucy had long believed Susan dead and to have her back after all this time was a miracle she would not give up.

“I’m so sorry.” Lucy sobbed, pulling Susan’s hood off and smothering her face in kisses, “You’re beautiful. You’re beautiful. I love you. You’re alive. You’re alive. I have you back. Please don’t let anything keep us apart. I love you.”

Lucy stroked Susan’s scars with her fingers and kissed them, tears streaking down her face. Susan’s gaze was still downcast, as if tentative about Lucy seeing her like this. Lucy had been shocked to see such horrible remnants of Rehkan’s evil ways, but it had no impact at all on her love for her sister.

“You are a goddess.” Lucy proclaimed, “You have saved my life, and with your return, you have saved my heart. You live, Susan, you live, and now we have hope. You have no idea how much. Thank Aslan for you.”

“Please forgive me for … taking so long to come to your aid, Lu. I … have been away and not myself for many years, recovering from …”

“I know.” Lucy nodded, “I know. But you’re here now. You’re here. And you’ve done so much already. You’ve come home to me. You’ve raised our people to fight our oppressor. You’ve come home to me. Oh, Su. I’m so happy. I’m so proud.”

Susan’s one good eye glistened with emotion, but still stared away from Lucy. She was not the woman she used to be. Yet she was still the sister Lucy loved and looked up to.

“The time has come, Lu.” Susan said, sliding her hood back over her head, “The time has come. The fight has just begun.”

- - - - - -

“I want them dead.” Rehkan growled, still wearing the bandages around his neck from Susan’s shot, “I want that dirty undead whore skinned alive! Find Susan the Gentle, have dogs rape her, cut her last good eye out, and then skin her alive before her precious subjects! I want her and every last follower she has, dead!”

He backhanded the servant dwarf trying to tend to his wounds, clearly angered. The rescue of Lucy, the revelation that the rebellion and its leader lived, and the attack on his own life, left Rehkan in a decidedly foul state. His kingdom was in jeopardy. He had to act before matters spiraled further out of control.

“Send Hunters out to find … Peter the no longer Magnificent.” Rehkan chuckled darkly, “It is time to end this charade. This whore Susan has risen from the grave, Helric. How is this possible?”

“I do not know, Majesty.” Helric said, “But I will be sure myself that she dies this time, with no hope of return.”

“She has made her statement and almost killed me in the process. For so many years I felt she was dead, gone, over with. And yet here she is, arisen, returned, come back to haunt me. She will soon learn that her brothers live, and this will only spur her attempts to usurp me.”

“But … how will she learn? In all these years no one has discovered the truth.” Helric asked, confused.

“Because I told Lucy, before she was supposed to die. Now she will tell her sister. When the population learns their monarchs are alive, they will rise against us. And so we must … break their will. Assign the First Cavalry to hunt the rebels. Send our best sky hunters to track down the former High King. I also want you … personally, to select a dozen younglings of mixed species and prepare them for public torture and dismemberment.”

“Majesty?” Helric asked, somewhat taken aback by this order.

“These rebels and their sympathizers must be made aware that I shall not tolerate any uprising or rebellious behaviour. By making an example of their younglings, they will see the scope of my resolve. It will neutralize their … seeds of dissent.”

Helric nodded, “As you wish, Majesty. It shall be done.”

- - - - - -

“What did you say?” Susan gasped in disbelief as she stared at Lucy.

“They’re alive, Su.” Lucy said, her eyes bright with the boundless hope that drew so many to her during her reign as the Valiant Queen, “Rehkan told me just before I was hanged! They’re alive!”

Susan staggered backward into a chair behind her, her eyes staring blankly at the wall behind Lucy. She could not believe what she’d just heard. She could not believe her brothers were alive. If they were, where had they been for the last seven years? Why were they not fighting the righteous fight against Rehkan and his oppressive regime?

“No, Lucy. They are dead.” Susan reasoned, “If they were alive, we would know. If they were alive, they would have acted by now. I would know, Lu. You would know. Rehkan was toying with you.”

“I know it doesn’t make sense, Su, but I believe it. This is the time. Your return, my escape, and now news that our brothers live? This is our time, our fate, our opportunity to free Narnia and reclaim her for her people. For our people.” Lucy said passionately, “I don’t know where they are or why they have not shown themselves to us, but I have to believe they are alive, somewhere. Perhaps they need our help as I needed yours. Please, Susan, we must act.”

Susan pondered Lucy’s words, still overwhelmed by her news, “I will have to think on this, Lu. Our window of opportunity to act now that we are revealed to Rehkan, is small. I must think before I can allow our rebellion to divert energies to a cause I am not fully certain is based on fact. Please understand, I would dearly love to believe our brothers live, and that we should turn our attention to our reuniting, but I must act in the best interests of those we serve in there here and now. I’m sorry, Lucy.”

Lucy was about to speak up again but Susan was already leaving. Frowning, Lucy turned away and stared out the small window of the humble cottage she and Susan had been hiding out in with trusted members of the rebellion. She wondered why Rehkan had told her that Edmund and Peter lived. She wished he’d revealed more of their fate, to give her something to tell Susan. Something to make Susan believe as she did.

“Oh, Peter. Where are you?” Lucy asked, staring up at the night sky, “Why won’t you show yourself to us?”

- - - - - -

“Capture the youngling jaguar.” Helric ordered his men, “If the parents resist, kill them. The High King wishes for a youngling sacrifice, and he shall have it.”

Soldiers surrounded the jaguar’s home, swords drawn. They’d come at night, with intent to catch the family unaware. Under cover of darkness, two soldiers rushed in, emerging with a youngling jaguar while her parents rushed out, roaring after. There was a brief struggle as the parents tried to save their child. One soldier was bloodied, before their comrades began beating the youngling in order to make the parents halt. It worked.

The parents growled, but eased back slowly, in the hope the soldiers would reconsider and let their youngling go. One of the soldiers sneered and started smacking the youngling about the face. Within moments, a growl could be heard. A growl that did not originate from the jaguar parents.

The jaguar’s ears perked up at the sound, their heads turned in the direction the growl originated from. At first, the jaguar hoped it to be the call of a lion. Perhaps the lion. It was soon discovered to be that growl of a black wolf. A wolf who moved like lightning, soon sinking its teeth into the shoulder of the soldier who struck the youngling. The attack was so fast, so brutal, that the soldiers barely had a chance to react. When the chaos was over, Helric and two of his men were running for dear life, while their comrades lay dead, ravaged and torn apart by the wild black wolf.

When all threats were gone, the jaguar reclaimed their distraught youngling. They remained frightened of the large wolf, staring at it with fearful eyes. The wolf regarded them with a glance, before it disappeared into the darkness from whence it came.

- - - - - -

To Be Continued
The mystery of Peter and Edmund's fate continues to be revealed as Lucy investigates, while Susan continues to lead the rebellion.

Reviews are love!

The Lesser King - Volume 1, Part 1

suborbital — Thu, 07 May 2009 07:23:58 GMT

THE LESSER KING

by SubOrbital

Rating: NC-17

Warnings: Incest, Explicit Sex [In the future], Het [lol that's a warning since I usually write slash]

Synopsis: After a long campaign away from Narnia, Edmund returns to find things have changed greatly in his absence.

A/N: This could potentially be my first big uber long ficcar since Just and Magnificent. You'll have to read to see the pairings, but just so you know, there will be both het and slash. I won't be posting this in Narnia Slash as the main pairing isn't slash. But for those who like my slash, my next ficcar will be Slash centred. Just take a breath [hint hint] and wait for it.

Volume 1, Part 1

RETURN TO NARNIA

“The seas can be so warm and welcoming, and then so fierce and threatening.” Edmund said wistfully, standing on the deck of the Splendor Hyaline.

“Sounds like my wife.” Mr. Beaver chuckled, “But don’t tell her I told you that, or I’ll get more of the latter, if you know what I mean.”

“Your secret shall be considered worthy of state protection, my friend.” Edmund replied with a smile.

The Just King returned his gaze to the waters on the horizon, watching the sun dance upon it. The calm blue swell of the Eastern Seas were a stark contrast to much of the mountainous waters that had buffeted the Narnian First Armada on its journey home. King Edmund the Just led the armada on a campaign to Terebinthia and the Lone Islands . By all accounts it had been a success, strengthening ties and reaffirming loyalties to Narnia amongst the people. A factor that High King Peter considered paramount given the distant location of the Lone Islands relative to Narnia itself.

The influence of the Calormene Empire on the Lone Islands was a constant source of concern for Narnia. The diametrically opposite regime was far more powerful than Narnia, and if it gained a foothold in the Lone Islands , it could give them a platform from which to launch an invasion into Narnia. Currently, the geography and existence of Archenland between Calormen and Narnia had prevented any sizeable clash between the two nations.

“Penny for your thoughts, Sire?” Mr. Beaver asked Edmund, sensing his monarch was deep in thought.

“Oh, do excuse me. I am just thinking about the Lone Islands . I hope we have done enough to keep their loyalty to Narnia. I worry about the Calormene. While trade with anyone should be considered a good thing, the amount of trade being done with Calormene in the Lone Islands gives me pause. Hopefully it is unwarranted pause.”

“Our campaign was a success by all accounts, Sire. I’m sure it’ll all be fine.”

“I hope so, Mr. Beaver. I hope so.”

‘Majesty! Cair Paravel has been sighted!’

Edmund turned at the sound of the cry from the lookout above. He rushed to the other side of the ship, staring toward the Narnia coastline. Home. It felt far too long a time since Edmund had seen his beloved Narnia. Far too long since his eyes had been graced with its beauty.

Like a diamond sparkling in the distance, Cair Paravel beckoned the Splendor Hyaline and its sister ships home. Edmund could not help the smile that grew on his face at the sight.

“Home, Mr. Beaver.” Edmund said softly, “We are home.”

JUST IN TIME

‘All hail, King Edmund the Just returns!’

Edmund marched into the grounds of Cair Paravel at the head of the contingent of Narnian he’d taken on his campaign with him. Each man, woman, or child born on the journey took their place in the procession. For each had taken part in the campaign, and each deserved their welcome.

They had all been loyal to their King, even though the long journey to the Lone Islands had been fraught with difficult conditions. Several souls were lost in fierce storms and a skirmish with pirates whose bold attempts to raid the Narnian fleet gained them the prize of a resting place on the sea floor.

As their arrival was hastened by favourable winds, Narnia was not expecting the fleet to return today. As such, the welcome was not of a standard that Edmund expected. Still, what mattered most was that he had succeeded in his mission and was now home.

At the bottom of the main stairs leading to the entrance of the castle, Edmund stopped his procession. At the top of the stairs stood two lines of the High King’s Guard, swords raised and crossed. High King Peter stood under the first set of swords, crown upon his head, impassive gaze upon his face.

“Narnia welcomes you, Brothers and Sisters, and your High King thanks you for your deeds.” Peter’s voice bellowed, “We here at home owe you a great debt. You have aided the cause of strengthening ties with our brothers across the sea. In gratitude for your actions, a week of celebrations will begin to welcome you all home. Today, a great feast awaits you all, where we shall serve you. By the Lion, thank you all.”

Edmund was a little surprised at how formal Peter was being. That was usually Edmund’s forte. However, these thoughts of Edmund’s soon departed when Peter’s gaze softened and a small smile adorned his face.

“My friends.” Peter smiled, “Welcome home.”

A chorus of cheers erupted from both the small gathering of well wishers, and the large sea of returnees. At this point, Edmund and his two most trusted, Mr. Beaver and Halvor the Satyr, broke away from the procession and proceeded up the stairs and under the swords held up by Peter’s High Guard. Peter had already turned away to enter the castle.

By the time Edmund and his two companions saw Peter again, he was sitting in his throne. Edmund was surprised to see that neither of his sisters, Susan the Gentle, or Lucy the Valiant, were seated in their thrones. While Narnia had been surprised by Edmund’s sudden return, he had expected his sisters would still be here to greet him.

“Edmund, I see you are well.” Peter said, giving Edmund a warm smile and nod.

“I am well, Sire.” Edmund bowed respectfully to Peter, “I seek to return to Cair Paravel, announcing the end of my successful campaign in the Eastern Seas on behalf of your majesty.”

Edmund and both his companions fell to one knee, heads bowed. Peter chuckled, shook his head, and stood to his feet.

“Yes, yes, of course, Ed.” Peter said, waving away Edmund’s formality, “Come, come.”

Peter beckoned Edmund forward and greeted him with a fierce, tight hug. Edmund winced a little in the fiercely tight embrace, but welcomed it nonetheless. He smiled and tightened the hug himself, patting Peter’s back. It felt good to be home, breathing the familiar air of Narnia.

“Oh, Ed!” Lucy cried out suddenly, showing no pretence of formality as she dashed into the throne room, “You’re home!”

Holding her skirt up and running barefoot, she crushed Edmund from behind, leaving him sandwiched between herself and Peter. She’d just come from the royal vegetable gardens, and her feet left a trail of dirt behind them that the ushers were already rushing to clean.

Edmund made a grunt, crushed between his siblings. He expected this sort of thing from Lucy. She’d always been a free spirit.

“Lu, where have you been!?” Peter whispered, not breaking the three person hug.

“Oh do forgive me, I was playing in the gardens well on the outskirts. I came as soon as I heard the trumpets!” Lucy said, kissing Edmund’s spine and hugging him tightly again, “It doesn’t matter now. I’m here, and so is Ed! He’s home!”

CURIOUS

“And when do you expect Susan will return, Peter?” Edmund asked his brother, “I had expected she would be here.”

The pair walked through the large crowd gathered for the banquet, giving nods and smiles when needed. Edmund was far more interested in learning what had taken place during his absence. He had a lot to catch up on. He was also most joyed in spending time with his siblings, though the absence of one left a sorrow in his heart.

“I had also hoped she would be here by now, Ed.” Peter frowned, before he feigned a smile and put his arm around Edmund’s shoulder, “But at least you’re home. Excuse me for a moment.”

Edmund’s mouth hung open, as he’d been about to speak before Peter slipped away from him. He found Peter’s sudden departure displeasing. Besides the usual bluster of announcing Edmund’s triumphant return at the earlier banquet, and making the usual speeches, Edmund heard little from Peter. Their conversations had been brief at best. Peter had not even asked for a detailed briefing of Edmund’s campaign.

While Edmund assumed that their time apart might have caused their bond to lose some of its familiarity, he was still surprised to see that manifested in Peter’s aloofness. Edmund knew his brother well enough to know he was keeping an emotional wall of sorts between them. A distance. If this wasn’t the case, Peter would have terrorised Edmund with his typical touchy feely hands on nature. Constant hugs and closeness, relentless pestering of details from Edmund’s time away. A closeness that came with being brothers and best friends. A closeness that came with trusting one another implicitly.

“Mr. Tumnus.” Edmund said, approaching the faun with a dutiful nod, “Have I been away so long that I have lost the ear of my brother? I fear I have been. Even Queen Lucy seems … distant.”

“Oh, Ed.” Lucy gushed, squeezing Edmund’s hand and grinning at him, “You are awfully paranoid, aren’t you?”

“Well, I am the spymaster after all.” Edmund smiled, surprised and grateful for her sudden appearance at his side, “I have seen little of you since my return, Lu. Peter as well. I do hope that the morrow brings us more time together. Beyond these … engagements.”

“I know it will, Ed.” Lucy smiled, leaning up to kiss his cheek, “But tonight is a night for all those who have returned today. And I, as a grateful Queen Lucy, must ensure I share my attention to as many of them as possible. I promise you, that tomorrow you will have my attention completely. Besides, you already have my heart, must you have my time as well? We mustn’t be greedy now, Ed.”

Lucy smiled brightly. The type of smile that always made Edmund glow and smile in return. He cupped her cheek and nodded gratefully. He could not fault her logic or noble intent.

“As you say, My Queen. As you say.”

“And on that note, I will have to leave your side for a little while so that I may continue to spread my thanks and joy with our returned subjects.” She made to leave before she turned back to Edmund, “I am so very happy to have my pair home. You have no idea, Edmund.”

She gave Edmund a sudden hug, before she left him just as Peter had. Yet unlike Peter, her departure did not leave Edmund feeling underwhelmed. Indeed she had brightened his whole evening. A familiar warmth for his heart, long missed during his absence.

Lucy ended up at Peter’s side, the two laughing and carrying on with a familiarity that Edmund and his brother seemed to have lost a little. Perhaps that would change in time. Now that he was home, there was no reason for it not to.

“Are you alright, Mr. Tumnus?” Edmund asked, noticing the faun’s lack of attention.

“Yes, Sire. Do forgive me.” He said with a bow.

“Of course. Is something wrong?” Edmund asked, “You seem … distracted.”

“I should take my leave of you, Sire. Do excuse me.”

Hurriedly, Mr. Tumnus took his leave, and once more Edmund was alone. He had the strangest sensation that nobody was interested in his company for any extended period of time.

“Mr. Beaver.” Edmund said, approaching his friend, “Have you noticed anything … strange since our return today? As if everyone else knows a great secret we are not yet aware of? High King Peter, Queen Lucy, and Mr. Tumnus all seemed in a great hurry to leave my side.”

“I wish I could say the same, Sire, but ever since I got back, I’ve had nothing but an earful from my wife, so I’m afraid it’s just you.” Mr. Beaver chuckled, “But I suppose I have noticed a … I suppose you could say pensive mood in the air since our return.”

“Perhaps it is simply because we have been away for so long.” Edmund surmised, “Though I am somewhat surprised that Queen Susan is not here. I will speak to Peter about it before bed.”

Edmund attempted to do just that, many hours later. Long after the festive spirit of the banquet was over, and the celebrations had moved to a bonfire in the forest, surrounded by music and wine. He approached Peter’s chamber doors and nodded to the High Guard either side of it. Normally he would have simply knocked on the door immediately, ignoring the guard. Not because he meant to be rude, but simply because their function was to guard, not to be annoyed or interacted with.

“Is King Peter long asleep?” Edmund asked one of the guards.

“Sire, the High King is not in these chambers.”

“Oh.” Edmund frowned, “He must have joined the faun dancing. I will speak to him in the morning then.”

“Yes, Sire. Good evening, Sire.”

Edmund nodded to the guard before he turned and made his way to his own chambers. Chambers he would have to reacquaint himself with again. As he did so, he passed Susan’s chambers and couldn’t help but feel a sense of melancholy for her absence. Despite her absence, two members of the Royal Guard, an order below the High Guard, stood outside her chamber doors.

“Where is Queen Susan?” Edmund asked suddenly, deciding if Peter would not discuss this with him, perhaps these soldiers would, “How long has she been away and how soon do you expect her to return?”

“We do not know where she is, Sire.” One of the guards spoke, “We only know she left after a …”

The other guard quickly shushed his companion, which only served to annoy Edmund. How dare they try to keep something from him. He was their King after all.

“You are not High Guard. You are Royal Guard. If I ask you something, you answer it.” Edmund snapped at them both, “Now answer me, or your next guard duty shall be in the marshes.”

“Please, Sire. We know little and do not wish to be a party to gossip or speculation. Factually, we only know that Queen Susan left a month ago after a very heated argument with the High King. It was a very …” The faun guard, Mantius, said, frowning somewhat, “It was a very distressing argument for all who heard. Hurtful things were said on both sides. The next day, Queen Susan was gone. Some say she left of her own volition under cover of night with her most loyal centaur, Lero. But … there are some who say they saw her being taken away by members of the High Guard.”

“Mantius, that is utter nonsense! Even speaking such a vile rumour is tantamount to treason.” The other faun guard, Deceuns protested, “King Edmund, please ignore such proclamations.”

“You, Deceuns, I remember. But you …” Edmund said, pointing to the other faun, “Mantius, is it? I do not know you.”

“Sire, I have only been a member of the Royal Guard for eight months, well after your departure. You had no reason to know who I am.” Mantius replied, “Please forgive me if I have spoken out of turn.”

“You have done no such thing. You have stated yourself that what you speak of is rumour, not fact. So you have born no false witness. I thank thee for speaking plainly. At least someone is prepared to give me some answers.” Edmund said, giving both fauns a nod before he continued on his way.

Such information had caused Edmund a great deal of concern. There was absolutely no way that the latter rumour of Susan being kidnapped by High Guard could be true. Peter would never order such a thing, and the High Guard did not breathe unless their High King let them.

Edmund stopped when he heard what sounded like a low groan. He raised his eyebrow and looked about him for the source of the noise. Another sound, almost a moan, carried faintly through the passage.

“What in Aslan’s mane is that noise?” Edmund asked, walking faster along the passageway to where he believed it was coming from.

Suddenly, Edmund was approached by two members of the High Guard. One was a gorilla, the other a dog of large stature. They stood in Edmund’s way, making it obvious they were there for a reason.

“Sire, do you wish to sleep now?” The dog asked, “We have come to escort you to your new chambers.”

“My new chambers? What are you talking about? My chambers are straight ahead, opposite Lucy’s.” Edmund protested, “And what was that noise?”

“Oops.” The gorilla grunted, “Forgive me, Sire. That was us. We, umm … didn’t think anyone was around and we were goofing around.”

“Two members of the High Guard ‘goofing’ around?” Edmund asked suspiciously, “Be that as it may, kindly step aside so I can return to my normal chambers.”

“High King Peter has given us strict orders to show you your new chambers. They are already prepared and awaiting you, Sire. We are sure you will be most pleased. They are blessed with a far greater view than your previous chambers.” The Dog said, “They are back the way you came. Past the High King’s chambers.”

“What?” Edmund asked in surprise, “Did he extend the wing?”

“He did, Sire. Chambers right next to his own. The High King wished for his brother to be closer to him.” The Gorilla said, nodding his head, “Does the Just King not approve?”

“I …” Edmund said, smiling softly, almost relieved, “I … that is … very thoughtful of him.”

“The High King has missed his brother greatly.” The gorilla said, still nodding his head, “He wishes your bonds to be strengthened.”

“Then I shall have to thank him in the morning.” Edmund said, still happily surprised by this news, “Thank you, Gentlemen. Thank you.”

“No thanks is required, Majesty.” The Dog replied with a soft bow, “We exist only to serve ...”

- To Be Continued -
Edmund learns more about what has transpired in his absence, including a secret that could prove devastating to Narnia's stability.

Breathe 13 - Still the Best

suborbital — Wed, 01 Apr 2009 01:48:14 GMT

Title: Breathe
Pairing: Will/Skandar, Anna/OFC
Rating: NC-17
Summary: For better or worse, they said.
Disclaimer: Not mine, not real! It's FICTION.
Warnings: Sex.
A/N: Breathe is the sequel series to 'Chronicles of Skandar'. Read that first! Read earlier chapters - Breathe. You might want to read up on earlier chapters as it's been a while since I added to this story. P.S. If you still haven't seen the new Skandar pics, check them out here!

Breathe

A Chronicle of Skandar and William

Chapter 13 – .Still the Best

WHEN THE SUN RISES ON A NEW DAY

On one of the outdoor sofas under a covered deck, William was stretched out with Skandar nestled back against his chest. Skandar had agreed to try again and give their marriage a hope. Just a nod was all it took for William to finally feel as if he might have a second chance to live the life he knew he wanted.

Now the dawn beckoned, casting a faint light over William as he held Skandar. The night had been warm, and the warmth of each other was enough for them to remain out on the covered area of their upper deck. William kissed the top of Skandar’s head before he traced his hand down Skandar’s arm and then tentatively interlaced their fingers. His bare foot brushed Skandar’s before he squeezed his hand. Skandar reacted with a slight moan and turned to curl himself against William’s chest.

“It’s a new day, Teacup.” William whispered, “It’s a new day.”

Skandar barely responded, still deep in slumber. William smiled, watching as the morning sunlight grew stronger, casting an orange tinge across Skandar’s face. It was a slightly surreal, breathtaking experience for William. The simplicity of it all, the beauty he held in his arms, it all felt a little too good to be true. After wanting a chance to fix his marriage, his family, himself, was it truly here now? Was this angel in his arms truly his again?

Skandar did not wake for another hour, and when he did, William remained in the same position he had all night. He still held Skandar protectively, contently. It seemed a natural fit. It seemed as if all their years as friends, then as lovers, as husbands, still counted.

“I’ll never lose myself again. I promise.” William said softly as he ghosted a kiss across Skandar’s freckled cheek.

“Will?” Skandar groaned, shivering a little and curling into William’s embrace, “Do you always talk so fucking gay?”

William chuckled and nuzzled his nose against his husband’s, “I love you so much, Teacup. And umm ... I am gay?”

“Only when you’re with me apparently.” Skandar grumbled, eyes still closed.

William sighed a little frustrated, rubbing his temple and feeling a rush of anxiety fill him, “Teacup ... don’t start. Please. Let it be good a little while longer.”

Skandar opened his eyes and looked at William apologetically, “Sorry. It’s going to take a while for us to ... well ... be cool. And to forget you like fucking girls behind my back.”

“Teacup!” William gasped, hurt by Skandar’s bluntness, “Must we?”

Skandar sat up, taking a deep breath, “Alright, look. I nodded my head last night. I gave my fucking oath to try and fix shit between us. But now you have to be honest with me. You have to lay everything out there. What did you do, Will? What did you do? Do you just want to start again, pretending that none of the past happened?”

“So this is you nodding your head, is it?” William asked cynically, getting out of the bed, wrapping a sheet around his waist. “Way to go, Skandar.”

“God damn, I could punch your fucking head in right now.” Skandar said tightly, standing up and grabbing his things, “You’re a cunt, Will. You’ll never change. Once a cheat, always a cheat. Piece of shit, that’s what you are.”

William was doing his best not to cry. He was so frustrated and angry right now. He didn’t know what to do. He didn’t expect any of this to be easy, but he also didn’t expect the onslaught against him to begin so soon.

“We were so good last night, Teacup.” William said, face contorting as tears threatened to spill, “Why do we have to do this? Please, Skan. I’ve tried so hard. Please.”

Skandar turned back to William after slipping his shoes on. He could see his husband was distraught. He could see his husband was upset. Despite his anger, it gave him no joy to see such emotion from William.

Skandar sat down next to William, taking his hand and kissing it gently. He interlaced their fingers, clasping their hands together tightly. It wouldn’t be easy to fix their marriage. It wouldn’t be easy at all. Skandar knew he had to somehow erase the mistrust that echoed between them, but was it even possible? Did they really stand a chance?

“I don’t trust you.” Skandar said softly, “But I do love you. Perhaps that is a start?”

“I will have your trust as well.” William said, smothering their clasped hands in fervent kisses, “In time, Teacup.”

TRUST

“Is that why you’re here, Baby?” Sarah asked, brushing a strand of hair from Skandar’s face.

She sat on her couch, while he lay on his back, his head in her lap. It was a familiar position for the long time friends. Skandar had arrived a few hours earlier as the kids were in day care and school respectively, and he wasn’t quite up for spending time alone with William just yet. He needed time to think, and someone to just be with him. For that reason, he was here with Sarah.

“No … I just …” Skandar began to say, frowning and wondering how best to form his words, “It’s just … I’ve been … so set on divorce for so long, and now this?”

“You could have your family back. Our boys could be happy.” Sarah said, her voice soft and even, “Isn’t that what you want?”

“I guess so.” Skandar replied, “It’s just … I don’t know if I can ever trust him again. And isn’t that the basis for any relationship? I know our boys want both of us. But it would be wrong to be in a relationship purely for that reason.”

“You love him, don’t you?”

“I love him.” Skandar sighed, “I’ve always loved him. From the time I saw his macho, grinning face for the very first time. I’ve loved him, Sarah. But can I really do this? Can I really open myself to him again?”

“You told me you nodded last night.” Sarah pointed out, “You told me you’d agreed to give things one last chance.”

“I was drunk at the time.”

“That’s no excuse. You knew what you were doing.”

Skandar frowned and nodded his head, “I knew what I was doing. I just … when I woke up this morning, it was all still there, you know? All the resentment, the bitterness, the anger. It makes me feel … yucky, you know? Last night, it felt … it felt so good, Sarah. It felt like I could … love him again, trust him again, but I don’t. I just don’t. I’ll always love him, but I don’t know if I can trust him.”

“So what are you going to do then?” Sarah asked, kissing Skandar’s temple and holding him, “What comes next?”

Skandar looked up at her suddenly, sincerely, reaching up to pass his hand through her hair, “You’re the best friend I’ve ever had. I love you, Sarah.”

“Yeah, don’t change the subject.” She chuckled, “What comes next, Homo?”

“You’re a homo!”

“Yes, and I’m still asking you. What comes next?”

DINNER

“Who’s a funky penguin?” Skandar asked himself.

Skandar adjusted his tie as he stood in front of his wardrobe mirror. Since relinquishing his house and custody of the boys to William, he’d moved most of his clothes and possessions into the penthouse he’d been staying in. Supposedly this was temporary until he bought a new house for himself. Yet even though he’d come close, this had never eventuated, and deep down Skandar knew why. He was hoping for a reunion as much as William was. Or he was hoping that William might give in, bugger off to his life of superstardom, and leave Skandar with the boys.

“I’m a funky penguin.” Skandar said to himself, looking himself over in the mirror in his hotel bedroom, “God, you look like sex tonight, Keynes.”

He continued dressing himself, making sure he would look his level best if he did decide to meet William for dinner tonight. While they had made plans for a date, Skandar was still reserving the right to change his mind. Even though he hadn’t told William that.

Skandar paced back and forth in his hotel room. He was due to meet William for dinner ten minutes ago. He was starting to get cold feet. He was starting to question the sense in giving William a hope of saving their marriage.

He wanted to call his lawyer and fast track the last stages of their divorce. He was afraid that if he did give William a chance, he would fall for him, he would let himself be open to being hurt all over again.

“To live is to risk.” Skandar sighed, “But do I really need to risk being hurt by him again? Do I?”

WHILE HE WAITS

“Would you like to see a menu, Sir?”

William looked up at the waitress, giving her a feigned smile and shaking his head, “Not yet, thanks. I’m … I’m still waiting for someone.”

“Oh, certainly.” She said, taking her leave of him.

He could see she had a look in her eyes as if to say ‘You poor fool, they aren’t showing’. He was inclined to believe her too. Skandar was half an hour late, with no message, no call to let William know he was running behind schedule.

For some reason, this situation reminded William of the moment Skandar first declared his intention to get a divorce. They were supposed to meet for dinner, but it was William who was late that evening. It was Skandar who had been kept waiting because William had been working late and fighting the attention of a whorish extra on set. Skandar had even smelled her perfume on him. He’d smelled the alcohol on William and put two and two together. Though William was certain he didn’t fuck the girl, he knew he should’ve pushed her off him a lot sooner than he had. His ego had been well out of control then.

“Guess I deserve this.” William whispered to himself, staring at his glass of wine.

“Sorry I’m late.” Skandar said, hurriedly trying to get his coat off.

“Teacup!” William gasped, jumping to his feet, “Here, let me.”

Skandar let William help take his coat off, before William pulled out Skandar’s chair for him. William’s mood immediately brightened and no one would suspect he’d been morose for the last half hour or so.

“I umm …” Skandar began to say awkwardly, “I’m sorry I’m late. I …”

“You were deciding whether or not to come.” William said, nodding his head, “I understand. But I’m glad you decided to come in the end.”

“Me too.” Skandar nodded.

“Here are your menus, Gentlemen.” The waitress said, offering one to both and giving William a warm smile and wink, happy his date had arrived, “Would you like to see the wine list?”

Once the wine was ordered and had arrived at their table, William poured them both a glass. Skandar felt a little nervous about tonight. He was desperately fighting the growing swell of butterflies in his stomach. How could William still have this effect on him after all these years?

“So …” Skandar said, breaking the awkward silence, “How was your day?”

“I was just about to ask you the same thing.” William smiled, “I had the best day I’ve ever had in a long time. But I’ll be honest, Teacup. I don’t think I’ve felt this nervous since the day we were married on that beach.”

Skandar smiled softly, appreciating William’s sentiment, “Well … I mean …”

“It’s okay, Teacup. You don’t have to say anything. I’m just … I’m happy you’re here.” William said, tentatively reaching across the table to cover Skandar’s hand.

Skandar looked down at the gesture, lips tightening as if to say ‘get the fuck away from me’, but he quickly stowed the thought away. A lot of his anger still flared up on instinct, but he sincerely wanted this to be a good night. William sensed Skandar’s sentiment though and drew his hand away, but Skandar quickly grabbed it back.

“Sorry.” Skandar said, squeezing William’s hand, “I’m happy I’m here too, Will.”

“I hope one day you don’t hate me the way you still do sometimes.” William said, thumbing Skandar’s pale hand, “I hope one day this is real again.”

“We’ve both … made mistakes, Will. We’ve both lost our way.”

“No.” William said, “I lost my way, and you got lost because of that. This is all on me, Teacup. And it’s all on me to try and make it better.”

“And you’re trying, and I appreciate that. Because I do … miss my … our boys, so very much. And I miss you, but I’ve … I’ve forgotten what it was like now when you were … you. When you were present. When you were with us.” Skandar smiled faintly, remembering days gone by, “Do you remember when Eddy was born?”

HERE COMES TROUBLE

“Push, Woman, push!” Skandar gasped, squeezing Sarah’s hand.

Sarah, covered in sweat and pushing as hard as she could, glared at Skandar and bit his hand hard, “You try pushing a watermelon out of your pussy! I will eat you, Keynes! Fuck off!”

“Come on, Teacup.” William smirked, pulling Skandar back lest Sarah tear his head off.

“But I want to see!” Skandar whined, “I want to be here!”

“I’m not having anymore kids for you two!” Sarah screamed as Anna dabbed her face to soothe her, “You saw last time, it’s Will’s turn!”

“Listen to her, she’s feral.” Skandar whispered to William, “But it’s okay, Anna’s here to tame her.”

Sarah chuckled painfully, wincing before she looked at Skandar, “You cheeky fucker, I’m gonna make you cry sometime very soon.”

“Can I please stay, please!?” Skandar begged, utterly elated at the knowledge his son was about to be born.

“Skandar!” Sarah screamed, biting his wrist rather painfully, before she let it go, “Fuck off!”

Skandar pouted miserably, sauntering back to Petey and slumping on the chair next to him. Petey, oblivious to the drama, moved himself into Skandar’s lap and cuddled. Immediately Skandar softened, hugging his son and closing his eyes.

“Does that mean it’s my turn!?” William asked in surprise as Sandra yanked him down to her side, clutching his hand fiercely.

“You weren’t here for Petey. You’re going to … ahh fuck … see … first hand …” Sarah suddenly let out a loud scream, “God damnit, you assholes! Why do I do this for you!?!”

William winced, her hand almost crushing his, “Umm … because you love us?”

Sarah let out another scream, clutching to William on one side of her, and Anna on the other. While Anna received whimpers and cries, William received curses and a crushed hand. Unlike Petey, whose birth was only witnessed by Skandar and without incident, this birth was far more difficult. It seemed the child did not wish to leave Sarah’s womb, no matter how much she coaxed it.

Two hours later, the child finally arrived. Two hours later, William was finally able to witness the birth of one of his children. Perhaps the last of his children, according to Sarah. Still, William could ask for no more from her. She’d given them so much.

“Oh my God.” William gasped, holding his newborn son in his arms.

Without realizing he was crying, he was. He couldn’t help it. He was overcome with emotion, feeling a sense of connection he hadn’t experienced in his life before. He loved Petey with all his heart, but he hadn’t held him in his arms the moment after he was born.

“Thank you.” William gushed, leaning over to kiss Sarah on the lips, sniffling as he did so, “I love you so much, Sarah. Thank you.”

Sarah was barely conscious, completely drained from the difficult birth. Anna soothed her with gentle strokes and a calming presence. This was the second time Sarah had endured for her beloved Skandar, and because of Anna’s insistence, it would also be the last.

“Teacup.” William beamed, rushing over to Skandar with their new child, “Look at him! Isn’t he perfect!?”

“With my genes, of course.” Skandar said sincerely, taking the small bundle from his husband.

“Your genes and your heart, Teacup.” William said softly, “Just like Petey with my genes and your heart. They’re both our babies. Both our boys.”

Petey looked up from between his two fathers, clutching to a leg of each. He was excited and yet felt a strange trepidation about where he might fit now that he didn’t have all of his parent’s attention. He tugged at Skandar’s leg, looking up at him with bright, curious eyes.

“It’s your little brother, Petey.” Skandar smiled, reaching down to scoop his now eldest son up with one arm, “Isn’t that wonderful?”

“He’s beautiful, Teacup. I can tell he’s going to look just like you when he gets older.”

“Oh he’ll be trouble.” Skandar grinned, “Just you wait and see.”

DINNER FOR TWO

“And you were right.” William chuckled, “He’s definitely trouble, that one.”

“But he’s our trouble.” Skandar said thoughtfully, “He’s our trouble. Remember? My genes, your heart. Our boy. Our boys.”

“I’m sorry, Skan.” William said suddenly, seizing this moment of shared emotion, “I’m sorry I wasn’t there for you. I’m sorry I was gone so much. I’m sorry I wasn’t a good husband, or friend, or father. I know my mistakes, and I’m doing what I can to make it right again. Please let me make it right again.”

“Maybe … we could all do something together next time.” Skandar suggested, “All of us. You, me, Petey, and Trouble.”

William smiled softly, yet still bittersweetly, “So I suppose taking you home tonight and keeping you there is out of the question, as opposed to there being a next time at a later date?”

Skandar shook his head, “Sorry, Will. I … I said I’d give it a chance, but … we’re this close to a divorce and … I don’t think it would be very smart of me to just … jump right back into a situation I’ve been otherwise trying to get out of.”

“But … that was before, Skan.” William said urgently, “I mean, that was … before I changed things. I’ve changed. I’m home. I got rid of Jimmy. I’ve cleared my work schedule. I’m doing everything I can to show you that where I am right now is where I need to be. I don’t just want to be with you and our boys, I need to be. And I don’t just need to be with you and our boys, I want to be. As far as I can see, either way you look at it, this is where I should be. All that’s missing now, is you.”

“That’s not fair, Will. You can’t drive me away from you and then … and then do this.”

“It’s not fair, Teacup. I know it’s not fair. But it’s how it is.” William said, holding Skandar’s hand in both of his own, “I want to keep wearing my ring, and I want to make sure I honour it, and you, and our boys. It’s not fair, but it’s how it is now. You made me see how selfish I’d become. You made me see what an asshole I’d become. You made me see me again. And me … the me you married, just can’t be without you.”

Skandar sniffled, his eyes glistening with emotion as he pondered William’s words, “And that’s why there’s going to be a next time, Will. And right now, that’s still all I’m prepared to guarantee. I’m sorry.”

William shook his head, blinking back his own tears as he squeezed Skandar’s hand, “Don’t be sorry. I’ll take that gladly, and just hope that there will be a next time after that, and after that. And every after that there ever is.”

PANIC MODE

“God, you two really do just … you know …” Sarah deadpanned, shaking her head as William paced in front of her, “Suck ass.”

William was wearing a hole in Sarah’s carpet, pacing while she sat on her sofa, staring blankly at him. Once more she was playing the role of a sounding board for the Keynes-Moseley couple.

“Sarah, come on.” William said, hands moving through his hair, “You have to help me.”

“Why aren’t you talking to Anna? She’s your girl. I’m Skandar’s. Remember?”

“Oh fuck off.” William said, throwing a cushion at her, “You’re the mother of my boys. I don’t give a fuck if you don’t like me. You know Skandar. Come on, help me. I’m trying to save my family here.”

“Shouldn’t you know him since you are married to him?” Sarah asked, rolling her eyes, “Geez, you know he was here the day you guys went out to dinner. He was kinda freaking out like you were.”

“What’d he say?” William asked eagerly, rushing to sit beside her, “What did he say to you?”

“Well, first of all, I do like you. Now, if you want me to be honest with you, Skandar was weighing up whether or not he should follow this through with you. He’s afraid it’s just prolonging the inevitable and that … you know … you’ll turn into Uber Ass again. I tried to tell him that you can’t help it, you were just born with that face.”

“Oi!” William gasped, smirking, “People love this face. Do you hear me? Love.”

Sarah chuckled and nodded her head, “Yes, including Skandar. Look, I don’t have the magic answer for you, Will. All I know is that if you both really love each other, and work at it, it’ll work out. And look, I know you must be sick of hearing this by now, but … I think what Skandar needs to feel most, is that having your family back together is what you really, really want. Deep down. And that you aren’t going to … drift away again when your career starts taking off. Because it will. You’ve had the independent run of recognition, and you’ve had the run of doing big budget. Your career is pretty safe. But your family isn’t. It’s all about priorities, Will. What are yours? What are they, really?”

THE NEXT TIME AFTER THAT

“Come on down, my beautiful boys!” Skandar yelled excitedly.

He’d just arrived back at the home he still technically owned, but which he was no longer a resident of. The ‘next time’ that he had promised William had arrived, just two days after their most recent date. The annual Keynes-Moseley family photo.

“Daddy?” Petey yelled, poking his head out of his bedroom door and looking down at Skandar, “Daddy!”

“Oooh oooh doh!” Eddy gasped, trying to waddle behind Petey and falling over himself in the process.

William laughed, rushing to scoop his youngest up before he carried him downstairs. He kissed Eddy’s chubby cheek and received a punch in the face for his troubles. He winced, holding his face and laughing.

“Meh punch ooh face!” Eddy cried out, punching William again.

“Ow!” William laughed, “You little shit! I’ll bloody beat you up!”

Eddy laughed, punching William again. He then cupped William’s face and kissed him messily, causing him to laugh out loud. Skandar couldn’t help but smile at the sight, wondering how many of these moments he’d missed since he’d lost custody of the boys to William.

“William, you shouldn’t swear in front of our son.” Skandar laughed, picking Petey up and giving him a kiss and a hug, “My beautiful Petey, Daddy’s so happy to see you. Even if he does have to hear Daddy using such foul language.”

“What!? Have you seen how he hits me!?” William asked, smiling and kissing Eddy’s fist adoringly, “Such a cutie pie.”

Eddy cooed, giggling and nuzzling his face into William’s neck. It was in that small moment of affection that Skandar could truly see that William had endeared himself into the life of his youngest. If he could win the Face Puncher they called Trouble over, then perhaps he truly had changed.

“Can Daddy have a kiss, Sweetheart?” Skandar asked with a hopeful smile.

Eddy leaned over, kissing Skandar’s cheek with a press of sloppy lips. Skandar smiled happily, turning to kiss Eddy on the lips. It felt so good to be with his boys again, but it only made him ache because he missed them so much. He didn’t just miss being with them, he missed the familiarity that came with being around them every day.

“Come on, Boys! Family photo time!” William called, heading for the front door.

Petey broke hold of Skandar’s hand, rushing to grab William’s as they headed out the door. Skandar jerked in surprise, standing still and looking at the sight of William leading their two boys out. There was a time not long ago when neither would give William the time of day, and now it was the other way around.

Skandar felt a rise of anguish inside, tinged with jealousy and regret. He couldn’t help feeling angry at William for taking his boys from him. And while William was doing his best to reconcile their marriage, it didn’t ease how resentful Skandar felt right now.

Petey popped his head back through the front door, smiling widely, “Daddy? Come?”

Petey held out his hand to Skandar, taking his Daddy by surprise. Skandar smiled softly, realizing his eldest son hadn’t lost his sensitive streak at all. He was still the same beautiful soul Skandar had raised.

“Daddy’s coming.” Skandar said, taking Petey’s hand in his own.

Eddy’s big brown eyes were next to peek around the door, “Oi. Tum.” He demanded.

William was last to peek around, his head just above Eddy’s, a grin plastered on his face, “Teacup? Is there a reason you’re slowing down the Keynes-Moseley express?”

“You just feel free to kiss my ass whenever you’re ready, Moseley.” Skandar smirked, leading Petey out and feeling immensely better.

“What happened to no swearing in front of our children? And did you mean it about kissing your ass? Because I’m free tonight, Teacup.” William grinned, staring at Skandar’s ass as he followed behind him, “All night.”

WE ARE FAMILY

“Say cheese!”

“Jeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeez!” Eddy gasped, flubbering his lips.

“Oh that’s disgusting, you little monkey.” Skandar laughed, covering Eddy’s mouth with his hand.

Eddy bit down on Skandar’s hand, just as the camera flashed. The photo was taken with Skandar’s face contorted in surprise agony. Petey and William were locked with gasped expressions, both staring at Skandar. Only Eddy had eyes twinkling with mirth as he bit into his Daddy’s hand.

“Skan-damnit!” Skandar gasped, causing William to cover his mouth and chuckle, “Will, your son!”

“Still having delusions of Godhood, Teacup?” William asked, gently taking Skandar’s hand from Eddy’s lips, “There there, Trouble, bite Daddy’s hand after we’ve taken a nice family photo, okay?”

“Otay.” Eddy grinned with squinty eyes, nodding.

“I’m the boss.” Skandar said to William, “We’re going to correct this imbalance in the whole time-space continuum where Eddy listens to you instead of me. As soon as we get home.”

“As soon as we get home.” William repeated, smiling and putting his arm around Skandar before he kissed his temple, “I promise.”

Skandar didn’t say anything, but snuggled into the one armed hug. Petey clutched to Skandar’s leg, while Eddy was held up between his parents by William. For one miraculous moment, all four members of the Keynes-Moseley clan smiled at the same time. For one miraculous moment, a camera photographed perfection.

ONE YEAR LATER

“And how did that work for you?” June asked, smiling as William held a photo out to her, “This is the photo?”

June Ames, one of the few reporters that both Skandar and William had a history of dealing with, sat opposite William as the two conducted an exclusive interview. William looked gaunt, having lost some weight in the last few months. He had rings under his eyes, and their deep blues held a melancholy that was tangible.

He stared at the photo June presently studied, with a look of longing. It was one palpable moment in his life that he could cling to. A moment he could look back upon and feel as if he was still there. As if he still had that perfect singular moment happiness with his beautiful family.

“Isn’t it perfect?” William asked, a bittersweet smile on his face, “That was … just before it all went wrong. I really … I really thought it was getting better.”

“That’s when … that’s when things started to go wrong?”

William took the photo back, staring fondly down at it, “That’s when the monster I made, came back to bite me. That’s when my mistakes finally caught up with me.”

William sniffled as a tear rolled down his cheek. He traced his fingers over the faces in the photo, shuddering and wondering how he could even look at it without falling apart.

“But it wasn’t your fault. You weren’t responsible for what happened.” June said, trying to comfort William, “You aren’t to blame.”

“I’m the only one to blame.” William said, closing his eyes, “I may not have don’t it with my own hands, but it was my choices in life, my path in life that brought it upon my loved ones. I really thought we had a chance to make a life together. And I truly believe we would have …”

“But Jimmy took that away from you, didn’t he?”

William opened his eyes and stared at the photo again, “Jimmy … Jimmy is the greatest mistake of my life. For as long as I live, he will have taken me to the heights of my career and to the end of my personal happiness. I will never forgive him for what he did to my family. And I don’t think I’ll be able to forgive myself either.”

-- To Be Continued --

A/N: I think this is the beginning of the final stretch of chapters that will conclude Breathe and my whole COS-verse.</div>

Skandar Update

suborbital — Sun, 29 Mar 2009 22:06:06 GMT

Hey everyone,

Here are some new pics from Skandar's recent trip to Switzerland to track down the Grey Wolf in the Jura Mountains of Switzerland.

I'll have two!

Here's a pic from Skandar's trip to a school to help some lucky kids get into Darwin and Science.

And some more pics!

Is this Skandar trying to be fabulous like William with his scarves? Who knows!?

Goodness this man is gorgeous, and beautiful too!

And finally, last but not least, here's an MP3 of Skandar interviewing some specialists for his IUCN work in Switzerland.

http://cmsdata.iucn.org/downloads/skandar_keynes_final.mp3

Excuse me while I drool for a moment.

suborbital — Fri, 16 Jan 2009 10:06:47 GMT

To the few who might still visit my journal. If I was going to write another piece of Narnia fanfic. What would it be? JaM-related? Breathe? Two Kings? What? Please let me know, if anyone out there is still here. I'd like to do something. So let me know what it is you'd like to see.

NMA 08 Picspam

suborbital — Mon, 08 Sep 2008 21:18:57 GMT

There are tags galore unfortunately, but until some untagged pics come along, here are a bunch of pictures of the Pevensie Cast at the National Movie Awards 2008.

He's so cute! Even if he can't get a decent haircut.

WillMos just gets better with age, me thinks.

William and his past/future/current bit on the side.

William and his future wife.

Smile coz you're gorgeous and you know it, Baby.

The High King and Miss Poppintits, who also gets better with age.

Hail to the Kings and Queens of Old, yo

Breathe 12 - For Better or Worse

suborbital — Sun, 13 Jul 2008 22:13:03 GMT

Breathe

A Chronicle of Skandar and William

Chapter 12 – For Better or Worse

FOR BETTER OR WORSE

Skandar and William burst through a storage room door at the back of the club. Their lips were locked on one another in an angry, passionate duel for control. They could hardly figure out where they were going. They crashed against the wall, blindly kicking the door shut behind them. Whenever Skandar tried to break the kiss, William growled and cupped Skandar’s face tighter, holding the kiss. Whenever William tried to break the kiss, Skandar grunted in annoyance and resumed the kiss again.

Somehow Skandar managed to pry his lips free, allowing for William to pull his shirt off and toss it aside. Skandar’s lips moved down William’s chest, his tongue swirling around the hardened nipple. His cock was straining in his pants he was so turned on at being able to lick and kiss William’s body. He’d never found one that could top it.

Without warning or much finesse at all, Skandar had William’s pants around his knees. He stared at that raging hard cock as if it was the first time he’d ever seen it. He shoved his face into William’s groin, drunk with desire. He nuzzled the low hanging balls his husband possessed, inhaling their scent as his mouth made rough nips and bites. Finally after licking from base to tip, Skandar’s warm mouth descended over William’s cock.

“Guh, fuck!” William grunted, slapping his hands against the wall to brace himself.

William’s knees were already weak from drinking too much, so the sudden and shock inducing sensation of receiving head from the only man he’d ever been in love with, was making his knees begin to buckle. Skandar slapped William’s bare ass as if to jerk him back upright, before he resumed sucking with fervour. His tongue swirled around the bulbous and sensitive head, causing William to shriek with the ecstasy. Skandar himself was rather drunk with lust, revelling in the knowledge he’d soon be gifted with William’s thick, creamy sperm. He felt like a whore, on his knees in some random storage room, but he didn’t care. All he cared about was that the cock he was sucking was the only cock he really ever wanted to suck in his life.

William was already close to cumming even before Skandar started bathing his cock in a mouth sent from heaven. Yet the moment two of Skandar’s slick fingers jammed roughly up his ass, he let out a sharp piercing cry and shot his load down Skandar’s throat. Skandar jerked in surprise, gasping and near choking on the sudden rush of cum being emptied into him.

“Teacup, I ... uh ... shit!” William cried out, his fists clenching with worrying intensity.

Barely giving William time to recover, Skandar pulled off and used some of William’s own sperm and his saliva to lube up his cock. William was still lost in the aftermath of his intense orgasm when Skandar flipped him to face the wall. Kicking William’s legs apart, Skandar pressed the head of his cock against William’s ass and pushed in just slightly. William winced in surprise, not properly prepared for what was to come.

Suddenly Skandar slammed his cock in balls deep up William’s ass. He reached around to cover William’s mouth as William let out a loud, agonizing scream of pain. Skandar was too drunk to pay it much heed, and William was too drunk to notice the pain completely. William breathed hard against the wall, tears pricking his eyes as he began to sob. Skandar rutted into him, pants around his ankles as his pale hips jammed forward. William was nearly naked, with his pants around his feet and his shoes the only items of clothing he had on. Skandar still had his shirt on and his own pants were down by his shoes.

This was not a session of making love. It was a fuck, short and brutal. Skandar buried his head in the back of William’s shoulder, grunting with each thrust. William was shaking from his crying, letting out a pained wail on one particularly powerful thrust. He reached behind him to try and find one of Skandar’s hands, grabbing it as if it were a lifeline to some form of intimacy. Skandar smacked his hand away and wrapped his arms around William’s chest as he continued to fuck him.

“Ow!” William sobbed, gasping breathlessly, “Skan ... please ... it hurts.”

“I thought my dick was too small to hurt.” Skandar grunted, driven by lust and clouded by alcohol, “Want me to stop?”

“No!” William begged, pleaded, breathing hard, “No, no. Cum in me. In me.”

So that is exactly what Skandar did, but not before he placed a heated kiss on William’s shoulder, right over his tattoo. With a low moan, Skandar erupted inside William, his legs shaking as orgasm ripped through him. After a few moments, Skandar pulled out, frowning at the slightly bloody tinge on his cock. He grabbed a box of toilet rolls on of the shelves and pulled one out to clean his cock off. He tried to do the same to William’s ass, wiping his leaking cum and small specks of blood off.

“Ow, ow, it’s okay.” William winced, pulling his pants up with a little difficulty, “Th ... thank you.”

“Mmm.” Skandar grunted in response, feeling as if he was about to pass out, sitting on the floor, “Coming home ... wif ... you.”

For all the quick, ugly, loveless sensations involved in their storage room tryst, Skandar’s simple statement made it all worth it. William was feeling suddenly more aware of what was happening. He stared down at Skandar, whose pants were still around his ankles.

“We just had sex!” William shrieked suddenly, grinning madly, “Oh my God! Teacup!”

“Two sugar.” Skandar mumbled, letting out a yawn, “No milk.”

”Skan, get up, I can’t carry you, I’m too drunk and my ass is on fire.”

“I’m too fucked.” Skandar whined, “Where’s my beer?”

William pulled out his cell phone to call a taxi to wait outside the club. He knelt beside Skandar, wincing in discomfort. It had been a long time since his ass was used as an entry. Though it was horribly unfair, Skandar usually bottomed. William figured he deserved to be on the receiving end tonight, and frankly he’d take anything he could get from Skandar. He felt so happy he wanted to cry and that’s exactly what he did as he fumbled to get Skandar’s pants up.

“Will, Will.” Skandar whispered, hand moving to caress William’s cheek, “Don’t ... cry. I’m sure we can ... find ... more beer.”

William burst with teary laughter as he helped Skandar to his feet, “You’re a dick, Skandar. I love you.”

“I love dick too, Sweetheart.” Skandar nodded, putting his arm around William’s shoulder, “More beer.”

“More at home, I promise.”

“I better come wif then, aye? Heehee.” Skandar giggled, “Hey ... guess what?”

“What, Skan?”

“I’m drunk.”

“I’m halfway there too.” William laughed, helping Skandar back through the club.

William caught sight of Sarah and Anna having a giggle with some of their friends. He gave Sarah a thumbs up and a grin, which caused Sarah to stand up and start cheering loudly. William grinned and mouthed an ‘I love you’ to her and Anna, before he continued leading Skandar out.

“More beer!” Skandar grinned, breaking away from William to rush for the bar.

“Skandar!” William gasped, laughing as he grabbed his hand, “Taxi’s outside!”

“But I want more!” Skandar whined, pouting, “I’m having fun!”

“I thought you wanted to come home with me.”

“Is there beer?” Skandar asked with a raised eyebrow.

“Skan, it’s our house, remember?”

“Shitloads of beer!” Skandar grinned, jumping onto William and wrapping his legs around his waist, “You’re so damn hot. We should fuck.”

“We just did!”

“We did?” Skandar laughed as William carried him toward the entrance, “Oh shit we did!”

Skandar’s head was moving from side to side and his hands were swaying as he danced to the music. William smiled happily, finding the strength to carry Skandar with ease. Skandar was smiling stupidly, letting the music in the club take over his body. William suddenly felt the urge to stay. Skandar truly seemed happy and he didn’t want to end his night prematurely. The choice was soon taken from him when Skandar jumped off William and started dancing away.

“No doubt you play it real cool, Baby ...” Skandar sang, dancing rather coherently for someone who felt anything but, “Jive with me, Will! Yo!”

“Skandar!” William laughed, shaking his head and following after Skandar.

Just when William thought they were in for an extended stay, he realized Skandar was dancing his way toward the entrance. He took William’s hands and led them in a dance out of the club and onto the sidewalk. Grinning, Skandar’s head continued to sway from side to side as his hands pulled William closer.

“Will, Will!” Skandar said suddenly as they tumbled into the back of the taxi.

“What, Teacup?” William asked after he’d given the driver his address, “Are you okay?”

“Will!” Skandar gasped, eyes wide, “We should do this again!”

William laughed at the genuine sense of amazement in Skandar’s eyes, “You’re right! We should!”

“Bah bow, bah bow.” Skandar sang, still bopping along to music that existed only in his head.

William turned on his side so he could watch Skandar. He couldn’t help but smile contently, watching Skandar’s animated hand motions as he made up a song and danced to it even as he sat. It was rather endearing for William to see.

Even when they arrived at their beachside home, Skandar was still bopping. He danced his way from the taxi into the house and right into the bar downstairs. Grabbing as much beer as he could carry, he continued dancing his way upstairs to the deck. He let out a loud wolf cry for no other reason except he felt like it.

“Will, I just helped myself to a shitload of your beer, Baby!” Skandar screamed into the house, realizing he’d left William at the taxi to pay for it, “Is my guitar still in the same place!?”

William emerged onto the deck, carrying Skandar’s guitar. He hadn’t changed anything since Skandar had moved out, and the reminder of the fact he didn’t live here only served to annoy William. He handed Skandar’s guitar to him and sat down on the deck, opening them both a bottle of beer. Smiling contently, he watched as Skandar’s fingers moved deftly over the strings and his deep voice began to sing.

“Help me if you can, I’m feeling down ...” Skandar sang, “... and I do appreciate you being around. Help me if ...”

“Something happier?” William suggested, “Let me guess, you sang that a lot while I was AWOL?”

“Mmm.” Skandar nodded, still smiling as he strummed another tune on the guitar, “Where are we? What the hell ... is going on? The dust ... has only ... just ... begun to fall. Crop circles in the parapet. Sinking ... healing. Hide and ... seek ...”

William closed his eyes and let his senses be filled by all that was his Teacup. Skandar’s guitar playing and voice resonated through William’s soul. It felt so good to be home, and to have Skandar here with him. It just felt right, but still the nagging sensation deep down that this was only a transitory moment of bliss still occupied William’s thoughts. He opened his eyes, to find Skandar smiling curiously and staring at him, no longer singing or playing.

“You ok?” Skandar asked, smiling brightly as he drank more of his beer, “I wrote a song for you too.”

“Let me guess. ‘Will’s an asshole, an asshole, an asshole’?” William chuckled.

“Nah, that one will be for my post divorce efforts.” Skandar grinned before he cleared his throat, drank more beer and then started plucking the guitar strings as if to find the right note.

I’m counting the sand
Watching it falling
Over and out of my hands
All the sunlight has gone
The stars are calling
I wonder if I’ll be free

We’ve been struggling now
Can’t see the clearing
I wonder if we’ll be free
There’s no need for duress
We can still be here somehow

Want you today
Want you today
I wonder if you will ever be free
Want you today
Want you today
My love is here, it’s waiting just for you
Just for you
Sometimes I wish it wasn’t true

When my body is cold,
Aching and lonely,
All that I need is you.
Can’t escape from you now,
I know you’ll find me somehow.

Come home to me now
Come home to me now
My love is here, it’s waiting for you
Come home to me now
Come home to me now
My love is here, it’s waiting just for you
Just for you
Oh I wish it wasn’t true

Want you today
Want you today
My love is here, it’s waiting just for you
Just for you
I know it’ll always be true

Skandar’s eyes were closed by the time he sang the last word and played the last note. He took a deep breath, feeling somewhat sombre after singing that song and feeling as if he’d just gotten a hug weight off his chest by doing so. He turned to William, gulping nervously before he realized William was staring at him with eyes that were filled with sadness.

“Teacup ... that was ... so beautiful.” William gasped, simply amazed, “Heartbreaking and beautiful. Oh my God.”

William was stunned by the potency of the words, by the truth of the song. It almost felt like a cry for help right out of Skandar’s soul. While the song was heartbreaking and made him feel immeasurable guilt for effectively abandoning Skandar during their marriage, the last line gave him a bright glimmer of hope. Would it always be true?

“Will it really always be true?” William asked softly, reaching over to cover Skandar’s hand with his own.

“For better or worse.” Skandar whispered, staring desolately at the ground.

Skandar set his guitar down and finished off the last of his beer. Without a word he stood to his feet and grabbed his coat. William let out a sigh, but he didn’t try to stop Skandar leaving. He didn’t think he had much right to anymore.

“I ... I’m sorry.” William said softly, standing to his feet, “If it’s ... any consolation, I ... I came home. Maybe a bit late, but I came home.”

“And if I came home, how long would it be until you left us again? I can’t risk loving you and losing you again. I’m not that strong, Will.”

William lowered his eyes in shame, frowning. He raised them again to see Skandar leaving, but this time he moved to stop him. He turned Skandar to him just before he made it into the house. He was about to say something when Skandar shook his head, as if to tell him not to speak. William desperately wanted to, but he acquiesced to Skandar’s request.

“For better or worse.” Skandar whispered, more to himself than to William, “That’s what we said to each other.”

“We’ve had a lot of worse, Teacup, so don’t you think it’s time we both tried for a little better?” William pleaded, his eyes doing it more than his words ever could, “I’ve failed you. I’ve failed our family. You can’t risk loving me and losing me again? I can’t imagine ever being happy if you didn’t love me again. If you give me a hope, Skan, I will give you everything I have. Just give me a hope. Please.”

Skandar pondered William’s request for a few moments. Did William really understand the gravity of what he was asking? Skandar believed he did. Though both of them were extremely intoxicated, they both understood what was being implied here. There were no dramatic declarations of love and eternal forgiveness. There were no bended knee pleads of desperation. All there was, was a simple nod from Skandar to William. That was all. Yet for William, that was enough. That was everything. That was a hope.

- To Be Continued -

A/N: I wrote Skandar's song, I hope you like it! Sorry it was so short, but I thought it was fitting for this chapter. This wasn’t supposed to come so soon, but travelling about can be rather inspiring, so here you are. Not long to go now! Comments are love.

</div>

Breathe 11 - Sarah Knows Best

suborbital — Sat, 12 Jul 2008 11:19:31 GMT

Title: Breathe
Pairing: Will/Skandar, Anna/OFC
Rating: R
Summary: Sarah invites William to a party with one purpose in mind. To get him back with his man.
Disclaimer: Not mine, not real! It's FICTION.
A/N: Breathe is the sequel series to 'Chronicles of Skandar'. Read that first! Read earlier chapters - Breathe.

Breathe

A Chronicle of Skandar and William

Chapter 11: Sarah Knows Best

KIDS SAY THE DARNDEST THINGS

“Petey?” Mandy asked as she sauntered over to her classmate.

“Yes?” Petey replied, hanging upside down on the monkey bars in his school playground.

He looked at her for a while before he grabbed a bar and let himself flip down to the ground. He brushed his hands and waited for Mandy to speak. He was waiting for his Poppa to pick him up from school, but he seemed to be running a little late so Petey had to wait inside the school grounds until he was collected.

“Where’s your Poppa?” Mandy asked, sitting down beside Petey on one of the swings, “Is he coming to get you again?”

“Yes.” Petey nodded matter of factly, “Poppa picks me up every day now.”

“Why?” Mandy asked curiously, “Is it because your other daddy ran away from your house?”

“No, he didn’t run away. He went to get a haircut.”

“Really?” Mandy asked, shocked, “It must take a long time.”

“I think it’s because he gets died when he does it? And they have to bring him back to life.”

Mandy couldn’t believe what she was hearing, “Wow. Really? He gets died?”

“That’s what Sarah says.” Petey nodded as he swung idly, “She gets her hair died too, but she doesn’t take long to come back to life.”

“Sarah? That’s the lady that comes to get you too? Is she your aunty?”

“No, Silly.” Petey giggled, “She’s my Mummy!”

“Is she really!? But I thought you had two Daddies?”

“I do.” Petey nodded, “I have two daddies and a mummy and an Aunty Anna.”

“I have two daddies as well!” Mandy gasped, “I have my Mummy and my Daddy and then Mummy has another Daddy but my Daddy doesn’t know about the other Daddy because it’s a secret.”

“Oooh. Secret Daddy.” Petey said in agreement, “My Daddy’s not secret, he’s just gone away because Poppa and Daddy are broked up.”

“You’re lucky.” Mandy nodded.

“Why?”

“Well, because that means you get two presents for your birthday!”

“Really!?” Petey gasped, eyes wide, “Two!?”

“Yep.” Mandy nodded, “When my Mummy and Daddy had the fighting and Mummy and me went to stay at Grandma’s? Well I got two presents for my birthday. Really good ones too.”

“So when your parents get the broked up, you get two presents?” Petey asked in disbelief.

“Yeah, but now they back together except for when Mummy sneaks out to the other Daddy’s place.” Mandy sighed, “Now I only get one present.”

“Oh, that’s sad.” Petey frowned before he caught sight of his Poppa approaching the school gates, “I have to go now. My Poppa’s here to get me.”

“Ok, Petey. Bye!” Mandy smiled brightly, giving him a wave.

Petey waved back to her and picked up his bag. He ran as fast as he could, jumping up into William’s awaiting arms where the two shared a warm hug. Petey kissed William hello and smiled again.

“Hi, Poppa.” Petey smiled, “Did you have a good day?”

“I had a wonderful day, Son. Did you have a good day?” William asked, carrying Petey on his back as they left the gate and walked toward the car.

“I did, I did!” Petey exclaimed, “You know my friend Mandy, Poppa?”

“You mean your girlfriend?” William teased playfully, “What about her?”

“She has two daddies as well!”

“She does?” William asked in confusion as he could see Mandy’s mother heading to the gate to collect her.

“Yep. She has her real Daddy and her secret Daddy that her Mummy goes to see without telling her real Daddy!”

“Oh God.” William gasped, bursting out with laughter before he covered his mouth, “Son, that’s ... oh my goodness.”

Petey laughed, but only because his Poppa was laughing as well, “And Poppa? You know for my birthday how I get two presents now because you and Daddy are broked up for the long time?”

“Oh ... what about it, Sweetheart?” William asked, his laughter quickly dissipating.

“Well, I ... I think I decided I just want one, because that means that you and Daddy are being friends and he comes home again.” Petey said, smiling broadly at the thought.

William stopped walking toward his car and moved Petey to his front, smiling sincerely at him, “Sweetheart, that’s so sweet of you to say. Poppa’s working on bringing Daddy home, okay?”

“Before my birthday?” Petey asked excitedly.

“Your birthday is so far away, I think I want Daddy home long before your birthday. Long, long before.”

“Maybe he could come to my school’s Family Day?” Petey asked thoughtfully.

“Oh, I don’t know if Daddy will want to, Sweetheart. But you can always ask him, right?”

APPEARANCES COUNT

“Will, are you sure this is such a good idea?” Anna said, biting her lip as she helped Petey into his little suit, “You know you’re going to get some awkward questions.”

“It’s for a good cause to help kids. It’s okay for us to go.” William reassured her.

An hour later a limo was delivering William, Anna, and the two boys to Auckland Central where a relatively small gala festival was being held to showcase one of Sarah’s theatre productions and raise funds for her pet charity, Canteen. William was rather nervous. It was one of his few public engagements since his divorce was announced. He wasn’t certain if Skandar would approve of him bringing the children, but he’d been unable to contact him for the last week since he’d been back in London with his family.

“How are things going with you and Sarah?” William asked Anna, squeezing her hand.

“Better, I think.” Anna said with a nod, “Mum obviously wasn’t pleased but ... I think she’s come to accept that I am what I am now. I think I have too. I’m hoping Sarah and I can take a holiday soon. Now that Mum’s gone, I think it’s time we really focused on each other.”

“I can tell.” William said, smiling at her, “You’ve always loved her but ... you seem more sure of it now. Or more accepting of your relationship.”

“I think the biggest problem was always with me, but now I’ve ... made a start, I think Sarah and I can concentrate on our future ... together.” Anna smiled, gushing slightly, “Better late than never, right?”

“Mmm.” Anna nodded, “And you? Any developments in your love life? Or is it a little soon for that?”

William was taken aback by the comment. Love life? What love life? Was he supposed to have one? His divorce wasn’t even final yet!

“Anna ...” William said seriously, “I’m still married.”

“Will, you’re di... look, nevermind. I’m sorry, I shouldn’t have said anything.”

“It’s too soon, alright?” William said, frowning at the prospect of even having a love life with someone else, “I’m still trying to stall the divorce for crying out loud.”

Anna gave William an apologetic smile and he shrugged it off sheepishly, giving her a kiss on the temple. By the time they arrived at their destination, Petey was falling off to sleep. William gave his eldest a gentle nudge, waking him up. The three stepped out to a relatively small media presence. Both were seasoned professionals by now, knowing how to wave and smile with ease. William glanced about for a sign of Sarah, as she had Eddy with her and he was anxious to see him.

“Heyyo, Poppa!” A familiar voice called out, “Oi!”

William grinned and turned in the direction of the call, but he was taken by surprise when he saw the person holding Eddy was indeed Skandar, and not Sarah. He didn’t even realize Skandar had arrived back in the country. They simply didn’t talk enough anymore to know what the other was doing. This little snippet of information was quite disappointing for William, but not as disappointing or shocking to see that Skandar was accompanied by someone. His lips tightened in anger and jealousy. He didn’t recognize the woman from behind, but the body language indicated a very close relationship.

“Unless you’re under the impression Skandar is screwing his sister ... I’d stop making jealous eyes.” Sarah whispered in William’s ear, smirking at him.

“Wait, what, no way.” William gasped before he realized his mistake, “Oh for fuck’s sake, I didn’t even recognize her!”

“You’re a jealous rat, Will Moseley.”

“Oh you shut up.” William laughed, pulling Sarah to him and giving her a cheeky wet kiss hello, “You didn’t even tell me he was going to be here!”

“I didn’t know he was going to be here. And he brought her back with him for a bit of moral support.” Sarah said, rubbing William’s arm, “Difficult time and all, I suppose.”

William watched as Skandar dazzled with his smile, looking as assured and confident as he could. For so long William had taken the spotlight, while Skandar remained behind the scenes. Now here he was, watching Skandar step out and take the attention.

“So now that your divorce is almost final, you’re starting to make a few most eligible bachelor lists.” A reporter said to Skandar, drawing an instant smirk.

“Oh is that so?” Skandar laughed, “Well I’m pretty sure William will make the top of those lists well before I do. I’m quite happy to disappear back behind the scenes once this little maelstrom is over. Besides, he’s the better looking one.”

“You’re too modest. You’re the name around town these days, and we’ve even heard rumours that you’ve been approached to consider the revival of James Bond. How would you feel about taking centre stage again?”

Skandar grinned at her, shaking his head, “Ahh, who have you been talking to? I think I’m still a little young for that. I’m not in my thirties yet! Ask William, he’s the dashing one.”

“You know, for someone getting a divorce from the man, you’re awfully quick to promote him.” The reporter chuckled, “One would almost think the tabloid reports of a nasty divorce are unfounded.”

“As far as promoting him goes, old habits die hard, I suppose. I’m very hopeful William and I will continue to be great friends as we raise our two children together. And as for our nasty divorce, the only thing nasty about it is the fact we’re getting one!” Skandar smiled, “It’s a little odd being here and doing a press junket without him, but I suppose we both couldn’t hide forever, could we?”

William smiled softly from afar, just admiring his husband. More and more he felt as if their separation was permanent. Hearing Skandar talk made it seem as if there was really no alternative to it. Skandar seemed to have already moved on. He seemed to already be looking at new horizons. William watched as Petey rushed to Skandar, giving him a tight hug. Skandar gasped in surprise, stopping his interview to greet Petey. William smiled as he watched, and then smiled even more when Skandar looked at him and gave a warm wave.

Immediately after that William kicked into work mode, starting his own round of the press junket. He never kept his gaze far from Skandar, but he felt the distance between them as if it was an ocean. It felt so strange for them to be doing press apart. To be recognized as two separate entities instead of one.

“William! This is one of your first public appearances since your divorce was announced. How does it feel to be doing the red carpet with your soon to be ex-husband?” A reporter asked him, “You seem to be very cordial with one another.”

“We uhh ...” William said, taking a moment to compose himself and switch on his work speak, “Skandar and I are very dedicated to our children and we’re both extremely hopeful that we can maintain a ... friendship during this difficult period. Our first priority is to our children and in that regard we both are on the same wavelength. It ... it is very ... odd to be here and to see him. I wasn’t expecting him to be here, but I’m very glad he is. He’s always been a strong supporter of Sarah’s. I’m just pleased that the ... disastrous fashion in which our divorce was announced is behind us. Thank you.”

William moved to the next reporter, but he was finding it hard to concentrate. This was all rather upsetting for him. The reality of his pending divorce was being hammered home by a mixture of seeing Skandar and having to face the press. It all brought home the fact that very soon he and Skandar would no longer be married. He’d always struggled to keep his emotions hidden and now was no exception.

“William? Did you hear my question?” Another reporter asked, “Is it difficult being here under these circumstances?”

“I ...” William said, a little overwhelmed, “I’m very happy to be here.”

“How do you think your divorce is going to impact your career? The Southern Star predicts your career will skyrocket now that you’re officially back on the market.”

“I’m very honoured to be here.” William said, trying to bypass the question and move on.

“William!” Another reported yelled out, “How strange is it to have your family attending the same event without doing any press together?”

“Excuse me, excuse me.” Skandar interrupted, approaching with the two boys and latching himself to William’s arm, “Until we’re officially divorced, I believe my husband and I are still entitled to do this junket together. That might avoid any ugly questions you lovely people might throw out there. And let me just say. William and I might be divorcing, but we are very much a clan still. Be nice to him, or I’ll bite you.”

Skandar smirked mischievously and gave a wink to the reporter who then proceeded to blush madly. William wasn’t really sure what to say or how to react. He stared at Skandar with a doe eyed smile.

“Teacup?” William asked, his voice barely audible.

“Well?” Skandar shrugged, “We’re not freaking divorced yet, are we? Let the vultures eat us after that. Come on, we’re still legally entitled to stick together, Keynes-Moseley style.”

Skandar smiled sincerely at William and for that small moment, William thought he might float away. It was a surreal moment that made William realize how very lucky he was, how lucky he’d always been to have this man as his husband, as his friend. Even now in the midst of their divorce, Skandar still cared. William’s eyes were glistening as he smiled back at Skandar, and without caring if it was appropriate, he leaned forward and kissed his husband deeply, passionately. While Skandar was taken by surprise, he didn’t reject in the least.

“Oooh tishes!” Eddy gasped, clapping his hands in support, “Tish meh!”

“I don’t think they’re really getting divorced.” One of the reporters whispered as they flashed their cameras, “It’s just a publicity stunt to relaunch Keynes’s acting career!”

Skandar broke the kiss suddenly and William awaited the stiff slap he was about to receive. He didn’t receive it. Skandar simply gave William a wry smirk and a raised eyebrow. Playing the moment off like a true professional, Skandar took William’s hand and continued along the red carpet.

“What?” Skandar shrugged at the reporters, “We’re not divorced yet, we can kiss if we want to.”

William felt like doing a little skip of joy in his head. Unfortunately, he did a little skip of joy for real. Cameras flashed the moment his two feet left the ground and clicked in a very Michael Flatley type moment. William didn’t particularly care, he was too busy feeling elated. He wanted to scream out loud and tell the world he still loved Skandar madly. So he did.

“I still love him!” William gasped suddenly, following behind Skandar like a willing lapdog, “We’re not getting di...”

Unfortunately they were already inside the theatre before William finished what he wanted to say. The moment they were inside and in private, Skandar rounded on William and broke their hand clasp.

“Aren’t you lucky I was here to save your ass?” Skandar smiled with a wink as he kept walking backwards, taking the boys with him, “Once the divorce is final, you’re on your own on the carpet, Baby. But until it’s final, milk me!”

William sighed, smiling bittersweetly, but he said nothing. He was on the verge of tears by the time Skandar disappeared around the corner with the boys to find their seats. He took a deep breath and held his head in his hands. Such a flurry of emotions he’d felt tonight. From the highest highs of hope to the lowest lows of realizing it was all just a facade. He let out a pained gasp and started crying quietly in a corner, hoping no one would see him.

“Hey.” Sarah said softly, rubbing William’s back, “It’s my party and you can only cry if I want you to.”

William couldn’t even muster a reply. He simply kept sobbing into his hands, shaking visibly. He wanted to punch the wall. He wanted to do something to show how upset he was. He felt so powerless to save his marriage and yet he wanted nothing more than to do just that.

“Hey, hey.” Sarah soothed, turning William around so she could hold him, “It’ll be okay. I saw the whole thing. Look at the chemistry, Will. It’s still there. Don’t give up. It’s still there. He’s just fighting it, but I know it’s still there. Don’t give up.”

“I feel like I’m the only one who cares anymore about saving our family. It’s like he’s already given up and moved on. He just doesn’t want me anymore, Sarah.” William gasped, sobbing loudly, “I can’t keep doing this. I can’t.”

“Alright, look. Anna and Skandar’s sister are taking the kids after the show. I don’t want you to watch the show. I want you to go ...” Sarah pulled a pen and card out of her purse.

She put the card against William’s chest so she could write on it. She scribbled a few notes on the card and shoved it into William’s breast pocket. Taking a deep breath, Sarah patted his chest.

“Go. You’re a mess and you need to just ... just listen to Sarah tonight. The boys will be fine. Just go away and read that card and ... see what you think.” Sarah said, her eyes glistening as she could clearly feel William’s emotion.

Sarah cupped William’s cheek tenderly as she gave him a sympathetic smile. She gave him a wet kiss on the lips and then the cheek before the pair hugged. This was it, she knew it. A do or die moment.

“You know, Sarah, I ... you and I have had our differences, but I ...” William began to say before Sarah interrupted him with a finger on his lips.

“How many years have we known each other now?” Sarah asked with a smile, “We’ll always have plenty of differences, but it doesn’t mean I don’t love you, Stupid. We have kids together, remember?”

“Yes.” William smiled, sighing contently as he held her, “I really don’t think I could’ve gotten through this period without you. Your support means so much to me. To the boys.”

“Then pay me back by screwing my girlfriend silly, okay?” Sarah teased, sighing as she closed her eyes, “She loves me so much, but she still fancies a good shag on a rod.”

William laughed out loud, hugging her tightly, “Oh, Sarah, you’re a crazy bitch.”

“Yep.” Sarah chuckled, “That’s how I want to be remembered. One Crazy Bitch.”

SKANDARLICIOUS

“I see you, Baby. Shakin’ that ass.” Anna sang as she danced chest to back behind Skandar.

Skandar was smirking broadly, the music of the club pumping through his veins. Sarah’s gala festival had been a resounding success with a good profit made for her charity. Now the celebrations were in full swing. The two boys were spending the night with Skandar’s sister in his hotel room. Even after all this time, Skandar hadn’t finalized the purchase of a new house.

Anna had definitely let her hair down tonight and Skandar was positive she was well and truly ‘toasted’ on one too many daiquiris. She turned Skandar to her, draping her arms around his neck and licking her lips. Skandar was doing his best not to giggle. She was getting a little frisky. It wasn’t out of place for the two couples to be comfortable with each other and playfully flirt, but it was a little odd for Anna to do so. She was usually so proper. Skandar was lapping up the attention she was giving him.

“Getting me a little heated here, Anna.” Skandar teased, grinding their hips together on the dance floor, “I think you want some of this.”

“Maybe if I could find it.” Anna whispered, licking her lips, “Got a magnifying glass?”

“Ooh, playing hard to get.”

“Skandar, how many times have you tried to get in my panties?”

Skandar tapped his lips, “And yet still no glory.”

“Well, I won’t mind.” Sarah smirked, moving behind Skandar and linking hands with Anna.

The two women clasped hands tightly either side of Skandar, three sets of groins grinding on the dance floor. Skandar smirked as if he was in heaven, making the most of his wet dream fantasy come to life. He’d drunk his fair share of ales and was feeling quite loose and happy, not to mention horny.

“Ahh, there’s my biotch.” Anna giggled at Sarah, before she pressed up close to Skandar so she could reach over his shoulder.

Sarah did the same behind Skandar, and soon the two girls were making out rather heatedly. Skandar groaned, grinning like a Cheshire cat. He dared to let his hands wander down to Anna’s ass, giving it a firm squeeze.

“There you are.” Anna whispered, smiling happily at Sarah as the three continued their intimate dance, “Skandar’s mini-me is hard.”

“It’s not mini!” Skandar gasped, laughing and playfully biting her neck.

“Sorry, Skan, my girl’s here now, no need for you.” Anna said as she broke the dance with Skandar and started dancing alone with Sarah.

“Boo!” Skandar laughed, grabbing a drink from a hostess as she passed by him.

Skandar watched, playfully amused as he watched the girls make out in the middle of the dance floor. The party was being held in a club that was entirely booked out so as to prevent an influx of gatecrashers and afford the attendees some privacy. He licked his lips before he took a seat at the bar and continued to watch the couple. Anna seemed so relaxed tonight. While it was no secret that the two women were in a relationship, Anna had never been particularly fond of public displays of affection. Skandar was certain that alcohol played a part, but he was certain there was a change in Anna that allowed her to be more open and accepting of her and Sarah’s relationship.

“You know, for someone who has been married to a man for seven years, you sure seem interested in the fairer sex.”

Skandar recognized the voice as belonging to one of his many overpaid assistants, Harlan. He didn’t mind overpaying them if they did their job well and he actually enjoyed their company. This particular assistant he enjoyed being around more than most of his employees.

“It just means I have seven years of catching up to do.” Skandar smirked, “You’re not drunk yet?”

“Someone needs to be sober enough to make sure you get back to your hotel safely.”

“You’re not on the job tonight!” Skandar said, shaking Harlan by the arms, “Get drunk, have fun!”

“Alright, alright!” Harlan laughed, taking a drink one of the hostesses offered him, “Happy now?”

“Much.” Skandar grinned, his eyes tracing through the crowd of partygoers, “You know, it’s going to be odd when I’m officially on the market again. Even though both William and I technically are already.”

“Odd or bountiful?” Harlan said with a slight chuckle, “I dunno, Skandar, I didn’t know you before you were married and I think I liked you better when you weren’t such a pervy alcoholic.”

Skandar smirked in response, “Only you would get away with saying something like that. And well, I’m a man with needs, you know?”

At that moment a woman walked past Skandar, brushing her finger over his chest, “Hey, Sugar.”

“Hey, yourself.” Skandar said, giving her a raised eyebrow as she walked off.

“She’s offering.”

“Eh, I’m a man with needs but I don’t know, the wind is blowing me toward some ass of the male variety tonight.” Skandar said, tapping his fingers against his glass, “Hmm.”

“You’re not bisexual, you’re just a freaking pervert. God, you’re just turning into a slutty whore!” Harlan gasped, half chuckling.

“Preach it, Baby.” Skandar said, finishing off his drink before his eyes caught sight of a particularly tight ass of the desired male variety across the room, “Rump alert.”

“Sorry, Skan, wrong gender for me.”

“You poor, poor single gender loving man.” Skandar smiled, eyes narrowing in on that extremely tight, muscular ass, “Oh man, I want some of that.”

Skandar grinned, his eyes moving down the legs of his target before they moved back up to the ass, past the tapered waist and up to the obviously muscled back. Men with lean muscle wearing tight shirts? Skandar couldn’t resist.

“Here, hold this.” Skandar said, handing Harlan his drink before he set out after his target.

Skandar made it two steps before his desired male ‘ass’ turned around. Eyes wide, Skandar almost lost his breath. His desired piece of ass was stunning, striking, breathtaking. His desired piece of ass was also his soon to be ex-husband. William caught Skandar’s gaze, equally surprised, before he gave him a warm smile.

“Awkward.” Skandar winced, giving a weak smile and wave to William.

“Oh, you’re on fire, Stud!” Harlan laughed.

Skandar turned around and punched Harlan in the arm. He sat down at the bar, his pulse racing and his breath coming in short, ragged bursts. He hadn’t even recognized William from behind. He was dressed differently, his hair was styled differently, and most of all, it had simply been so long since Skandar had checked out his own husband, he’d forgotten what William looked like in that manner.

“Shame on you, checking out your own husband like that.” Harlan said, rolling his eyes and handing Skandar another drink.

“Is he looking at me?” Skandar whispered, trying to look inconspicuous.

“Yes, Boss, he is.” Harlan said, taking a deep breath, “He’s standing across the room, staring at you like a lovesick heartbroken puppy.”

“Do you think he noticed I was checking him out?”

“Well, he’s walking over here, so I’m guessing he did. You know, I’m not interested at all in having sex with someone who has three legs, but your husband looks really good tonight. Dressing to impress, is he?” Harlan asked, “He’s almost right behind you.”

Skandar took a deep breath and turned around, turning on his best smile, “Will? What a surprise! I had absolutely no ... no ... idea you’d be here tonight.”

“Ahh ... yeah, Sarah. She invited me.” William said nervously, “I uhh ... could I buy you a drink?”

“No.” Skandar said bluntly, “Because the drinks are free. But you can have a seat and join me for one if you like.”

“That’s my cue.” Harlan said, “I’ll be trying to impress one of these very drunk women.”

Skandar watched Harlan leave before he turned to William, who was quickly taking a seat. It had been a long time since Skandar had seen William looking so nervous. Especially for him. As far as Skandar was concerned, it had also been just as long since he felt stirrings in his loins [amongst other places] upon seeing William. The truth of the matter was, Skandar thought William looked jaw droppingly gorgeous tonight.

“So umm ... I’m ... sorry for ... checking you out like that. I didn’t realize it was you.” Skandar shrugged, “You look ... really ... really good tonight, Will. You look stunning.”

“Got your attention, didn’t I?” William smiled, glancing away from Skandar as he took another drink, “Sarah set it up. She sent me home before the show with a card and instructions and an invite to this party. So ... here I am.”

“Here you are.” Skandar smiled, unable to help staring at William, “Surprising, but ... good.”

“I’m sorry. I know this was a private party, it was a stupid idea for me to come.”

Skandar shifted closer, putting his hand on William’s thigh to stop him getting up, “Hey. Stay. It’s been a long time since we were out like this together. A long time since you and I saw each other before tonight. You’re all dressed up. Don’t let it go to waste.”

“You ... don’t mind?” William asked, feeling butterflies turning in his stomach, “I’d really like that.”

“Well then?” Skandar smiled, his cheeks rose tinted from drinking and enjoying himself, “You look so good tonight, Will.”

Skandar shuffled a little closer, leaning in. He took a swig of his drink and then slammed his fist on the bar. He grinned at William.

“You’re not drunk enough yet. Let’s play a game.” Skandar said, fetching four drinks from a passing tray and placing them on the bench, “It’s called, William has to drink all these drinks because Skandar will feel stupid if William isn’t as drunk as Skandar. Come on, Will.”

Skandar let out a whine and a chuckle before William began his task. Two shots in, William was laughing and holding his chest as if it hurt. Skandar slapped him on the back and drank his third for him before William snatched the fourth and drank it down. When that was done, he grabbed one more drink and polished it off before he let out a holler and smacked his chest.

“Shit!” William moaned, the heat the vodka coursing through his body, “Whoa!”

“Yes!” Skandar cheered, grinning as he hugged William from the side, “We’re gonna get stupid tonight, Baby!”

“Are we?!” William gasped back in disbelief, unable to help his ear to ear grin, “Yeah!?”

“Yes!” Skandar yelled, laughing as he slammed his hand down to signal for more drinks, “We are going to have so much fun, Baby. Line ‘em up, Barkeep!”

SARAH KNOWS BEST

“I ... fucking ... rock.” Sarah cheered, sitting in a corner table, watching Skandar and William at the bar.

Anna giggled, rubbing Sarah’s thighs as they were draped over her lap. She put her arm around Sarah and leaned into her ear. She was having a great night so far, and was still far from calling it quits.

“If it works, you get to ask me to do ... anything.” Anna whispered, biting Sarah’s earlobe and giggling again, “Anything you want ... with anyone ... anywhere.”

“Anyone would be me.” Sarah smirked, turning her head so she could kiss Anna heatedly, letting their tongues dart against one another’s.

“Thought you wanted to watch me with one of them.”

Sarah let her lips linger on Anna’s neck as she spoke, “Sometimes I do, sometimes I don’t. But if you were to get any dick at all, I would only let it be one of them. Otherwise you’re all mine, Honey.”

“Honeycup, that’s me.” Anna giggled, moving her own lips to Sarah’s neck, “And I have a cup full of honey for you. Just waiting for you to lap it up.”

“Anna!” Sarah laughed, pulling back to look Anna in the eyes, “You’re being a filthy bitch tonight!”

“I can’t help it when I’m with my girl.” Anna whispered, kissing Sarah sensually while she slid her hand up Sarah’s thigh, “I love you.”

Sarah smiled sincerely, leaning her temple against Anna’s, “Anna, you’ve been making me so happy lately.”

“You’ve been making me happy for years, Sarah.” Anna’s eyes were locked on Sarah’s, “Drunk or not, I know I’ll never love anyone the way I love you. You’re my best friend, my girlfriend, my lo... my lover. I just want to be with you.”

“I’m going to fuck you unconscious tonight.” Sarah gushed, moaning as Anna’s lips moved over her neck again.

As Anna’s lips drove Sarah to contemplate an early return home to ‘play’, her eyes caught sight of William and Skandar. They were both laughing and talking animatedly with each other as if locked in deep conversation. They’d ignored everyone else for the last hour and seemed to be truly revelling in one another’s company. William was so intensely focused on Skandar, while even Skandar seemed to hang on every word that left William’s lips. Most of all, their body language was very telling. Their chairs could not be any closer together. Skandar’s hand was constantly squeezing William’s thigh when he’d laugh at something.

“I just want to see them kiss, and then we can go, Honey?” Sarah moaned as Anna’s attention became more and more insistent.

“Mmm? What?” Anna whispered, being a little more daring and kissing down Sarah’s chest, “Sorry, Sweetie, I’m a little busy.”

Sarah let out a surprised shriek when she felt a cool liquid being poured over her chest. The part of her cleavage revealed by her dress was covered in a shot of Irish cream and just as quickly being lapped at by Anna. Sarah closed her eyes and tilted her head back. While she was rather overjoyed to have Anna being more comfortable and forthright in their relationship, she was still adjusting to it. This was certainly new for her. Perhaps at home, or a party hosted by friends, but a club?

RETURN TO FORM

“Will, Will! Free tit lick show!” Skandar laughed, pointing to Sarah and Anna in their corner table, “Haha!”

“Aww, no nippleage!” William grinned, “Still prefer dick myself.”

“Bullshit!” Skandar teased, shoving William playfully, “All your supposed affairs were with women!”

“Then you know they were all bullshit!” William shrieked with laughter, “Hi, I’m Will, and I’m a freaking homosexual.”

“You are not, you liar!” Skandar’s head fell forward in William’s lap, laughing loudly, “You’re so full of shit! You love pussy!”

“Pfft!” William cried, leaning over Skandar’s head to playfully rub his bum, “If that’s what you’re calling your ass, then yep, I do!”

“Stop touching my ass!” Skandar gasped, jerking upright and laughing still, “Touch my dick instead!”

“I think not!” William gasped, acting affronted, “You think me a common hussy to touch your dick after just a few drinks?”

“Just a few?”

William shrugged sheepishly, “Just a few too many?”

“Never!” Skandar said triumphantly, holding up a schooner of beer, “Remember the old days? We could drink anyone under the table!”

“Old days. That makes us old now.” William chuckled, putting his arm around Skandar’s shoulder, “How depressing, Teacup.”

“We don’t do depression here!” Skandar proclaimed, jumping off his stool to do a little spin, “Watch me, Baby!”

William watched on, grinning and bobbing his head from side to side as Skandar did a hand plant and proceeded to break dance in time with the blaring music. When two girls tried to join him he not so subtly stepped away from with while giving a ‘Bitch, please’ hand motion. Spinning on his back, Skandar suddenly kicked to his feet, throwing his coat off and at William. He gave William an intent look, dark bangs sweaty and sticking to his forehead. He moved back with a moonwalk like motion, the entire time staring seriously at William.

The DJ seemed to pick up on what Skandar wanted and immediately started mixing a series of old school beat mixes. Closing his eyes and slowly sashaying his hips from side to side, Skandar clicked his fingers. His toes started to tap and the floor began to clear around him. Suddenly his hands started clapping and he broke into another break dance sequence. Somewhere between a kick back and a jab jive, Skandar’s shirt came open, revealing a pale but surprisingly defined torso.

When the music stopped, Skandar was on his knees, sliding toward William. He jumped to his feet, grinning mischievously at William. He kicked to his feet to a loud round of cheers. William stared at him in disbelief, smiling broadly. Skandar took his coat back and gave William a wink.

“Who you calling old, Buddy?” Skandar smirked, taking his seat again and downing a swig of beer after his exhausting effort.

“I stand corrected.” William chuckled, “Alright, alright, my turn to entertain. I have a joke!”

“Oh good!” Skandar said, rubbing his hands together and listening intently.

“Okay, so, what do you get when you cross a Yankee man with a British woman?”

“Ugly kids with bad teeth and a low IQ?” Skandar shrugged, raising his eyebrow, “God, your jokes still suck, huh?”

“I haven’t even finished!” William gasped, affronted, “Let me finish! And oi, we’re British! Our kids don’t have bad teeth!”

“We have kids? Wow, now I do feel old.”

“Don’t tell me you forgot we have kids.” William laughed, shaking his head.

“Never!” Skandar said, pulling his coat and shirt right off and showing William his shoulder.

William’s eyes didn’t immediately move to Skandar’s shoulder. He was too busy checking Skandar’s body out and grinning a little too much to be anything less than obvious. Skandar whacked William in the arm, laughing.

“Look at my shoulder!” Skandar snapped playfully.

William nodded quickly, still grinning as his eyes moved to Skandar’s shoulder. He realized he was looking at a tattoo of both their sons. A small tattoo of their faces with their names underneath. What surprised William most was what came under it. A simple sentence ‘Made in love.’.

Skandar slipped his shirt back on and smiled at William, “Pretty cool, huh? Got it done a few weeks ago.”

“And you never told me?”

“I’m telling you now?” Skandar chuckled, “We don’t exactly talk much anymore.”

“Oh ...” William sighed, nodding, “You’re right, we don’t. That ... kinda sucks, Teacup. But I love your tattoo.”

“Oi, no sour faces!” Skandar said, pinching William’s cheeks, “You will drink and be merry or I will punch you face.”

“You and that bloody line, you gave it to him!” William laughed suddenly, “I should punch you in the face!”

“I hope not. I’m still recovering from the last one.”

“Oh. Sorry.” William frowned, his mood quickly sobering, “Yeah.”

“Man, you are totally starting to kill my buzz.” Skandar said, sliding another drink to William, “Turn your frown upside down, Sweetheart, or this party is likely to end.”

William looked up at Skandar, taking the obvious hint, “Right.”

William stood up, grabbed the schooner of beer and raised it. He drank it slowly but didn’t stop until it was done. It took a while as he was already quite drunk. By the time he was finished he was a little weak on his feet.

“Whoa.” William groaned with a burp, sitting back down, “Ok, so, no more foot in mouth, William!”

“Unless it’s my foot. Then it’s just fine.” Skandar smirked broadly, staring at William with a lusty gaze.

“Oh shit.” William groaned, squeezing his legs together, “Did you have to say that?”

“You know, the tattoo reminds me ... I bet you’re wishing you never got yours, huh?”

William immediately pulled off his own shirt, revealing a muscle laden torso. Skandar’s eyes widened like saucers and he let out an audible gasp. Crossing his own legs to hide his erection, Skandar smirked.

“Did you have to do that?”

William didn’t immediately understand what Skandar was referring to, but when he did he smiled appreciatively, “Yeah, I did, Teacup. Had to show you this.”

William showed Skandar his own shoulder. Skandar looked at the ‘Just for Skandar’ tattoo that William had done many, many years before. Much to Skandar’s surprise, it still looked as good as new.

“I had it re-inked.” William smiled affectionately, reaching over his shoulder to rub it.

“But ... why?” Skandar asked softly, “We’re getting ... you know ... divorced. And this conversation is getting way too serious. I’m starting to sober up and that’s not fun!”

William shrugged, still leaning forward so Skandar could touch his tattoo, “I’m feeling pretty ‘fun’ right now with your skinny fingers touching me like that.”

“Look. I’m not skinny and my dick is not a mini-me, okay?” Skandar moaned as William slid his shirt back on, “Oi! How can I keep touching if you put your shirt back on!?”

William grinned, “You can ask me nicely to take it off?”

“You ... are a cock tease. An evil, evil cock tease. I don’t remember you being one when we first got together back in the dark ages.”

“Oh God, don’t remind me. It can’t be that long ago, can it?”

“And I was having such a great night.” Skandar smiled wistfully, before he leaned in to whisper, “If it’s any consolation, you’re even hotter now than you were back then.”

William was already flush from drinking, but he was truly blushing now after that comment. He turned to Skandar, smiling and leaning in toward him, voice hushed. Their hands met over William’s thigh as Skandar licked his lips, as if anticipating something.

“Skan?” William whispered, eyes a little glazy.

“Yeah?”

William pointed over Skandar’s shoulder, “I think that girl is trying to get your attention.”

Skandar smirked but didn’t even look back, “Will? I didn’t know you were a girl.”

“What!?” William gasped, bursting into laughter, “I wasn’t talking about me!”

“That’s ok.” Skandar whispered, leaning in and grinning broadly, “I was.”

William let out a groan and leaned forward so their foreheads were touching and their eyes locked, “I am so fucking jacked up right now.”

Skandar broke his hand clasp with William, moving both his hands up his estranged husband’s chest. He gave a squeeze to William’s pectoral muscles before he kept moving his hands up around William’s neck until they finally fisted his hair. He was breathless, still licking his lips as if he were contemplating something very intimate.

“Dance with me.” Skandar whispered heatedly, “Like you mean it.”

“I can ... barely stand up straight. How am ... I ... supposed to dance?”

“Not that kind of dance.” Skandar whispered, his lips touching William’s for the barest of seconds, “The kind you don’t have to stand up for ... unless you want to.”

“Oh God ... is this really happening?” William moaned, “Kids are being looked after. The house is empty.”

“House?” Skandar laughed, high pitched and clearly amused, “What makes you think we can wait that long?”

- To Be Continued -

A/N: Sorry I haven't replied to any comments, but please keep making them! I only have enough net time lately to update and read comments, but I'll catch up after the 18th. I should be updating again before then though. Thanks to everyone for their feedback.

</div>

Breathe 10, Pain is Relative - Part 3

suborbital — Wed, 09 Jul 2008 01:39:26 GMT

Title: Breathe
Pairing: Will/Skandar, Anna/OFC
Rating: R
Summary: Skandar spends time with his boys and William finds his family.
Disclaimer: Not mine, not real! It's FICTION.
A/N: Breathe is the sequel series to 'Chronicles of Skandar'. Read that first! Read earlier chapters - Breathe.

Breathe

A Chronicle of Skandar and William

Chapter 10c – Pain is Relative, Part 3

TIME TO STOP GROWING UP

“Skandar?” Sarah called out, standing up in her open hood Jeep, “Where the fu...fudge are you?”

Petey covered his mouth and giggled before Eddy reached out from his car seat and bopped Petey on the head. Petey frowned at Eddy before they both caught sight of their Daddy emerging from the hotel lobby. As promised, Sarah had picked up the boys so they could spend the afternoon with Skandar. William was busy with an evening shoot on set so he didn’t mind leaving the kids with Sarah.

“My boys!” Skandar literally screamed, running to the car and jumping over the door so he landed right between Eddy and Petey.

Skandar smothered each of his boys in a flurry of hugs and kisses. He’d missed them so much it physically hurt him. Petey was as receptive as ever, throwing his arms around Skandar and squealing with delight. Skandar was a little taken aback as Petey was usually so proper and controlled. Yet here he was, smiling brightly with eyes twinkling.

Skandar cupped Petey’s face in his hands, just staring at him with pure adoration. He was doing his best not to cry, and he didn’t cry as he was simply too happy to do so, but his eyes were definitely glistening with emotion. In the time since he’d last seen Petey, he already seemed to have changed so much, and perhaps for the better.

Moving to Eddy next, Skandar tried to give him a hug and received a punch in the face for his efforts. Skandar groaned and held his cheek, mock glaring at Eddy. Eddy poked his tongue and started giggling before he grabbed Skandar’s cheeks and did his best growl impression. As Skandar burst into laughter, Eddy leaned forward and bit his nose.

“Ow!” Skandar laughed, shaking his nose free, “You little shi...you little monkey!”

“Weh doh pahk.” Eddy nodded nonchalantly, “Dup.”

“Kids.” Skandar grinned, leaning back and putting his seat belt on.

This was the happiest he’d been in a long time. He adored his kids more than anything in the world. He was going to make the most of their time together. And so he did. Two hours later, he lay on the bark of a playground close to the house. A playground he often frequented with the boys.

“Man, I’m beat.” Skandar laughed breathlessly as Eddy crawled over him, making a growl noise before he pushed up Skandar’s shirt and started biting his stomach.

“Look, Daddy, I’m so high!” Petey laughed, waving from the top of a net tower.

“Not so high, Pe...” Skandar began to say before he shook his head and smiled, “So high, Petey! Wow!”

Sarah sat down on the bark beside Skandar, stroking Eddy’s head as he playfully munched on Skandar’s stomach. Skandar closed his eyes and sighed contently. He felt a mixture of elation and underlying despair. He wasn’t the primary parent anymore. William had custody legally and Skandar had to accept that. All he wanted was to be with his kids, but William held all the power. Still, the boys were clearly happy, clearly loved. He couldn’t deny that William was looking after them.

“Sarah, Petey’s different.” Skandar said as he opened his eyes and cast his eyes to his son high atop his tower.

“He doesn’t have to be your little man anymore.”

“Because William’s home.” Skandar agreed, “He’s ... he’s happy. He’s just being a kid. William was right. Petey was wound up so tight but now ... he just seems happy.”

Sarah leaned down and kissed Skandar’s temple, as if she instinctively knew what he was thinking, “You aren’t a bad Daddy. William wasn’t there, Petey adjusted. William’s there now though. It’s okay, Skan.”

Skandar sniffled a little and blinked back a few tears. The reality that this moment was temporary was starting to weigh down on him. He realized Eddy had fallen off to sleep on his stomach, exhausted from all their play.

“Aww, my little demon.” Skandar gasped, pulling Eddy up over his chest so he could hold him tight, “I miss you so much.”

“Don’t cry, Skan. Not here.” Sarah whispered, “When they’re gone. They’re happy now. Let them be happy.”

“Doin’ my best, Sar’.” Skandar sniffled, taking a deep breath and burying his nose in Eddy’s hair, “What am I supposed to do?”

“The best you can.”

“I can’t do anything anymore. I just feel so helpless.” Skandar said, watching Petey as he climbed around the tower, “What time does Will want them back?”

“Well, I told him I’d put them to bed. I’ll be staying with them tonight. William has to work late. And well, it’s not like I have anywhere else I need to be.”

Skandar sat up and shuffled closer to Sarah, cradling Eddy in his arms. He stared at her with concern. He knew what was bothering her. She seemed well enough, but it was obvious to him she was still dealing with a few Anna issues.

“You want me to beat her up for you?” Skandar asked with a playful smile.

“Nah. She’s having a rough time. It’s not her fault.”

“It’s not your fault either.”

“Let’s just forget about it, okay? Come on, our boys are hungry. Let’s get them home so I can make them some dinner.” Sarah urged, standing to her feet.

“Wait, what? I don’t want them to go home yet. I’ve only had two hours with them.” Skandar protested, “You told me I’d have them longer!”

“Hey, hey, I meant for you to come back home as well, Dumbdumb. Did you want to take them to a restaurant or something?”

“Well ... somewhere. I mean, this is the first freaking time I’ve had them in forever. I want it to be good, you know?” Skandar sighed as he stood to his feet, being careful not to wake Eddy as he held him, “Not just some plain old night at home. I want them to have a good time.”

“Skan ... this is a good time for them. Having you at home with them? That’ll mean more than any restaurant could, I’m sure. The last thing you want is for them to start feeling as if you’re the unfamiliar and not the familiar. Come home, come on.”

“Daddy, Daddy, come home!” Petey screamed from the top of the tower as he started climbing down, “Come home!”

Skandar cursed himself and gave Sarah a little death glare. She replied in her typically warm fashion, by giving him the finger. He smirked and turned to face Petey once he hit the ground and ran to Skandar’s leg, hugging it tightly. Skandar sighed, smiling at the sensation of having both his boys so close to him again. It almost felt normal.

“Tum ‘ome, Daddeh.” Eddy mumbled, rubbing his sleepy eyes, “Meh wan bweakfash.”

“Yes, Daddy, yes!” Petey nodded, still clutching Skandar’s thigh and nuzzling to his side, “Come home, please! Poppa won’t mind.”

“Yesh, Daddeh, yesh.” Eddy said in a very deadpan voice, parroting Petey, “Dup.”

“You’re going to be a little smartass when you grow up.” Skandar grinned, before he nodded his head, “Alright then, let’s go home. We’ll have breakfast for dinner, okay? I’ll make everyone’s favourite.”

“Waffles!” Petey gasped, grinning broadly, “Yay!”

“Wattles!” Eddy gasped, holding his hands up, “Yay!”

OUT OF SIGHT, NOT MIND

“That’s a wrap! Reset the stage!”

William groaned at the director’s orders, trying to prepare himself mentally for another take. It had been a long day and he was eager to get home to his boys. He smiled softly at the thought of them. He still couldn’t believe how much he’d changed. How far he’d drifted from his family, and yet now instead of his family getting in the way of his career, his career was getting in the way of his family.

He sat down on the side of the set, pulling out his phone. Ever since he’d fired Jimmy, he’d been trying to find a new manager. While he had to give Jimmy credit for making his career, he was still unwilling to take him back. He needed new influences. Jimmy may very well have cost him his marriage, even though William knew he had no one to blame but himself.

William stared at the wallpaper for his phone, a photo of his family in happier times. Eddy had just been born and it was the first time William held him, with Skandar and Petey right beside him. He smiled as he looked at it, but he fell sombre when he realized that even then, his priorities were skewered toward his career. When Eddy was born, he was only in New Zealand for a week before he left again to continue filming.

“Idiot.” William cursed, dialling in Skandar’s number.

The estranged couple were getting along much better lately, despite not being in the same vicinity as one another for some time. Perhaps that was the reason they were getting along so well. William waited anxiously for an answer as the make up assistant gave him a touch up.

“Talk to me.” Skandar said, sounding a little flustered.

“Teacup?”

“Will?”

“Hey!” William smiled, quite relieved that Skandar had picked up, “How are the boys? Are you three having a good night?”

“I’m taking them home now actually.”

“Already? Is everything alright?”

“It’s fine, it’s fine.” Skandar said quickly, “I’m just taking them home for dinner. We were at the park and Eddy was getting a little tired. It’d be better if they were at home. That’s okay, right? You don’t mind?”

“No, that’s wonderful!” William said just as quickly, wanting to reassure Skandar, “Would you mind if I finished a little early if I can and maybe joined you four for dinner?”

“I think we’re mature enough to handle that.” Skandar chuckled, “I still have awkward memories of our last encounter in the kitchen but I’m hoping that won’t be the case this time.”

“I promise it won’t be. I promise.” William said firmly, “Would it really be okay?”

“Mi casa su casa. Literally in this case!”

“I’ll be home as soon as I can.” William said, unable to help the smile the lit up his entire face.

“Sweet. See you then, Wizzle.”

Skandar hung up before William could reply. He was grateful for the opportunity but he could still tell things were already quite distant or formal between himself and Skandar. He hadn’t been called Wizzle since their time filming Prince Caspian. While he was grateful they were becoming friends once more, he didn’t want that to be the extent of their reconciliation.

“Mr. Moseley?” A set assistant said as she hurried over to William’s side and handed him an envelope, “This just came in from your lawyer. It’s marked urgent.”

William furrowed his brow curiously as he opened the envelope. He read the letter and cursed in surprise and anguish. Jimmy was taking him to court for unfair dismissal from employment.

“Shit.” William cursed, “Shit!”

BREAKFAST FOR DINNER

Skandar was usually very tidy when he cooked. Today he wasn’t really fussed. It felt so good to be back in his kitchen. He had a feeling he’d have to give up this house in the divorce settlement. His stomach turned at that thought, but he quickly managed to bury it.

“This is still home.” Skandar smiled softly.

Petey was busy laughing and chasing Sarah around the lounge. Eddy was doing his best to crawl behind them but soon tired of it and made his way into the kitchen. He settled at Skandar’s feet and held his hands up to him. Smiling happily, Skandar leaned down to pick his son up, giving him a peck on the lips.

“Were you bored, Baby?” Skandar smiled, holding Eddy on one hip while the other mixed the perfect waffle batter, “Won’t be long now.”

“Oooh, meh hundeh!” Eddy grinned, “Yay! Bweakfash!”

“Only because I haven’t made it for so long for you. I hope you still like it.”

Eddy gave Skandar a rather sombre, serious look. He stared right at Skandar, saying nothing. His eyes said all Skandar needed to hear. His youngest missed him. Skandar feigned a small smile before Eddy threw his head against Skandar’s shoulder, hugging him.

“I know, Son.” Skandar sighed, frowning softly, “I know.”

Eddy suddenly broke the hug and swung backwards, causing Skandar to jerk quickly to make sure he didn’t fall off. Eddy reached to the batter bowl, smashing his hand into it. His hand now covered in batter, he raised it to his lips and sucked it off his hand. He mulled it over in his mouth and pondered while Skandar just shook his head and wondered how many shades of crazy his youngest was.

“Ish nahce!” Eddy finally decided, before he smeared his batter covered hand over Skandar’s lips and cheeks, “Nahce?”

“Skan?” Anna said softly, revealing her presence as she came through the backdoor.

“She’s in there.” Skandar smiled, as Eddy pointed to the lounge and then gave Anna a two handed wave.

Anna smiled and moved over to him, giving him a wet kiss hello. Eddy giggled shyly, burying his head in Skandar’s neck. Skandar was relieved to see Anna. Hopefully she and Sarah could settle their issues quickly.

As Skandar set the batter into the waffle maker and somehow managed to make the rest of dinner with one arm occupied holding Eddy, he couldn’t help but feel as if he was finally home again. It was all starting to feel rather familiar. The only thing missing was William.

“I think I miss Poppa.” Skandar said absently to Eddy, giving him a sad smile as he sliced a strawberry.

“Ish otay.” Eddy said sagely, “Poppa tum ‘ome.”

“He did, didn’t he?”

Eddy nodded, “Dup. Poppa tum ‘ome. Daddeh tum ‘ome. Meh punch ooh face?”

Skandar smiled softly, kissing Eddy’s chin, “Whenever you want, Baby. Whenever you want.”

Sarah’s head perked up in the lounge at that moment. Not because she’d seen Anna, but rather because of a high pitched ‘ow’ that suddenly came from the kitchen. She was about to ask Skandar if he was alright when she saw Anna entering the lounge. Anna’s face seemed to light up, but Sarah was tentative in her own response.

“Oh, hey.” Sarah said with a small nod.

Anna walked toward Sarah slowly, while Petey glanced between the two. He shrugged and ran to the kitchen, figuring the grown ups wanted some time out. Sarah tried to busy herself with tidying up, but the moment Anna’s hand clutched her shoulder she stilled.

“I’m a little busy.” Sarah said as she moved away and put away some of Eddy’s toys.

Anna stood silently, hands clasped in front of her. She stared after Sarah with a look of hurt in her eyes. All her calls had been ignored by Sarah. She knew Sarah was upset, and rightly so.

“Sarah, you said you understood.” Anna said finally, her voice filled with anguish, “Please look at me.”

“I always understand, okay?” Sarah whispered, turning to face Anna, eyes sombre, “I’m tired of being understanding. How long do I have to keep being understanding?”

“For the rest of our lives?” Anna said, tears pooling in her eyes and her voice cracking, “Or perhaps just for the rest of mine?”

Sarah gasped, blinking back her own tears as the meaning of Anna’s words became clear. Anna stepped closer to Sarah once more, hands held out. She clutched Sarah’s hands in her own, as tightly as she could.

Without saying a word, Anna leaned up and pressed her lips against Sarah’s. The couple shared a tearful kiss, showing the depth of their bond. When Sarah tried to break the kiss, Anna held it with a desperate need. Finally Anna broke the kiss but kept her tearful eyes close to Sarah’s.

“Mum’s waiting. I told her I can’t hide. I’m not saying it’s going to be easy for me to ... to be this ... in front of her, but ... I know it’s a lot easier than not having you with me.” Anna gushed, tears falling down her cheeks, “Please come home.”

“You want me there?”

“I need you there.”

“I’m sorry.” Sarah sniffled, shaking her head, “I should have been understanding. I said I was but ...”

“You were hurt. And you deserved to be. Please come home. Mum’s making us dinner and ... we can talk, okay?” Anna said, clearly still nervous about this prospect, “Please? Come home?”

Sarah nodded quickly, wiping her eyes and smiling tearfully. She leaned her temple against Anna’s, squeezing her hands. She wasn’t naive to how difficult this must be for Anna. She wished it could be easier. She wished they could just be together.

“I’m so fucking nervous.” Sarah whispered, closing her eyes and revelling in the sweet pleasure of being close to her beloved.

“You have no idea.” Anna chuckled weakly, “You’d think after this long I’d be ready for this. You’d think I’d have done it.”

“So ... I better tell Skandar he has to look after his own kids then.”

“Come on then. Let’s go home.” Anna said, still quite emotional, but happy to have Sarah with her again.

The couple entered the kitchen to find it was unoccupied. Hand in hand they walked into the informal dining room to find that empty as well. They tried the deck last of all and found the three males all sitting at the table eating their breakfast for dinner.

“Skan?” Sarah said softly, not really wanting to disturb the meal.

“It’s okay.” Skandar smiled, already working out for himself Sarah had to go, “I love you two.”

Anna gave a smile and Sarah blew a kiss to them all. Petey turned in his chair to look at them before he smiled and waved as well. Eddy, whose face was covered in whipped cream and bits of strawberry gave them both a cheesy grin.

“Washup meh ‘omie?” Eddy gasped, waving both his hands, “Ta ta!”

“Ta ta to you too, my little loves.” Sarah smiled, blowing another kiss before she and Anna disappeared back into the house.

Skandar sighed contently, watching his boys eat. He couldn’t help the content smile that adorned his face. He knew this was right where he wanted to be. Right where he longed to be.

WATER UNDER THE BRIDGE?

“Mr. Moseley? You have a visitor.” William’s assistant said as she approached him, “It’s ... it’s Jimmy.”

William cursed in frustration, “And for the last time, William please? Mr. Moseley is my father. Thanks, Dana, I’ll deal with him.”

William stood up out of his make up chair and marched out to where Jimmy was waiting for him in one of the parking lots. His lips were tight and he was doing his best to control his anger. This was the last thing he needed. He knew he couldn’t have expected Jimmy to just crawl under a rock and stay there.

“I guess I have your attention now, don’t I?” Jimmy said, raising his hands in a peace gesture before William reached him, “Maybe you’ll start taking my calls now?”

“You can take me to court, I don’t care.” William said tightly.

“Will, Baby, Superstar. That was just to get your attention.” Jimmy urged, “It’s all water under the bridge. All you need to do is give me my job back and we can take over the world again. Your divorce is well on its way. You have your boys. Now let me do what I do best and keep you at the top. You know we make the best team. I took you from independent box office midgets to mainstream blockbusters. I made you an A-Lister.”

“I know, Jimmy.” William conceded, “You did a lot for me and I paid you well for it. But now it’s time for me to step back, take some time off and focus on my family. I’ll make sure you have a great reference, okay?”

“Will! You’re at the top of your game. You can’t step back now. This is your time, Superstar. It’s your time.”

“Jimmy, I’m sorry. I think it’s for the best that we just end things as amicably as we can. Time for you to find another superstar.” William said cordially, “I’m sorry.”

“So that’s it? After all we’ve been through, you’re just going to end it here?”

“I have to think about my family. I’ve put them second long enough. I have to put them first, where they belong.”

Jimmy sighed, staring at William in disbelief, “You never cared so much about them before. What changed?”

“Me. Thankfully. I ... I didn’t even realize I was doing it.”

“Will ... I need my job back.” Jimmy said, “You were my golden goose. I made you successful and you made me rich. I can’t go back. Just give me my job back and we’ll figure out a way to make everyone happy, okay?”

“I’d love to say yes, Jimmy, but ... I just don’t trust myself anymore to do the right thing when I have you telling me how great I am and how I deserve everything. I don’t. I have to work for it all over again, starting with my boys and with a miracle, my Teacup.”

“Will ... don’t do this. I don’t want to have to hurt you.” Jimmy warned, “I don’t want this to get ugly.”

“You do what you have to do, Jimmy.” William sighed, “I’ll do what I have to do for my family. Good luck for the future.”

William turned and left Jimmy standing. He smiled to himself, feeling an inordinate sense of pride for what he’d just done. He’d resisted temptation. The temptation of having his ego stroked, his every whim tended to. It was time to put his family first.

WHEN THE LOST IS FOUND

William didn’t make it home until after midnight. He was most definitely not happy about that fact. Unfortunately it was a common occurrence to run overtime in his line of employment. He had a rare opportunity to spend time with Skandar and his boys together and he’d blown it. By now he expected Skandar to have returned to his hotel and for Sarah to be staying with the boys. So it was naturally a great surprise when returned home to find Skandar asleep in the upstairs lounge with Eddy asleep on his chest and Petey huddled up to his side on the large sofa.

William almost lost his breath at the sight. It had taken him so long to realize this is what he wanted most in life. This is what he wanted to come home to. This is the reason he married Skandar in the first place. Not to boost his profile or enhance his career. Not because the sex was incredible. But simply because he felt better with him than he ever did without him.

Softly, quietly, William toed off his shoes and socks before he made his way carefully to the sofa. He knelt down beside the sofa and smiled warmly at the sight of Skandar sleeping peacefully. William knew he never said it enough to him when they were together, but he didn’t think anyone was more beautiful. His opinion was no doubt bias, but it was still his, and it was still as true as anything else he believed in. To see Skandar asleep so casually, so at peace, was something William had taken for granted for so long.

His eyes moved to his youngest, Eddy, who was sleeping so very contently. The little tyrant as William referred to him, was happy to sleep on the rise and fall of his Daddy’s chest. Petey was smiling in his sleep, either having a wonderful dream or just that happy to have his Daddy home again.

Not wanting to wake them just yet, William sat on the floor beside the sofa, just watching his family sleep. He sighed with a content smile, feeling truly blessed for this simple pleasure. Without thinking he reached out and stroked his fingers softly across Skandar’s fringe. The moment he did, Skandar stirred with a soft moan and turned his head into William’s hand without waking. William hitched, his breath ragged as he was taken by surprise at the movement. He now had his hand pressed between a cushion and Skandar’s face. The most surprising aspect was the fact Skandar was actively nuzzling the hand. Despite being happy, William’s eyes glistened with anguish. He craved this simple affection so very much, he wanted it to be real. He wanted it to be his again.

“I love you.” William whispered, smiling sadly, eyes wet.

“Mmm.” Skandar moaned softly, letting out a small yawn as his eyes began to open slowly, “Will?”

William felt as if he’d been caught with his hand in the cookie jar. He cursed himself inwardly. He knew he wanted Skandar back, but he also knew he couldn’t push. He had to give him space. He had to let him go in the hope he’d want to come back to him. Yet here he was, his hand trapped between the cushion and Skandar’s face. Skandar jerked his head immediately away from William’s hand.

“What the fuck?” Skandar said in surprise, “Wh... what are you doing?”

“I’m sorry, I was just ... and then your head moved and ...”

“Sorry, sorry.” Skandar sighed, too tired to argue.

Skandar moved his head back to William’s hand and let out another yawn. He closed his eyes and began breathing evenly once more. William couldn’t tell he was asleep, but he was so very grateful to be given this pleasure from Skandar.

“You been molesting me in my sleep, Wizzle?” Skandar mumbled, eyes still closed.

“No?”

“Damn.”

William chuckled at this, smiling gratefully at the icebreaking moment Skandar had given them, “I ... I could?”

Skandar smiled softly, opening his eyes sleepily, “Dinner’s ... on the bench. Go ... go eat. Not ready to ... get up ... up yet. Go eat, Sweetheart.”

Skandar let out another yawn and closed his eyes again. William nodded and leaned over to place a kiss upon Eddy and Petey’s cheek. He finally dared to place a kiss upon Skandar’s cheek and was grateful when he didn’t receive a recrimination or rejection. He stood up, even though he didn’t want to leave his family’s side. He made his way to the kitchen to find his dinner on a plate covered with foil. On the top was a sticker with the word ‘Poppa’ on it. William grinned in appreciation. He recognized the writing as Petey’s. Next to the dinner plate was a drawing that Petey, Eddy, and Skandar did for him. Petey’s contribution was a drawing of a giant lion that looked a bit more like an elephant. Eddy’s contribution were handprints all over the lion, which caused William to chuckle and shake his head. Skandar’s contribution was a drawing of himself with exaggerated muscles, posing in the background and ‘Super Daddy’ on his chest.

“Figures.” William smiled before his attention flicked over next to a portable media player next to the drawing.

William warmed up his dinner and carried it and the media player back to the counter. He grabbed himself a beer and sat down on a stool to eat. He pushed play on the media player before a video clip started playing of Petey singing one of his school spirit songs while Skandar played the guitar off screen. Eddy could be seen sitting on the sofa cheering and clapping his hands. He could then be seen crawling along the ground and biting Petey’s ankle mid song. William burst out laughing as he watched Petey yelp and then Skandar rush in front of the camera to reprimand Eddy, who grinned innocently and waved at his Daddy.

“That’s my crazy family.” William laughed, smiling adoringly, “Mad as ever.”

“Hey.” Skandar called from behind William, “Enjoying the show?”

“Teacup!” William smiled in surprise, turning back to face Skandar.

His smile faded a little when he saw that Skandar was putting his coat on and appeared to be readying to leave. William gave Skandar a grateful nod, but said nothing else. He just stared as Skandar walked over and sat on the stool beside William, letting out another yawn.

“Boys are in bed.” Skandar sighed contently, resting his head on the counter, “We had such a good night.”

“Thank you.” William said gratefully, rubbing Skandar’s back, “You know ... you don’t have to go.”

“Better not push our luck.” Skandar smiled softly, leaning up to kiss William’s cheek.

William closed his eyes as Skandar held the kiss to his cheek. Much to his surprise, Skandar leaned his head on William’s shoulder and draped his arms around his neck. William reached his hand up to his shoulder to cover Skandar’s. This was a very unexpected moment. Most of tonight had been an unexpected moment, yet it was one he desperately didn’t want to end.

“I missed you.” Skandar whispered, “I wish you’d come home long ago. You remind me of the man I married.”

“I am the man you married. I just ... I just got a little lost for a while, Teacup. But I’m home now.”

“Bye, Will. Thanks for letting me have the boys.” Skandar said softly, kissing his cheek tenderly again before he stood up and quickly made his exit.

“Bye, Teacup.” William sighed, watching the door Skandar had just walked out of, “Love you too.”

William was naturally disappointed that Skandar had left, but he knew he would. More than disappointed he was happy and grateful. He’d come home to a beautiful sight and despite the estrangement between himself and his husband, they’d shared more now than they had in far too long a time. Now more than ever William was resolved. He’d get his family back. He’d get his husband back. He’d get his Teacup back. Whatever it took.

- To Be Continued -

A/N: About five chapters left to go. That way Breathe will have the same amount of chapters as CoS. i will try and post the next chapter soon, but it might be a few days as I will be roaming Queensland! But the nets is everywhere, muahahahah! I hope you liked this chapter. Thanks for reading :)

</div>

Breathe 10, Pain is Relative - Part 2

suborbital — Wed, 09 Jul 2008 01:24:10 GMT

Title: Breathe
Pairing: Will/Skandar, Anna/OFC
Rating: R
Summary: Anna confronts her demons. William and Skandar find the little things matter.
Disclaimer: Not mine, not real! It's FICTION.
A/N: Breathe is the sequel series to 'Chronicles of Skandar'. Read that first! Read earlier chapters - Breathe.

Breathe

A Chronicle of Skandar and William

Chapter 10b – Pain is Relative, Part 2

SILENCE SPEAKS VOLUMES

“I am so fucking horny.” Skandar groaned as he stepped out of the shower in his hotel room, “And I just finished wanking!”

He grumbled to himself as he walked into the main area of his hotel room, opening the mini bar to find something stiff to drink. He settled on a fine Merlot, pulling out the wine bottle and opening it up. He didn’t bother with a glass and simply drank straight from the bottle.

Before he could set the bottle back down, the phone rang. He wanted to put a towel around his waist first but he figured it hardly made a difference unless people could now somehow hear his nakedness. The very thought made him chuckle as he picked up the phone.

“I told you, just call the brokers and have them take care of it? I’m not even considering any media fund mergers until the studio receives the official au...” Skandar started to say, believing his assistant was calling him yet again.

“Teacup? Shut up.” William chuckled.

“Will? What the fuck?” Skandar laughed, “Sorry. I figured it was work. Two calls in one day? Careful, I might start to think you like me.”

“Never!” William teased, “Oh who am I kidding? Always!”

“I can see the time on the clock and I’m guessing you’re being extremely lovely and calling to let me say goodnight to my boys.” Skandar smiled, sitting down on his bed.

“Noh!” Eddy yelled out, “Meh noh sreep!”

Skandar laughed out loud, “You little demon, get to bed before I come over there and punch you in the face!”

“Meh punch ooh face!”

“Oh God I miss that kid.” Skandar smiled broadly.

“I still don’t understand, Teacup, how you have one acting like a proper little man and the other one is well ... Eddy.” William laughed, “Oh sod now he’s munching on my forearm.”

“Is that Daddy?” Petey asked in the background, before Skandar heard the receiver changing hands, “Daddy? It’s Petey. Are you coming home now?”

“Oh, Petey. Sweetheart.” Skandar sighed, kissing the phone, “I wish I could, but hopefully very soon you’ll be able to come and stay with me. Won’t that be fun?”

“Are we going camping? Are we going with Aunty Anna again? She’s very noisy at night.”

Skandar groaned, “Aunty Anna and Sarah have funny diseases, you see. And every night they have to take their medicine.”

“What kind of medicine, Daddy?”

Skandar’s reply was short and sharp, “The kind you’ll never know about until you’re twenty one, understand?”

Petey laughed softly, “Daddy, I think you’re being silly. I miss you.”

Skandar closed his eyes instantly, gripping the handset with all his might. Tears sprang into his eyes and he let out a gasp. Those three words tore at Skandar’s heart. He knew he missed his kids, but to hear them missing him as well, it made him feel immeasurable guilt. He wanted his boys.

“Daddy misses you too, Baby.” Skandar said, doing his best not to cry, “He misses you so much.”

“Ooh tum ‘ome?” Eddy bleeted into the phone, “Meh hundeh.”

Skandar suddenly burst out with tearful laughter, “You’re always hungry!”

“Umm. Dup.” Eddy agreed.

“I swear the kid eats like it’s going out of fashion.” William chuckled, “But he hates my cooking. You’ve got them hooked on your own, Teacup. It’s a bit of an adjustment for their taste buds.”

“You’re doing a great job, Will.” Skandar said sincerely, “I can hear how happy they are in their voices. Thank you.”

“Just making up for lost time, Teacup.” William smiled softly, sadly, “In some ways, at least ...”

There was an awkward silence between the two, but after a while it wasn’t really awkward. It was simply silence. Silence broken by the sound of the other breathing. As if somehow both attuned to the same thought, they broke the silence at once.

“I ...”

“Oh.”

“Sorry.”

“No, no, it’s fine.”

“I’m sorry.”

And then there was silence again. Skandar lay back on his bed, staring up at the ceiling of his hotel room. He closed his eyes and listened to the sound of William breathing. It was oddly calming and comforting. The silence didn’t feel at all awkward. In fact, Skandar didn’t feel inclined to break it, lest they say something to ruin their otherwise pleasant conversation.

“This is nice.” Skandar conceded finally, “I’m just lying here, listening to you breathe. I don’t remember doing that for a long time.”

“I’m lying on the sofa in the bottom lounge with a munchkin bouncing on my stomach and a boy named Petey doing his best mime impression to entertain us.”

“Sounds perfect.” Skandar smiled.

“Kinda is, Teacup.”

Again the silence came. Skandar turned onto his side, letting out a small yawn. He stroked the phone affectionately, eyes still closed.

“You okay with the kids, Will?” Skandar asked, “I know you are, I just ... I know it must be hard to juggle.”

“I’m okay.”

“Okay.”

“Teacup?”

“Yeah, Will?”

“It’s good, you know. How ... we aren’t fighting as much anymore.” William sighed, relieved, “I ... miss talking to you, like this.”

“So do I.” Skandar confessed, “So do I.”

MUMMY, DEAREST

Sarah sat at her desk in the basement of her parent’s house. She was thinking of asking William if she could stay with him and the boys, but didn’t want to share her sombre mood with them. The boys were having a hard enough time as it was, without Skandar.

She knew that right now Anna would have picked her mother up from the airport and they would likely be sitting together with a nice cup of tea. Perhaps they were already in bed. Distracting herself with her writing, Sarah tried to make good use of her alone time. She’d always possessed a passion for writing that stemmed back to her earliest times with Skandar a decade ago.

Her current piece was heavily influenced by her relationship with Anna. Some would dare to call it autobiographical. She tried to change small details, but the themes of loving without commitment for so long was an obvious statement to her own history with Anna. Having forged a successful career for herself in acting, she was able to use her resources to produce her writing projects, usually with Skandar. They’d formed a successful team over the years and she didn’t think it would change.

Despite her best attempts to distract herself with her writing, Sarah was struggling to focus. She stood up, barefoot and near naked save for the long shirt she wore in preparation for bed. Realizing she wasn’t doing a very good job of writing much further in her screenplay, she moved to her bedroom upstairs. She didn’t often come to her parents to stay, but they always made sure she had a bed if she needed it. Both her parents loved Anna but secretly shared their daughter’s concern that a lack of commitment was still present in a relationship that spanned seven years.

“She just needs time, Mum.” Sarah said softly as she sat on her old bed, holding a very worn out teddy bear.

Sarah looked up at her mother, Gail, who stood at the doorway holding two cups of hot chocolate. Sarah enjoyed being able to come home and just be a girl again, even if she was getting too old to be one. She took the warm cup gratefully, smiling as she took a small sip.

“How much time, Dear?” Gail said as she sat down beside Sarah, “I know you love her, but ... you’ve been together this long. Shouldn’t she know what she wants?”

“She just ... she’s not like me. Not like us. It’s not easy for her.” Sarah said, realizing she was really just making excuses to defend her love, “She loves me.”

“I know she does. I know. I just don’t like seeing you like this.”

“I don’t either, Mum.” Sarah said, blinking back tears and taking a long sip of her hot chocolate, “Choccy’s good.”

“Just the way you like it.” Gail smiled softly, “You know ... whatever happens, you’re always welcome to come home for however long you need.”

“I’m too old to come home, Mum.” Sarah chuckled, sniffling back some of her tears, “But thank you.”

“You’re not too old. You’re only twen...”

“Shhh.” Sarah said quickly, holding her finger to her lips, “We insecure actress types don’t talk about our age.”

Gail smiled at her daughter, reaching out to brush some hair from her face, “Whatever happens, we’re here, Dear.”

Sarah leaned forward and kissed her mother’s cheek, “Thanks, Mum. I love you.”

An hour later her mother was gone and her hot chocolate was long finished. She lay back on her bed, cuddling Mr. Glomp. When she and Skandar were entertaining the prospect of a relationship, he’d first been introduced to Mr. Glomp. He thought the bear was cute. Being the first guy who had ever given her that reaction, she knew he was a keeper.

Anna’s reaction was far more generous. She hugged Mr. Glomp with all her might and insisted he was in bed with them whenever they stayed over with Sarah’s parents. Looking back, Sarah couldn’t think of a time she’d ever felt fully accepted by Anna. She knew Anna loved her, but she also knew a part of Anna would never fully accept their relationship.

Her bedroom was dark now, save for the fading glow stickers on her ceiling. She stared out the window, wondering if Anna was thinking about her at that moment. Sarah missed her terribly. They were both used to being apart during shoots, but whenever they were together in New Zealand, they were rarely ever apart overnight.

Sarah had almost lulled herself to sleep when her cell phone started vibrating to indicate an incoming call. She blearily looked at the caller ID to see it was Anna calling. She bit her lip, initially overjoyed to receive a call from her girlfriend. Quickly her joy left her and she felt a pang of hurt rising up. Despite understanding Anna’s feelings, Sarah still couldn’t help feeling cast out. She moved the phone under her pillow and laid her head on it as silent tears streamed over her cheeks.

CONFLICT OF FAITH

Anna sat on her and Sarah’s bed, holding the phone to her ear as she waited for Sarah to pick up. When she finally realized Sarah wasn’t going to pick up, she put the phone down and smoothed her hand over Sarah’s side of the bed. She wanted Sarah with her, but she didn’t know if she could handle being a couple in front of her mother. It was one thing for her mother to know, but it was another for her to see it right in front of her face.

Now that her mother was sleeping in the guest room, Anna wanted to talk to Sarah. She wasn’t really surprised that Sarah didn’t pick up. She knew Sarah was upset, despite trying her best to be understanding.

Feeling rather horrible and desperately alone, Anna lay down and held Sarah’s pillow against her. It still had her scent and it was enough to send Anna into fits of tears. Her tears were not silent and her cries were not still. She sobbed loudly, with little care for whether her mother heard. Her mother did hear. In fact, she stood at the doorway watching over her daughter while her mind mulled over the reality of the situation.

When Anna felt the soft caress of her mother’s hand through her hair, she didn’t move or react. She cried harder, louder, and if anything she just wanted to move away from the comfort of her mother’s presence. She wanted Sarah to come home. Perhaps it was time to confront her demons.

The next day she did just that. Per her mother’s request, she arranged an appointment to speak with a counsellor. A counsellor her mother knew would help her to ‘see things clearly’. Anna had no issues with her counsellor being of the same religious inclination as her and her mother. Right now she was open to anything that might help her understand the feelings inside herself. Why couldn’t she just be what she wanted to be in front of her family? In front of her mother?

“Hello?” Anna said softly as she stood at the doorway of the counsellor’s office.

The office was at the back of St. Benedict’s Chapel, which Anna had frequented many, many years ago during her first tenure in New Zealand. It didn’t seem as grand as she remembered. The stone was more worn and the signs were showing their age. Yet it still held a strange aura that she couldn’t help but feel.

“Come in, Child.” The man urged.

He appeared to be in his late fifties or early sixties, with a medium build and pure gray hair atop his head. He was perhaps exactly what she expected to see here. She walked in and greeted him with a gentle smile and shook his hand. She wasn’t used to being called ‘child’, but it was oddly comforting nonetheless.

“I’m Anna.” Anna smiled as she sat down, “Pleased to meet you.”

“I’m Robert, but you can call me Rob.” He smiled cordially, “I remember you. The hair is a bit grayer, but the gray matter is still very sharp. You were much younger then. You used to come with your mother and your ... sister?”

“Yes, a very, very long time ago.” Anna chuckled, “My mother and I used to come here when I was filming my first Narnia movie. Goodness, I can barely remember that time myself anymore.”

“And now look at you. A woman in the bloom of life.” Robert said, “And yet from what your mother tells me, also a woman in much confusion.”

“Well ... that’s not entirely true.” Anna corrected, “I’m sure my mother would like me to believe I am confused about some things, but I’m really not. I’m just not certain I’m able to accept some things.”

“A crisis of faith?”

“I suppose one could call it such.” Anna said, half frowning as she gathered her thoughts, “How much do you know exactly?”

“Well ... I might be an old man of the faith, but I still know a good movie or two, and you’ve been in a good movie or two. I know who you are and ... who you’re with, even before your mother ... informed me of your relationship. Would I be incorrect in assuming that is the reason for your visit to me today?”

“I’m ... in love ... with someone of the same gender as I am.” Anna said, taking a deep breath, “And I have been for a very long time.”

She couldn’t believe that even after all these years she still had trouble saying that to people she wasn’t familiar with. She clasped her hands together in her lap and gave Robert a slightly nervous smile. She expected to receive his condemnation but oddly did not.

“And ... you believe I can ... help you how?” Robert said with a soft chuckle, “I’m afraid I’m not sure there is a cure for love. And even if there was, my young lady, why would you want it?”

“I ... I don’t. I ... I mean ...” Anna said, still nervous, “Aren’t you supposed to counsel me against such blatant sins?”

“Such very strong language you’re using there.”

“Well ... I mean ... I might not be particularly regular in attending service but I still know what the bible says.” Anna said, a little confused and perhaps even upset he wasn’t taking a harder line on her as her mother often did, “Is it not a sin for a man to lie with another man or a woman to lie with another woman?”

“I won’t lie to you, Young lady.” Robert said seriously, “We live in times of great change and upheaval. God is not the influence he once was. Faith is viewed as something of a sideshow spectacle for the unenlightened. In your heart you have the innate ability to know right from wrong. I like to think of this as the seed God plants in all of us to help us make choices we know will be right or wrong. I can see that you are a woman of deep conviction and faith. Yet despite all this you have found yourself in love with someone you know will only serve to draw ire and condemnation from many of your peers and others of our faith. Do you not grant yourself enough belief to know whether what you have is right or wrong? If you do believe in God, do you truly believe he would grant you something so wonderful if it was truly a source deserving of hatred and persecution?”

“I ...” Anna wasn’t sure what to say, “I ... I’m sorry. This isn’t at all what I expected.”

“I am not here to tell you what you are doing is right or wrong. I can see very clearly that you are a woman with a heart that is good. A woman who is conflicted by her strong sense of faith and love.” He reached across the table and picked up a photo of a young woman, handing it to Anna, “This is my daughter, Chloe. She was like you.”

“In love with another woman?” Anna asked curiously, studying the photo of the stunning young blonde woman, standing next to a man of Middle Eastern descent.

“Even worse. She loved a man of another faith. A Muslim.” Robert said, taking the photo back and studying it with a mixture of joy and longing, “Iranian. She ... loved him with every part of her being. We tried to warn her. Our own prejudice drove her away from us. She married him, but she kept her faith. They were both killed by people who felt their relationship was a spite against God. He was killed for marrying her without converting her to his faith. She was killed bec...”

Anna frowned when he seemed to struggle with the words, “I’m sorry. That sounds utterly unbearable.”

“I spoke to her a few days before she died and ... do you know what she told me?” Robert asked, “She told me that she wouldn’t have changed a single thing about her life. She lived and she loved as she knew she had to. She did not waiver from her heart’s calling. For better or worse, she did what she felt she had to do. She loved. Do you regret any of the time you’ve had with the one you love?”

Anna pondered for a moment, “Well ... to be honest, yes. But they are fleeting and selfish moments where I wish life was easier for us both. But in the grand scheme of things and if you asked me would I change any of it? I would never. I ... love her, Robert. I really, truly love her.”

“Without trying to come across as preachy, there are far, far worse things in the world than love. If all we had to worry about in this world was who we loved, we would be far better off. All I think I can say to you, Anna, is to be sincere in your devotion. If you love a man or a woman, as long as you believe in the covenant of your love, surely it is worthy and if you believe in God, do you truly feel in your heart that he would deny you for such a thing?”

“I struggle with my faith, Robert. So many of my friends just think it’s stupid now, but I still believe in ... in something.” Anna was becoming rather emotional as she spoke, “I won’t lie. I’m not horribly religious, but I do have certain convictions and that’s why I’ve always struggled to accept my own ... sexuality. It’s always been something I question because of my beliefs. I just ... I just wish I could commit myself to her. She’s waited for me for seven years just to ... to give her what she deserves and now my mother’s here and I boot her out of the house because I can’t bear the thought of my mother seeing me living out what everyone knows I’m already doing.”

“Perhaps your problem isn’t with God, but yourself.” Robert chuckled a little.

“I hope this doesn’t sound completely ridiculous, but ... do you think ... if there really is a God, he’d still ... love me?”

Robert waved her comment off dismissively, “Of course I do.”

Anna wiped her eyes and smiled gratefully, “I’ve struggled with this for so many years. I still don’t know if I’m ready to accept it myself. I mean ... I’m in love with a woman and I think even if I wanted to, I couldn’t change that.”

“Then why bother? We are what we are. None of us, even those who think they are, are in a position to condemn. We are none of us without sin. I see a righteous heart in you. Be brave and true, Child. It’s all any of us can do. Only you can decide what it is you must do. It isn’t always easy to do the right thing, sometimes it is very hard. Be brave. Be true.”

Anna nodded and sniffed as more tears fell, “Thank you. I don’t think my mother is going to like what you’ve said to me at all, but I am truly grateful. Thank you. Thank you.”

A/N: There is a Part 3 ready to read now, but be kind and feedback me here! Aww thanks!

Continued in Part 3

</div>

Breathe 10 - Pain is Relative, Part 1

suborbital — Sun, 06 Jul 2008 14:03:10 GMT

Title: Breathe
Pairing: Will/Skandar, Anna/OFC
Rating: R
Summary: Skandar and William reach a resolution. .
Disclaimer: Not mine, not real! It's FICTION.
A/N: Breathe is the sequel series to 'Chronicles of Skandar'. Read that first! Also, this chapter contains lesbefriends smex. Don't hate the femmeslash!
Read earlier chapters - Breathe.

Breathe

A Chronicle of Skandar and William

Chapter 10 – Pain is Relative, Part 1

RESOLUTIONS

“Oh this is rich.” Skandar smirked, propping himself up on his elbows, “So now you’re getting all holier than thou, are you?”

Skandar stood slowly to his feet, his face steeling in resolve. William had height on him, and muscle mass for that matter as well, but Skandar was lean muscle all over. More importantly, he knew how to use it. He clenched his fists at his sides.

“Wanna fight, Mother fucker?” Skandar asked bitterly, stepping up to William, “Is that what you want? You had your punch, how about I get mine, huh?”

“I want you to get out.” William said flatly, “I want you to get out.”

William sat on the deck, staring out at the beach at the back of his house. In one hand he had a glass of brandy, and in the other a cigarette. He rarely smoked, as he was rather proud of his physical health, but in situations where he felt particularly stressed, he was prone to lighting one up. His hands were still shaking after his violent encounter with Skandar earlier this morning.

The night air felt bitterly cold against his bare chest. He had several bruises and a split lip, but Skandar was far worse off. William had let his frustration get the better of him and acted in a way he now regretted wholeheartedly. Worse than the violence that erupted between Skandar and himself, was the resolution. The resolution that their marriage was indeed over.

In the quiet aftermath of their fight, the estranged lovers agreed they could not continue in such a destructive fashion. They couldn’t surround the boys with such a negative atmosphere. It was not one or the other who stated their marriage was over, rather it was both in unison.

“It’s over, Will, isn’t it?” Skandar asked, breathing hard and favouring his ribs, “Ow, God, I hope it’s over. I can’t keep getting beat up like this.”

Skandar sat on the kitchen floor surrounded by a mess of broken furniture, smashed holes in walls, and blood stains. William sat opposite him, fists bloodied and lip swollen. Neither man was spared injury.

“I thought you were better than me.” William whispered, unable to look at Skandar, “I thought you were the sensible one.”

“Maybe I don’t want to be better than you. Maybe I just ... ahh fuck.” Skandar winced, holding his right side, “Maybe I just wanted to be equal with you.”

“That’s why you did it. Isn’t it?” William said in frustration, wiping blood off his lip, “It wasn’t just to hurt me. It was so we’d be the same. So you wouldn’t hate me if you took me back.”

“Fucked if I know, Will. I just know ... we can’t keep doing this. I’ve been living up my taste of freedom lately, but ...” Skandar sighed, “I’m Daddy before I’m anything else. And despite what we’ve all done, you’re still Poppa. We can’t stay together just for them, but we can do what’s best for them by being mature and responsible.”

“And you’ve got somewhere to stay?” William asked softly, sighing in resignation, “You’d still spend time with the boys?”

“Don’t.” Skandar warned, “The only way I wouldn’t is if you barred me.”

“I have no right to. They’re our boys, not my boys.”

“It’s only because you have primary custody that I’m leaving this house to you, with them. They can’t leave this house. It’s their home.” Skandar said as he walked slowly to the freeze to pull out an ice pack.

He threw one to William and held his own to his eye. William nodded in gratitude and held the pack to his jaw as he stood slowly to his feet. He sighed sadly at Skandar.

“Did you just do this to make me feel what you went through?”William asked.

“I don’t know, Will. But I know now I did it for the wrong reasons, whatever they were.” Skandar held his hand out to William, to shake it, “I’m sorry.”

William stared at the hand and shook his head, “No, Ska...Teacup, I’m sorry.”

“We can’t keep doing this, Will. I need time to breathe. Properly this time.”

William knew what that meant, and he knew it was the right thing. It wasn’t right for them to keep fighting, to keep arguing, to keep upsetting the boys with their instability. He had to let Skandar go, if was ever going to have a chance to get him back. Right now, he didn’t even know if he wanted that, or if it was possible. He wasn’t angry at Skandar for what had transpired in Fiji. If anything, he was relieved. It somehow eased the pressure on himself for all his own misdeeds and evened the playing field. He somehow knew deep down that that’s what Skandar intended.

“I’m sorry I hit you.” William said as he closed his eyes, “You’re right. We can’t keep doing this.”

“Not when we have two beautiful boys who need us.”

“I’m sorry I never gave you the credit you deserve.” William said sincerely, still frowning, “You did so much for our family for so long, Teacup. I’ve only been doing this for a little while and it’s made me realize how much I owe you.”

“It’s not about us anymore.” Skandar said sadly, giving a weak smile, “It’s about our boys. And because of that ... I need to leave. We need to ... breathe apart from one another. There’s too much between us and it makes us ... stupid. Please don’t keep my boys away from me. They’re all I have ...”

Just the memory of Skandar speaking those words caused William to choke up with tears. He didn’t care that Skandar had spent time in Fiji romping with a model. He knew that wasn’t Skandar. He knew that was simply the result of years of neglect on his own part.

And so it was that William and Skandar agreed to go their separate ways. Though William only did so for the sake of their boys. His relationship with Skandar was simply too volatile, too violent, too raw. He and Skandar both reasoned it was better to be apart than to be together and traumatize the boys with their constant arguing and even worse, their physical fighting.

But it was not a decision that William reached lightly. This evening when Skandar returned to the house to collect some of his things and sit down as a family, William was tempted to renege on his agreement to separate officially. The look on his boys’ faces when William and Skandar sat down with them was pure hell.

“But I told Poppa I would give him another chance.” Petey said, eyes filled with confusion as he sat on the sofa, eyes flicking from one parent to the other.

Eddy was unusually still as he sat on the floor between Petey’s legs. Anna was upstairs, a constant and quiet source of reason. If things got out of hand, she would intervene, but she was hopeful that Skandar and William would behave in a civil manner for the boys’ sakes.

“This isn’t about giving Poppa a chance.” Skandar said evenly, reaching out a hand to cover Petey’s.

“You hit each other, didn’t you?” Petey frowned, his blue eyes tinged with emotion as he noticed the bruises on Skandar’s hand, “Your eye looks funny. And so does Poppa’s lip.”

Skandar glanced at William and the two shared a guilty exchange. Petey was far too smart to bother trying to fool, and Skandar tried his best to never lie to his sons. William took a deep breath and decided to take the lead, even though it seemed quite odd for him to do right now. Despite spending a lot of time with the boys while Skandar had been away, he still deferred to Skandar’s status as the parent the boys recognized as their primary parent.

“Poppa hit Daddy first.” William confessed, “And Poppa has no excuse for it.”

“You always hit each other now.” Petey frowned, which Eddy echoed from between his brother’s legs, “Why don’t you love each other?”

“We do.” Skandar said quickly, “And sometimes adults do stupid things when they love each other. Sometimes they get angry, they get confused, and they do stupid, stupid things. But Poppa and I love each other very much and we always will. But more than that, we love you two boys so, so much. And it’s because we love you both that we ... that Poppa and Daddy are going to be spending a lot of time apart from each other.”

“You are both getting broked up, aren’t you?”Petey said, frowning miserably.

“Broken up, Petey.” Skandar corrected softly, “Not broked up.”

“Oh, would you just spare him?” William gasped, “He’s five years old!”

Skandar shot William a death glare, “Don’t counter me in front of the boys.”

“God, Skandar, it’s no wonder he’s so proper. Just let him be a kid! He’s not your walking little brain project.” William said in frustration, “You let Eddy talk however he likes but Petey has to do everything properly?”

“Shut up!” Skandar snapped at William angrily, “God damn you, Will. And you wonder why the hell we’re divorcing? This isn’t the time!”

“Well I’m here now, aren’t I?” William countered, “And you’re going to see some changes to how the boys are raised. Petey’s wound up so tight, when does he just get to have fun instead of being your proper little man?”

“Well maybe if you were around more he wouldn’t feel like he had to become one!”

“SHUT UP!” Petey screamed, before Eddy began to howl with cries, “Shut up!”

Showing some rather amazing strength, Petey picked Eddy up and rushed up the stairs to the upper lounge where Anna was reading behind the screen door. Skandar wanted to run after him, but he stayed where he was and simply watched broken hearted. He rounded on William the moment Petey had disappeared with Eddy, eyes alight with anger.

“What the fuck is wrong with you!?” Skandar screamed at William, “What the fuck are you doing!?”

“Look what you’ve turned him into!” William yelled back.

“Don’t you ever do that to me in front of them again!” Skandar was livid, “Are you seriously fucking retarded? What’s your IQ, two? What the hell were you playing at? You just sat there taking digs at me any chance you could fucking get! And you wonder why the hell we’re getting divorced? You couldn’t even leave that till after we’d spoken to the boys? You’ve been out of the parenting loop for so long that you really know fuck all about it now, don’t you?”

“You’re correcting a five year old. A five year old!”

“A five year old with more brains than you, you fucking idiot. You want him to inherit your stupid or something?” Skandar snapped, “Is that it? You want him to grow up and be an insecure old slut like his Poppa?”

“You better shut your mouth, Skan.” William warned, standing with fists clenched, “Or I swear to God, I’ll knock your ass into next Sunday. Your lips will beat your ass to the hospital they’ll be that damn big after I knock the shit out of them.”

“That’s all you’ve got, isn’t it? Your big fucking fists. Your brain’s too fried to fucking think and all you’ve got are your primate reactions.” Skandar said bitterly, turning to leave, “Get the fuck out of my life you halfwit piece of shit.”

“I hate you!” William cried out suddenly, sharply, his eyes filled with hurt tears, “Why are you so mean to me!? All I want is to fix our family and all you can do is hate me!”

Skandar grabbed the nearest object to him, which happened to be an orange from a fruit bowl. He turned and threw it at William with all his might before he rushed him, shoving him off his feet. William was too upset to respond immediately and he readied to let Skandar hit him without opposition.

“Oi! Idiot members of the male gender!” Anna yelled angrily from upstairs, leaning over the railing, “I’m taking the boys home with me. If either of you grows up in the next day, you can pick them up after school tomorrow. Ridiculous, the pair of you.”

With those words spoken, Anna disappeared out through one of the upstairs exits with Eddy in one arm and Petey holding onto her free hand. Skandar cursed as he looked up, before he shoved William back down and got off him. He grabbed his coat and keys, before turning back to William.

“We couldn’t even get this fucking thing right.” Skandar said, tears in his eyes, “How the fuck did we end up like this, Will? We used to love each other. We used to care. What’s happened to us?”

“Stop hating me!” William cried from the ground, hurt in his voice, “Stop hating me! I’m trying to save our family!”

“Doing a great job, Genius.”

William took a drag from his cigarette as he fought back bitter tears. He finished off his brandy and poured another glass, eager to drown his sorrows. He missed his boys, but he knew they were better off tonight with Anna and Sarah. He’d tried to make things right with Skandar but by the end of the night, he was impossible to talk to. The hatred between them seemed insurmountable.

William inhaled another drag and flicked the ash from his smoke. His hand was shaking terribly as he raised the cigarette to his lips again. He took a long drag before he suddenly broke down with a harsh sob. He leaned forward held his head in his hands as he cried. How could it all have come to this?

“Hey, Dick.” Sarah said, surprisingly softly, hands in her pockets.

William jerked in surprise, looking up at Sarah as she stood at the patio doors. She gave him a weak smile and stepped out onto the deck toward him. She gently took the cigarette from his hands and raised it to her own lips. She took a small drag and coughed violently, dropping the cigarette into William’s makeshift ashtray; an empty beer bottle.

“I don’t miss that shit, that’s for sure.” She said, patting her chest, “Smoking kills, you know. I can get you more if you like.”

“Hah. Funny.” William sighed defeated, “Come to rag on me?”

“No.” Sarah said, sitting down beside him and taking his right hand in both of her own, “I just came. No real reason. I just came.”

“Thought you hated me.”

“I thought Santa Claus was real for a while too.” Sarah shrugged, rubbing his hand.

“He’s changing. Every time I see him it’s getting harder and harder to reach him. I feel my family slipping away from me and I just ... I don’t know how to save it, Sarah.” William cried, burying his face in her hands, “Oh God, I’ve fucked it all up.”

“You gotta do something, Will.” Sarah urged, surprisingly intent, “You’re right. He is changing. Even I don’t know which way he’s going anymore. You have to do something, Will. Before it’s too late.”

“It’s already too late! I gave him his separation. We’re getting divorced, Sarah.” William nearly screamed in agony, gasping into her hands before she wrapped her arms around him, “We’re getting divorced. It’s really happening.”

“So fight it, Will. Fight it.” Sarah said plainly, “Stall it. Fight it. Withdraw your proceedings and try to fight his. Give him his space, but don’t give him his divorce. Give him time to do whatever it is he thinks he’s doing and fight the divorce at the same time. Eventually he’ll come around. He has to. He loves those boys. He loves you. You’ve been a right proper fuck up, Will Keynes-Moseley, but now you have to stand up and fight the hard fight. It’s the only fight that matters.”

William looked up at her, eyes watery but filled with a growing resolve. He nodded his head at her and kissed her hands, “God, Sarah, I thought you hated me. I thought you wanted us to divorce.”

“What I want is for my two boys to be happy. Right now they’re with Anna at our house crying their sweet little hearts out over their parents. And despite all the assholian tendencies you two have toward each other, I know you love him and he loves you. I’ve seen you fight before. Remember when Petey was born? Skandar took him to you while you were in hospital and you were doing it rough with the chemo? When we thought you were going to leave us, but you didn’t, Will. You didn’t. You fought and you won. Fight again. Fight for this.”

William raised his eyes to hers and closed them, exhaling a sigh of relief just from knowing that someone else wanted him to succeed, “Thank you. Thank you. I’ll do it. Fuck that little shit. I’ll fix my family. Somehow, I’m going to fix it.”

And so William resolved himself to doing just that. He knew he had to be smart about it. He couldn’t just beat his chest and get his family back. He realized he really was angry at Skandar now for what happened in Fiji. He knew he was hardly in a position to judge, but he did accept he was upset over Skandar’s actions.

The next day William collected the boys after school and drove them home. He sat them down and explained by himself that the separation was for Daddy, not Poppa. He told them that he would do his very best to bring Daddy home, but that it would take time. He also promised them that even if Daddy never came home, both boys would be loved by their parents. The rest of his plan would require time and patience, neither of which particularly thrilled William. He knew if he was to stand a chance with Skandar, he would need to give him the space he believed he needed. Perhaps it was space he needed himself. Space to decide if they really had a future at all.

YOU DID BAD, KID

Despite intending to buy a house, almost a week after officially moving out of his family home, Skandar still hadn’t made any further steps to purchase. He was living out of a hotel, but spent most of his time in his office at his studio headquarters in Auckland City Central. He wasn’t used to having so much free time, and in all honesty, he didn’t enjoy it.

He found it hard to sit still at 2.30pm each weekday afternoon. He’d sit in his office staring at the clock, knowing that where he really wanted to be was waiting outside Petey’s school gate to collect him. The routine he’d based his whole life on for the last few years had been turned on its head. He’d shaped his career and work life around the needs of his boys. Despite being unhappy for so long in his marriage, Skandar never contemplated the idea that he wouldn’t be ‘Daddy’ every day.

He presently sat at his desk, staring at a picture of his and William’s beach wedding. It seemed so long ago now. He rubbed the photo with a soft, sad smile and blinked back a little emotion. When he looked in the mirror lately, he didn’t like his reflection. In fact, he hated it. He knew why now as well.

“Fiji. Fucking Fiji.” Skandar sighed softly, tears in his eyes as he stroked William’s face in the photo.

While William had lost his way, Skandar could already feel the William he married coming back. But he himself was no longer home for William to come back to. William was playing Poppa, taking care of the boys, while Skandar worked as hard as he could, trying to convince himself he wasn’t completely miserable without his two boys.

“Mr. Keynes, you have a call.”

Skandar looked up at the sound of his assistant’s voice. He nodded to the young man, before he picked up his phone and accepted the call. He hadn’t bothered asking who it was, simply trusting his assistant would only pass it through if it mattered.

“Daddy?”

It mattered. Skandar smiled broadly, gushing at the sound of Petey’s voice. He knew Petey would be home from school by now. He couldn’t wait till next week when it would be his turn to have the boys.

“Petey.” Skandar said, closing his eyes and smiling with all his might, “Oh, Petey. Daddy is so happy to hear you. Where are you, Sweetheart?”

“I’m at home. Poppa’s making us some toasties. They’re very good.”

“I bet they are. Poppa’s so good at making toasties. Daddy loves them.” Skandar chuckled, eyes glinting with emotion, “How’s my little man?”

“I’m okay. I miss you. I did a drawing of you in school today. When you come over, I can give it to you.”

Skandar’s face fell when he realized how foreign he felt toward his own house. He’d let William stay there so as not to disrupt the boys, but he hated feeling like a stranger visiting his own house. He missed his house. He missed his boys. He missed his bed. He missed their routines. He missed being Daddy.

“Petey?” Skandar said softly, “Daddy loves you so much. I ... just want to say again how sorry I am about the other night. I’m so sorry, Baby.”

“It’s okay. Poppa’s doing so good, Daddy. He’s keeping his promise. He promised me he’d be good this time, and he’s being very good.” Petey said sincerely, “Can’t you come home now? It’s okay now because Poppa loves us. He won’t be bad again.”

“Poppa’s not bad. Poppa always loved you. Of course Poppa’s doing good. Poppa’s the best Poppa in the whole world.” Skandar smiled tearfully, “I wish I could come home. I wish I could. I just ... Daddy and Poppa don’t ...”

“I know.” Petey sighed, “You don’t love each other anymore. You’re broked up.”

“Broken... I mean ...” Skandar smiled, realizing that perhaps sometimes it was okay to let the little things slide, “Yes ... we’re broked up.”

“I wish you weren’t.” Petey said softly, “I have to go now, Poppa wants to talk to yo...”

“Daddeh?” Eddy’s voice called out, obviously from behind Petey, “Ish ooh, Daddeh!? Meh punch ooh face! Meh sreep ooh!”

Skandar burst into tearful laughter, “My little demon! Hi!”

“Sorry, Teacup.” William chuckled, pausing before he spoke again, “Sorry, I just had to get the little tyrant away from the phone. Uhh ... hi.”

“Hey, Will.” Skandar smiled, “Thank you for letting him call me.”

“Don’t be dumb, Teacup. He can call you whenever he wants. You can call him whenever you want. I just ... I just wanted to see how you were. I hope you don’t mind me calling. Is everything going alright with your new place?”

“Oh ... I uhh ...” Skandar sighed, “Procrastination.”

“I know her.” William chuckled, “We used to be friends.”

“The boys sound really good, Will. Are they eating alright?” Skandar asked, “Petey doesn’t handle shellfish well, you know that, right? And Eddy likes to have his breakfast f...”

“Teacup, I know, alright?”

“Right. Sorry. I just ... miss them.”

“Which is why I’m calling. I know you wanted to wait till you got settled into your new place, but ... I mean ... if you wanted, you could come here instead. No strings. Or even Sarah and Anna’s house. Whatever you want. The boys miss you. I know you don’t want them at a hotel, so maybe this would be a good solution?” William offered, “Whatever you want, Teacup.”

“Why are you being so nice to me?” Skandar asked, a little emotion in his voice.

“Why ... wouldn’t I be?” William asked, a little confused.

“Because I’ve been a horrible ass to you?”

“I kinda deserved it.” William blushed, giving a small chuckle.

“No ... you didn’t deserve it.”

William paused, clearly appreciating the sentiment of Skandar’s statement, “Well ... since we both live in glass houses, neither of us should throw stones. And even if I didn’t live in one, I still wouldn’t want to throw any. Let’s just leave it at that, shall we?”

“I remember you.” Skandar said softly, doing his best to keep his composure, “I remember you.”

“I’m sorry it took so long for me to remember myself. So what do you say we leave the past where it belongs, in the past?”

Skandar smiled gratefully and nodded, “Where it belongs.”

“Good!” William smiled brightly, “Well, you know where I am. Call me when you decide what to do about the boys, okay? And if you think you can stomach being in the same vicinity as me, you’re welcome to come over whenever you like. The boys really miss Daddy. And so do I. No strings, I promise.”

“Guh.” Skandar groaned, wondering how the roles had switched between him self and William, “Just ... guh.”

“I have to go. Your little demon is trying to put jam in Petey’s hair.” William chuckled, “Call, visit, whatever you want! Love you, Teacup!”

Skandar didn’t even have time to reply before William hung the phone up. Skandar stared at the phone for a while before he smiled softly. That was the first proper civil and genuinely nice conversation he could remember having with William in months, maybe more.

“So ...” Sarah said, waltzing into Skandar’s office and sitting at the edge of his desk, “Shall I give you a ride home then?”

“I guess you heard.”

“You guess right, Sweetheart.” Sarah smiled, rubbing his arm, “You still think this divorce is what you really want?”

“No.” Skandar said honestly, “But obviously this time apart is actually helping Will and I to get along better.”

“Well.” Sarah smiled, “That’s a good thing, isn’t it?”

“Good for the boys.”

“Skan ... I know it’s not easy to just forget everything that’s happened in the past, but ... why don’t you go home?”

“Because as well as William and I are getting along, we both know if you put us in the same place, it’d be just as volatile as always.” Skandar sighed, before he gave Sarah a soft smile, “You know what though? It feels lovely to talk to him without being so god damned angry.”

“Thought you didn’t believe in God.”

Skandar groaned and raised his eyebrow at her, “Don’t you have a job or something?”

“Perks of being an in demand actress who makes filthy money.” Sarah gushed, “I can do what I like. Oh and let’s not forget the love of my life. Don’t worry. We got it covered.”

“We have it covered.” Skandar corrected.

Sarah just stared blankly at him, “You are a real nerd, you know that?”

Skandar just shook his head and smiled at her. He stood up and moved around the table, hands on her waist. He gave her a brief kiss on the lips and hugged her.

“I’m sorry.” He said, kissing her neck and holding her tightly.

“Skan, I’ve told you so many times. Your dick is too small to give me a thrill.” Sarah teased playfully, rubbing his back, “What are you sorry for?”

“You know what for. Being an ass. Going a bit crazy and sharing my awesome mojo around.” Skandar sighed, inhaling her familiar scent as if it were a grounding influence, “I don’t want to lose you. I think if I did, I’d lose my head.”

“Dick, why would you lose me?” Sarah asked, pulling back to look him in the eyes.

“I know you’ve been spending a lot of time with Will, and you haven’t with me. I’m guessing you’re still pissed at me for Fiji.” He shrugged.

“Hey, that’s your business.” Sarah said, rubbing his arms, “I’m starting to figure out my baby is right about trying to be impartial. I always side with you. I always will, you know that, but I think I need to try and share the love, you know? William’s trying really hard to get the boys used to him being around again. It hasn’t been easy. Especially when they miss you so much.”

“I don’t think it’s a good idea to tempt fate with me going over there. Every time William and I are in the same place, we fight, and my body can’t take it much more.” Skandar chuckled, “But I don’t want the boys around that. I hope we can be friends again, I really do. We had a good talk today and we didn’t even fight, so ... there’s hope. I just miss my boys something terrible. I know I should just finalize that house purchase, but ... I’m having issues with the idea of living somewhere else. I mean, I bought that house thinking I’d always live there. And now ...”

Skandar shook his head, stopping in mid sentence. He gave Sarah another warm kiss and hug, holding her close. He didn’t feel like he’d been a particularly good friend of late. He didn’t feel like he’d been a particularly good anything really. His sense of entitlement was quickly diminishing, especially after his rendezvous in Fiji. He already felt like he was failing as a parent, due to his incredibly diminished time with the boys. But he also felt like a terrible friend as well.

“Enough about me. Come on, let’s go out or something.” He interlaced their fingers and led her to the door, “I want to hang out with my favourite lesbian.”

“I’m not a lesbian, I’m just a pervert, alright?” Sarah smiled, before she cursed, “Shit damn mother fucker. I can’t. Anna’s mother flies in tonight.”

“Wait, what?!” Skandar gasped in surprise, “Are you shitting me?”

“She’s staying with us for a ... holiday.” Sarah said, hand on her stomach as it turned, “I’m so nervous and ... yet so fucking excited. I mean ... Anna’s so ...”

“I know.” Skandar nodded, “Wow. It only took what ... years? Does this mean she’s finally accepting her daughter loves the pussy?”

“Her daughter loves me!” Sarah said, punching Skandar in the arm, “It doesn’t matter that I have a pussy.”

“If it makes you feel better, I love your pussy.”

“You’ve had enough pussy lately, thank you.” Sarah smirked, “What happened to ass loving Skandar?”

“It’s been so long since I had any male ass and even longer since I gave mine up. I think my ass love has gone dormant.” Skandar shrugged.

“I call bullshit. You just haven’t seen your husband’s for a while.”

“No, but I bet other people have.” Skandar groaned, rolling his eyes, “Sorry, being petty, aren’t I?”

“Yep.”

“Bah.” Skandar sighed, “So you can’t join me on a drunken bender?”

Sarah stopped Skandar in one of the hallways, pushing him toward the wall so she could speak quietly. She cupped his cheek and frowned with concern. Sympathetically she kissed his temple.

“Babe, is that really going to help any?” She asked softly, “Come on. You were upset because William used to party so much and now you’re doing the same thing the moment you get away from the boys?”

“Because I miss them!” Skandar gasped in frustration, “I miss them, Sarah.”

“Look. Do you really think you can’t go over there?”

“I don’t want to risk it, for the boy’s sake. The last few times William and I have been together has just been too volatile. Too violent. Maybe when a bit more time has passed we’ll be able to be near each other without fighting.”

“Well ... look. Tomorrow I’ll try and weasel some time after we’ve had lunch with Anna’s mum.” Sarah bit her lip as she worked out in her mind how this could work, “I’ll ask Will if I can pick Petey up from school and Eddy up from the house. Then I can pick you up and we can all go to the park or somewhere to get the boys some afternoon tea?”

“God, I love you.” Skandar gasped, kissing her madly and tilting her backward, “I love you!”

Sarah giggled and shoved Skandar off her, wiping her mouth. He did that far too often, but it was simply how they were with each other. He was simply overjoyed with the fact she was his very best friend. He clasped her hands and smiled at her, eyes twinkling.

“I should have taken you to Fiji.”

Sarah gushed, smiling sweetly before she kneed Skandar in the nuts, “Aww, so cute and yet so dumb. I’m going home to shag my girl’s brains out now. Bye!”

Skandar grunted, laughing and holding his groin as she wandered off with a wave, “Oh goody, jerk off material! Thanks!”

STRANGE RELATIONS

“Sar... oh, guh, God, fuck!” Anna cried out, digging her nails into Sarah’s shoulder as she arched back.

Anna’s naked, pale body rocked as she sat in Sarah’s lap. She was covered in sweat, her large breasts bouncing with each motion Sarah’s fingers made between her thick bush of pubic hair. Sarah too was sweaty with exertion. Sex with Anna was always exhausting because one orgasm was rarely enough. And after so many years together, they knew each other’s bodies, understood each other’s bodies to such a degree that it was almost an art.

“Talk to your mother with that filthy mouth?” Sarah grinned wickedly, her wet hair plastered down her face.

“Ugh, Sarah, just do it!” Anna pleaded, almost shrieking, “Please!”

Anna’s toes were curled in utter ecstasy. She was in so much pleasure it was almost painful. Almost unbearable. Not once in her many years of sexual adventure had she ever known a lover as gifted as Sarah. And despite her unending fascination with the male gender and what treasure lay between their legs, never had one man given her the sexual nirvana that Sarah had.

Sarah moved her lips down Anna’s collarbone, an area she was particularly fond of. She was fond of every inch of Anna, but her collarbone was an extremely sensitive area and Sarah revelled in suckling on it. She moved her lips further down to the tops of Anna’s rather sizeable cleavage. Many believed Anna was artificially enhanced, but it wasn’t true. She was simply blessed with a figure and breasts that many women would kill for. In Sarah’s case, she’d kill to keep those breasts to herself.

“Damn, I love these jugs.” Sarah moaned, flicking her tongue across Anna’s nipple before she suckled the breast into her mouth.

Anna was halfway between giggling at the comment and throwing her head back in ecstasy. This was inhuman. Knowing it was their last sexual encounter before Anna’s mother arrived, Sarah made sure they started early so she could give Anna a marathon session.

“Sarah!” Anna screamed, “Please! I can’....can’t!”

Anna rarely ‘topped’ when she and Sarah had sex. She still considered herself very much a girl and did not enjoy wearing the device that Sarah was currently plunging in and out of Anna’s pussy. The few times she had were not very successful and so Sarah typically adopted the dominant role in their actual lovemaking. Despite this, Anna was often the instigator and was not above making Sarah beg after teasing her sufficiently. Today was not one of those days. Today Sarah was most definitely in control and Anna was doing all the begging.

“Sarah!” Anna screamed again, bouncing faster and trying to force the artificial penis inside her, as well as Sarah’s deft fingers, to bring herself to her final orgasm, “God, Sarah, please!”

Anna’s face was contorted from the pleasure she felt, and the semi pain she was in at being denied her release. She was almost angry at Sarah for denying her release for so long already. She felt powerless to do anything. She was at Sarah’s mercy.

While Anna’s naked body was full and curvaceous, pale like milk, and truly stunning in the classical sense, Sarah was far more lithe. Her breasts, while nothing to sneeze at, were nowhere near the size of Anna’s. While Anna was pale, Sarah had a slight caramel tinge to it. Her body was lean and long, with clear evidence of definition and muscle. Sarah was a pinup Hollywood beauty at work, but at home, she was just a girl. Just Anna’s girl.

“Sarah, I love you.” Anna gasped, smashing her full lips against Sarah’s and kissing her with all her might.

Sarah barely had time to react before her tongue was swirling against Anna’s. Together they rocked, Anna gasping with each thrust that pierced her depths. She moved her hand down to where Sarah’s was already working. In an act that was long practiced and used, their thumbs linked as if joining hands, while their fingers worked busily to accent the strap-on bringing them both to the brink of orgasm. That brink was now crossed.

Anna let out an audible sob against Sarah’s lips as ecstasy spread from her core to her toes. They curled as she arched back, letting out a loud, low groan of pleasure. She was actually crying, simply for the physical release her body had finally been granted. Sarah struggled to recover her own breath as she shook, still thrusting idly into Anna as her own orgasm moved through her body. She leaned forward, holding Anna tightly and suckling on her warm, familiar breast.

Anna collapsed off Sarah’s lap, onto the floor where she lay completely undone. Her hair was a mess, her body was covered in sweat, and her toes still twitched from the mind blowing sex she’d just experienced. She rolled onto her side, curling into a ball and sobbing softly to herself.

Sarah removed the strap-on slowly, exhausted from their sex. She realized Anna was crying quietly and knew that despite how great the sex was, it was not the reason for her girlfriend’s tears. She moved to the floor, kissing her way up from Anna’s feet to her thighs, to her trembling stomach, to her breasts, and finally to her lips. She lay down and wrapped her arms around Anna, her eyes filled with sympathy.

“Honey?” Sarah cooed softly, stroking Anna’s back, “What’s wrong?”

Anna turned her tear filled deep blue eyes to Sarah’s, “I love you.”

That was what was wrong. Anna loved Sarah. She loved her so much it terrified her. Even after all these years together, Anna’s love for Sarah had never waivered. Her physical and sexual desires may have, but her heart never had. Despite her struggles with her sexuality, Sarah was the only person Anna ever wanted to come home to. The only person she wanted to wake up to in the morning. Sarah was her damnation and her salvation.

Despite being in a steady and stable homosexual relationship, Anna’s faith still remained. She believed in God. She still longed to go to church in times of personal crisis. She’d never been particularly prudish. She was partial to a good party long before she met Sarah. She’d had sex with a boy long before she was ever supposed to. But sex with a girl? Loving a girl? It felt like the greatest sin ever. Even now Anna had issues with it. Issues brought closer to home by one fact.

“Mum is going to be here today and ... I just ...” Anna cried, burying her head in Sarah’s chest, “I love you, Sarah. That’s what’s wrong.”

“I know.” Sarah whispered, holding Anna closer and kissing her hair, “I know, Baby.”

Sarah understood how Anna felt. She knew she could act hurt by Anna’s issues by now, but she wasn’t. She simply understood that this was a difficult situation for Anna, and loved her regardless. She couldn’t imagine loving anyone else now, and deep down she knew she loved a good romp with a man as much as Anna did. But when it mattered. When it came right down to it, Anna was the girl, the heart, the soul that Sarah wanted to be connected with. When she walked along the beach behind Skandar’s house, she wanted to do so with Anna, fingers interlaced and the sea breeze blowing through their hair.

“I’m so terrified.” Anna sobbed, “I know it’s stupid, but ... she’s actually going to be here. She’s actually going to see.”

“Anna ... Honey ...” Sarah said, taking a deep breath, “Do ... do you want me to ... to stay somewhere else? Would that ... make it easier?”

The hesitation in Anna’s reaction was enough for Sarah to know how she truly felt. She feigned a smile to Anna, but inside her heart was breaking. She kissed Anna’s temple and held her to her bosom. Her foolish dream of Anna standing proud before her mother was diminishing rapidly.

“Just ... just for a little while?” Anna suggested, her face still pressed against Sarah’s chest, “So I can talk to her? Try and ... make her understand before ... before we put it in front of her face.”

Sarah’s natural defiant streak was telling her to say no, to demand Anna accept her without hesitation. But just as she had in years gone by, she acquiesced. The last thing she wanted was to push Anna away by forcing the issue. She knew she couldn’t live without Anna. Not now. Not after all these years and the love she believed they both shared.

“Alright, Honey.” Sarah said softly, steeling herself as much as she could, “If that’s what you want.”

- To Be Continued -

Pain is Relative, Part 2 - Anna's crisis of faith continues. Skandar and William find time apart gives them a chance to become something they haven't for a long time; friends.

A/N: Don't know when next update will be. Sorry. Thanks for all your feedback on the last chapter. Much appreciated..

</div>

Breathe 9 - Just Breathe - Part 2

suborbital — Fri, 04 Jul 2008 04:53:47 GMT

Part 2 is under the cut, because LJ has crap posting limits. Sorry!

SPACE IS FUN

Skandar missed his kids. More than anything he missed his kids. He’d spent a week in Fiji while William spent a week uninterrupted with the kids. He talked to them each morning, so the boys would he was thinking of them. He felt a smattering of guilt for leaving his boys, but he didn’t feel like he had much choice. Part of him also felt this time was long deserved. He’d essentially been a solo parent for the last few years. It was William’s turn to play the primary parent.

During that week, Skandar had a lot of time to think about his relationship with William. He had time to think about where it began, and where it was now. He didn’t feel as in love with William as he did when they married. He knew he still loved William, but he didn’t think he loved this William anymore. It felt as though the man he married was no longer the man he was married to.

“You know, for someone on holiday you look like you are doing some serious thinking.”

Skandar turned his head up in surprise at those words. He wasn’t expecting any company. He found himself face to face with a woman he’d never met before. She had a friendly face and in another time and place he’d consider her a groupie. He knew she recognized him. He was about to rebuff her when she sat down beside him on the sand and gave him a smile. It was a dangerous smile, barely hiding some ulterior motive, but it was a smile Skandar hadn’t felt directed at him in so long he couldn’t help but respond to it.

“Hi, I’m Skandar.” He smiled softly.

She introduced herself as Amy, a model here on a shoot in the golden islands of Fiji. Skandar should’ve guessed that the moment he laid eyes on her. Surprisingly, he found her rather intelligent and easy to talk to. So easy in fact that after just an hour of talking on the beach, she’d invited him for drinks at a beachside party that night and he accepted without hesitation.

When she got up to walk away, giving him a wistful look, he blushed rather madly. He knew exactly what was happening. He knew she wanted him. He just didn’t care. She’d already made him feel so much more desired than William had in so long.

That night he sat in his beachside bungalow staring in the mirror. It had been a long time since he was out like this. He was rather excited. He stood up and walked out onto the beach, making his way to the beachside bar where the party was being held.

“Amy?” Skandar said softly, smiling as he greeted her at the bar.

She greeted him in kind and the two immediately struck up a conversation that included brief introductions to some of her modelling comrades. The conversation quickly moved back to themselves, with Amy giving Skandar a brief history of her background. Things quickly turned personal when she asked why he was alone at a resort in Fiji.

“Oh, well, you say you’re a fan, yeah?”

“Alright, I am.” Amy blushed, smiling at him, “And yes, I already know you’re in the middle of a messy divorce.”

“That’s an understatement.” Skandar sighed, looking at his ring free hand, “It’s kind of been a long time coming. Are you married?”

“No. I don’t really believe in it. It just leads to divorce. You’re proof of that.” She rubbed his arm softly, “I know I shouldn’t say this, but he’s an idiot for cheating on you.”

“I ... try not to read much of the tabloids. Besides, it’s pretty much over now. I realized that the second day I was here. I’m just trying to figure out the tidiest way to wrap it all up. I mean ...” Skandar said, turning to her as he took another sip of his mojito, “I loved him. I really, truly loved him. And he ... I don’t know. I know he cheated. I’m not stupid. But I’m past the hating stage. I’m at the moving on stage.”

“Would you like to come back to my bungalow? Some of the girls are going to have a few quiet ones there.”

Before he could even contemplate objecting, he was agreeing. Twenty minutes later he was sitting on her sofa, staring at her. She was smitten with him and he liked it. He knew he was a good looking man. He knew he was worth being desired, but it had been so long since he felt that way, that it felt brand new now. The alcohol helped to smooth things over with them, but he did feel a certain animal magnetism, no doubt on account of her looks, which were rather stunning in a Megan Gale type way.

Without a whole lot of build up, the pair were kissing and sharing soft moans. Skandar didn’t even seem to care that he wasn’t alone with her. He heard the click of a camera but didn’t make any motion to do anything about it. He was too busy laying her back and locking tongues with her. He felt like he was in high school again, necking with one of his ex girlfriends, or perhaps Sarah during their ‘showmance’ years.

He didn’t know how it happened really, but in a few moments the bungalow was empty save for the pair of them, and she was between his legs, sucking on his dick. Was this cheating? He didn’t think so. In his heart he’d already let William go. This was simply a confirmation of it.

It was with that thought in mind that Skandar fucked Amy that night at least three times, and each time was as good as the first. He couldn’t remember the last time he and William had done the same, but he knew the last few times were never as enjoyable as this.

BITCH, PLEASE

“You did what!?” Sarah screamed down the phone at Skandar, “Bitch, I am going to fucking cut your balls off and feed them to a starving nation. A very small starving nation. A very small starving nation of ants. Yes. Ants. Won’t be much to feed them, of course.”

“Come on, Sarah, I’m having so much fun.” Skandar said excitedly, “I haven’t fucking fucked this much in ... in ... forever! I feel like man again!”

“She just wants your dick.”

“And thank goodness for that, because I want her to want my dick. Don’t worry, it’s not serious. It’s just fun. Lots of fun.”

“If I knew all you wanted was some pussy action I’d have asked you to give Anna a few rides around the paddock.” Sarah groaned, “I can’t believe you did that. You’re still married, you jock.”

“Please. Divorce filings aren’t cancelled. It’s still go. I don’t wear my ring. And I told William I was coming here for myself, without a promise of working things out. I know what I want now.”

“Some bitch sucking on your lollipop?”

Skandar laughed in reply, “Yes, please. I’ve forgotten how much I missed the fairer sex. But I think what I really want is just ... freedom. I’m not looking to settle down. I’m just having fun. It’s nice to be wanted again. I think it was just too little too late with William.”

“Shit. But what about our boys?” Sarah said anxiously.

Though she’d carried both Petey and Eddy for Skandar and William, she was still their mother. She still worried about them. It wasn’t a conventional arrangement but then nothing about the four was very conventional.

“When I get back to New Zealand next week, I’ll be having them for a few days. William and I will work something out.”

“So ... you’re becoming a man whore, are you?”

“Yes, I hope so. If William can do it, I can. I deserve some freaking attention!” Skandar said with a hint of annoyance, before he sighed, “I have to go, fun times to be had.”

“I hope she chokes on it, but there’s little chance of that since it’s so small.” Sarah smirked, “Dirty fucker.”

“Love you too, Bitch.” Skandar smirked, “Bye.”

Sarah groaned and hung the phone up after saying bye. She looked up at Anna who was staring quizzically at her as the pair lay in bed together. She shuffled over and gave Anna a warm kiss.

“I don’t want to end up like them.” Sarah said softly, “And we’re not even married to get divorced.”

“But we’re together, and that’s what counts. Skandar’s just acting out. It’s kind of to be expected. Still ... awfully disappointing.”

AT HOME WITH THE BOYS

“I don’t care how your Daddy normally does it!” William gasped in frustration, trying his darndest to make waffles the way Skandar did for breakfast, “This is how Poppa does it!”

Eddy was sitting on the countertop, watching intently. Skandar never let Eddy sit on the countertop, as he was a stickler for hygiene. William compromised this by putting Eddy on a part of the counter that was never used for food.

“Oi!” Eddy gasped, holding his fists up, “Meh doh punch ooh face!”

William spluttered with laughter, “I beg your pardon!?”

“Meh punch ooh face!” Eddy said, making a punching gesture.

“You’re a little terror!”

Eddy responded by leaning forward and bopping William’s arm. William burst with laughter, wondering how the hell Skandar managed this little tyrant. William’s opinion may have been bias, but he found him completely adorable.

“Poppa, you have flour all over your face.” Petey said as he walked in, dressed in his uniform for school, “Shall I call Sarah to take me?”

“No, no, I’ve got it under control.” William said, fretting about and looking for the keys, “Waffles will have to wait, Eddy. Petey, are you sure you had enough cereal?”

“Yes, Poppa.” Petey said politely, “Poppa? May I ask you a question, please?”

“Only if you stop speaking so properly and start acting like a tyrant.” William said with a mock frown, “Go ahead, Petey, what is it?”

“When’s Daddy coming home?”

William knew Skandar was due back two days ago, but had extended his trip in Fiji. The last he spoke to Skandar, he seemed very happy. William hoped Skandar was getting the respite he needed so that when he came back, they could try and save their marriage.

“Today!” Skandar said, poking his head over the rails from upstairs.

He grinned and jogged down the staircase, barefoot and in only his boxers. William was flabbergasted. Not only was Skandar here, but he seemed to have been here a while.

“Got in last night, you were all sleeping so I made myself comfortable in the spare room.” Skandar smiled broadly, picking Petey up and spinning him around, “My boy!”

“Daddy!” Petey gasped, the most emotion he’d shown all week.

“Heyyo, Daddeh!” Eddy said, waving both his hands, “’ere ooh been? Meh punch ooh face!”

“I’ll punch your face.” Skandar grinned, before William rolled his eyes.

“So that’s where he gets it.”

Skandar picked Eddy up so he had one of his boys in each arm. He gave them both a big wet kiss and hugged them tightly. He gave William a small smile and nod.

“Will.” Skandar said politely, “You look ... messy.”

“You know, Teacup, I forgot how much work it was looking after these two. You really did it hard on your own for so long.” William conceded, frowning a little, “But not anymore, right?”

“Not anymore!” Skandar grinned broadly, “We’re going to take care of them equally. Look, you finish your waffles, I’ll take Petey and come back and we can talk, yeah?”

“Okay!” William smiled happily at that suggestion.

“Otay!” Eddy echoed, holding up his hands in triumph.

“Oi!” Skandar said suddenly, staring at Eddy, “What’s your bum doing on my bench?”

“Counter.” William corrected.

“Bench!”

“Counter.”

“Will.” Skandar said, not amused, “His bum is on my bench. Not hygienic!”

“Eddy, didn’t we miss Daddy?” William asked as he picked Eddy up and settled him in his arms, “Hmm?”

“Umm ... noh!” Eddy laughed, “Haha!”

“I’m going to take my well behaved son to school now.” Skandar smirked, giving Eddy a wink before he grabbed his keys and headed for the door with Petey.

“Skan?” William said after he’d given Petey a kiss goodbye.

“Yeah, Will?” Skandar asked curiously, turning back to face him, “It’s good to have you home.”

Skandar gave a small smile and nodded in reply, before he took Petey’s hand and opened the front door. He stopped when William cleared his throat, obviously trying to get his attention. Skandar turned back, raising his eyebrow in playful annoyance.

“Skan, you’re in your boxers.”

“So all the hot mothers can perve at me.” Skandar said in a sultry voice, smirking as he left.

William wasn’t sure he liked that response but he smiled in reply. Eddy smacked him in the face, laughing as the flour on William’s head puffed up into the air. William gave Eddy a stare, but quickly turned it into a smile.

“Daddy’s home!” William grinned, spinning Eddy around, “Daddy’s home! And now we’re going to be a proper family again.”

“Yay!” Eddy grinned, holding his chubby little hands up, “Meh wan’ bweakfash!”

“Oif.” William groaned, “It’s always bloody breakfast with you, isn’t it, Kid?”

Eddy gave William a stern look, “Meh punch ooh face?”

William chuckled and started mixing his waffle batter, “You wait till you get older. I’ll take you out back and punch you in the face.”

“Meh haff bweakfash firsh?” Eddy asked curiously, tilting his head.

“You’re the cutest kid ever, you know that?” William grinned, giving Eddy a big wet kiss.

The two finished making their waffles by the time Skandar arrived back, skipping into the house in his flip flops. He kicked them off and sat down, grinning at Eddy. William took the opportunity to rush upstairs so he could collect a drawing Petey made of the family, all four this time. The day Petey returned from school with that drawing, William locked himself in Skandar’s office and sobbed his eyes out. It was the most beautiful sentiment he’d felt in so very long. He had to share it with Skandar.

He rushed back down and placed it on the table beside Skandar, daring to wrap his arms around Skandar’s neck from behind so he could look over his shoulder. He stared at the drawing as Skandar did, and watched his husband’s slender fingers trace over the drawing. Clearly it had an impact on Skandar. Skandar’s breathing hitched and he placed his hands over William’s, which were clasped over his own chest.

“Will? Can we talk?” Skandar asked softly.

“Whatever you want, Teacup.” William said softly, taking a seat beside Skandar, keeping their hands clasped, “Where are your suitcases? I went to unpack them for you before but I couldn’t find them.”

“That’s why we need to talk.” Skandar said, taking a deep breath and smiling softly at William, “My suitcases are at the hotel. I’ve been making arrangements to buy an apartment up the beach. I ... well ... yeah. I know you have custody of the boys, Will, I’m just hoping you’ll see fit to share custody with me.”

William’s heart was already breaking by the time Skandar finished talking, “But ... you said if I gave you space, I ... I thought you just needed space. Time to breathe. And then you’d come back and we could be a family again.”

“I just ... don’t think I’m done being free yet. I had a great week ... on my own, and ... I think it’s what I want to keep being.” Skandar bit his lip, “Let’s not make this a big issue, okay? It’s just up the road. The boys will adapt.”

William didn’t say anything. He laid his head on the table and seemed to fall limp. He didn’t really have much to say. He didn’t have any cards left to play to keep Skandar with him. He just felt defeated, as if his last hope to save his family had just been taken away from him. He began to weep softly, gasping and staring at the drawing Petey had made. Eddy frowned and crawled out of his chair over the table and lay himself over William’s head.

“Poppah noh twy.” Eddy frowned, hugging his Poppa’s head, “Poppah noh twy.”

Skandar sighed, staring away from William as his own eyes began to water up. He realized now that it was he who was making the choice to break up his family. William might have been the start of their problems, but Skandar knew he was the finish. He stood up, turning back to William to rub his back.

“I’m sorry, Will.” Skandar whispered, leaning down to kiss William’s cheek, “I’ll grab my things and ... I’ll come back tonight and we can talk then, or I can call. I’d ... like to work something out with the boys as soon as possible, if that’s okay.”

“I can understand you leaving me, but them?” William said, finally looking at Skandar but unable to raise his head as Eddy was still draped over it.

“I don’t want to leave them. I’m hoping we get to share them equally.”

William eased Eddy off his head and sat up, pulling Eddy onto his lap, “I’ve found my home again, Skan. I’ve found my heart again. I meant what I said when I let you go before so you could ... breathe.”

“I did. I breathed ... quite well. I told you when I left that there was no promise between us. Our divorce was still on track. While I was in Fiji I met a girl who b...”

William shot Skandar a death glare before the sentence even finished, “You were only gone a week, Skandar.”

“And in that one week I felt more wanted than in the last year with you.” Skandar replied pointedly.

Eddy sat in William’s lap, pouting miserably. He could tell his parents were growing tense and he hated it. His Daddy was acting strange. His Poppa was upset. This wasn’t fun.

“You fucked someone.” William said, his eyes pooling with tears, “Didn’t you?”

The moment William said that, Anna walked in the door and knew immediately she’d interrupted something. William stood up and walked to Anna, handing Eddy to her before he pointed to the door. Anna nodded quickly and took Eddy, knowing full well that William wanted some privacy. The moment Anna left William turned to Skandar and marched toward him. Before Skandar even knew what happened William stiffed him with a hard punch to the jaw, knocking Skandar flat on his ass and nearly unconscious.

“Oh that’s real mature, Will.” Skandar groaned, holding his jaw and staring up at William.

“I’ve been looking after these boys the whole time you’ve been gone and the whole time you were fucking around on me!?” William fumed, angry tears in his eyes, “Do you think it’s been easy being here waiting for you while you were having a fucking great old time?”

Skandar chuckled darkly, “Welcome to my world, Asshole, but just take a week and multiply it by a lot more. How’s it feel?”

“Get out.” William said, crying angrily, “Get your shit and get out. Out!”

- To Be Continued -

Skandar begins to regret his blatant attempt to hurt William and even the score, but is it too late?

A/N: I'm aiming for no more than 15 chapters for Breathe. So it is in line with CoS in terms of length. It may possibly be shorter.

</div>

Breathe 9 - Just Breathe - Part 1

suborbital — Fri, 04 Jul 2008 04:46:39 GMT

Title: Breathe
Pairing: Will/Skandar.
Rating: R
Summary: Skandar takes time out for himself to assess his own future.
Disclaimer: Not mine, not real! It's FICTION.
A/N: Breathe is the sequel series to 'Chronicles of Skandar'. Set 7 years into their marriage, this shows just how much time can change us, and how sometimes, no matter how bad things get, all we need to do is step back and just breathe.

Archive - Breathe.

Breathe

A Chronicle of Skandar and William
Chapter 9 – Just Breathe

HELPLESS

“He can take them away whenever he wants, and he knows it.” Skandar said as he lay with his head in Sarah’s lap.

As soon as William had left, Skandar rushed from the house and straight over to see the girl he considered the next best thing to William. The woman who had given birth to his two boys.

“Yeah.” Sarah frowned, stroking her fingers through Skandar’s hair, “He can. Wasn’t very nice of him to make such a blatant gesture, but I can’t say I’m surprised. He does what he does. I don’t really feel like I know him anymore.”

“If I don’t work things out with him, he can take my boys from me.” Skandar gasped, his eyes bloodshot from crying so much already since arriving at Sarah and Anna’s home.

“Asshat.” Sarah groaned, rubbing her temple in frustration, “That’s what he is. He’s an asshat.”

“Yes, but he’s still my asshat until we’re divorced. Granted, I wish that were right now, but it isn’t. And if I have to somehow suck his cock and take it up the ass to keep my kids, I will.”

“Don’t be stupid. Look, William might have turned into a real asshole lately, but he’s still William deep down. Now that that fucker Jimmy is fired, William might have a chance of burying his ego and becoming the man you married again. It’s going to take time and it won’t be easy.” Sarah conceded, “But if you really still love him and if he is the one you want to be with, isn’t it worth one more crack?”

“God, I hate you.” Skandar droned, sitting up, “Why can’t you just hate his ass like I expect you to do?”

“I love you. I’ll always support you, and supporting you means being honest. You still love him, but you’ve been hurt for so long that you don’t know if you can trust him again.” Sarah kissed Skandar’s cheek and hugged him, “You know what you really need?”

“What?” Skandar sighed, game for anything right now.

“You need to breathe. If William wants to pull this with the kids, then use the time to think about what you really want. Get away for a while, Skan.” Sarah urged, “Take some time to breathe and figure out what you really want. William’s due for some solo Poppa duties anyway.”

“All we do is fight now anyway.” Skandar frowned, “Maybe you’re right. Maybe I’m the one who needs to get away and just breathe for a while, on my own.”

“Despite your issues, William does love those boys. Give them a chance to love their Poppa again. He can do this. You can do this.”

“You’re so awesome.” Skandar smiled, giving her a big wet kiss, “If you weren’t such an uber dyke, I’d give you a Skandar special!”

“Oh fuck off!” Sarah laughed, “Look at my girl, Bitch, you’d turn dyke for her!”

“She is pretty damn hot. And those tits? Hot damn.” Skandar smirked, “Jerked off to those a few times in my younger days.”

“Dirty bugger.”

“You know it, Babe.” Skandar hugged her and kissed her again, “Thank you!”

“For what?” Sarah asked, laughing as Skandar practically molested her.

“For giving me some good advice. I’ll do it. I think it’s just what I need to do.”

TIME TO BREATHE

William entered the house with his two boys, smiling and happy. He carried Eddy in one arm and Petey in the other. He’d had so much fun with his little tyrant on set. He’d forgotten how much of a handful his youngest was, but he was grateful to have the opportunity to remember.

“Skandar?” William called out, “Teacup? We’re home!”

William let Petey down just as they reached the formal lounge of the main floor. He smiled at the sight of Skandar before he furrowed his brow in confusion. Skandar was standing in the middle of the lounge, surrounded by suitcases. William stepped forward quickly, about to speak when Skandar silenced him by taking Eddy and giving him a large hug and kiss. He did the same to Petey before he motioned to Anna behind him who took the boys so Skandar and William could talk.

“Teacup?” William said in confusion, “What’s going on?”

“I didn’t appreciate your ... statement this morning, Will.” Skandar said honestly, but calmly, “You want the boys? You have them. I’m going to move out for a while. You can play Poppa to those boys. You can do your share of taking care of them. I don’t enjoy feeling powerless. I need ... I need time to breathe, Will. I need time to breathe.”

“Skan ...” William said, grabbing his hair in disbelief and frustration, “I’m sorry. I was never going to take them away, I told you that this morning.”

“But you were making a statement.”

“Alright, alright, I was.” William cursed, grabbing Skandar’s arms, “And I’m sorry. I was just frustrated, ok? You don’t need to leave. The boys love you! What are you even thinking?! If someone has to leave, if that’s all you can think is the way out, then I’ll leave, ok?”

“No, no.” Skandar urged, “This isn’t about that. I just ... I think I need the time to myself. You need the time with the boys and I think I just need to get away and breathe a little on my own for a while. And you need time to breathe with your boys. Find the Poppa in you again.”

“You’re coming back?” William gasped, not liking this in the least, “Come back and tell me I’m an asshole. Come back and beat me up. Just come back. Ok? You need this time? You really need this time?”

“I need it.” Skandar sighed, smiling for the first time before William in what felt like a lifetime, “I think we need it, Will.”

“Well ... in that case, let me carry your bags.” William said quickly, “If this is what you need to help forgive me for being an asshat, Teacup, so be it!”

“Besides, it’s not good for us to keep fighting the way we do.” Skandar stepped forward and let his head rest on William’s shoulder.

William immediately wrapped his arms around Skandar. He was like a Venus Fly Trap, crushing Skandar in his arms. The fact Skandar was even allowing this moment made William as happy as he’d been in a long time.

“Will.” Skandar said, his voice muffled against William’s shoulder, “Can’t breathe.”

“Oh ... right.” William nodded, letting his grip loosen just slightly, “Better?”

“A little.” Skandar chuckled, “Give you an inch and you take a mile huh?”

“Give me a chance and I’ll give you a lifetime.” William whispered against Skandar’s hair, “Thank you.”

“You’re still an asshat, and I still need this time. But I hope when I come back, we can ... talk without hating or ... arguing all the time.” Skandar said with a hopeful smile.

“Oh, Skan.” William sighed in relief, “Thank you. Thank you so much. Thank you.”

“Don’t thank me, Will.” Skandar said, “This isn’t a promise of things to come. This is me taking time out for myself. On my own. For myself. No strings. No rings.”

William fidgeted restlessly with his sleeves as he digested Skandar’s words. He didn’t like the sound of this at all. He knew the old adage, that if you loved someone enough, you let them go, and if they came back to you they were yours. If they didn’t ...

SPREADING THE TENSION

“What did you do?” Anna asked Sarah with a frown.

Sarah was sitting in their lounge, tapping away on her laptop. She’d been writing a screenplay Skandar’s production company would develop for her. She and Skandar had a long history of working together and she knew that she owed a great deal of her success to her best friend.

She had her legs bare legs crossed Indian style and wore a loose, long t-shirt. The garb was rather simple, but she still managed to look every bit the movie star she’d become. She looked up at Anna in surprise, as she hadn’t even realized she was home.

Their relationship had been going on for as long as William and Skandar had been married, but they weren’t as open about it. Anna came from a traditional background and to this day she still had issues about the fact she was in a relationship with another woman. A woman she clearly loved, but there was obviously some inner conflict.

Sarah was understanding enough not to pressure Anna, despite the fact they’d been together so long. Sarah had wanted for them to make their relationship more official for several years but Anna had always resisted. Were it not for the fact that Sarah was rather madly in love with this woman, she would have left for one of the many men or women who desired her.

“Well?” Anna said, hands on hips.

She smiled at first until she saw that Anna had her pouty face on, “Uh oh, what have I done now?”

Anna sighed and rolled her eyes a little as she sat down beside her girlfriend, her face serious. She schooled her features well but she had an air of annoyance. She found Sarah’s passion and loyalty to be both endearing and frustrating. Sarah was fiercely loyal to Skandar, and often sided with him, whereas Anna tried to be more impartial.

“Skandar’s gone? William is absolutely going mental, mental, chicken oriental.” Anna sighed, staring at her hands seriously as if she was trying to articulate her next words, “Sarah, I know you love Skandar, but you have to stop taking sides.”

“Taking sides?” Sarah asked, slightly offended, “Because what I’ve done is taking sides? Do you even know what it is I’ve done? Or are you just sitting there accusing me of doing something you’ve decided I’ve already done?”

“Sarah, I don’t want to fight.” Anna said, turning to Sarah, “But I love both of them.”

“All I did was tell Skandar to take some time out to breathe before he makes any rash choices. He needs the time out, Anna.” Sarah said, shuffling closer to Anna to wrap her arms around her from the side, “And I really wish you’d stop thinking the worst of me all the time.”

“That’s all you did?” Anna asked, turning to Sarah and leaning their heads together.

“I promise. I told him to take some time out and not to throw his marriage away yet. You know how I feel about William, but I still know he’s the one Skandar will always love the most.” Sarah pressed her lips against Anna’s and held the kiss for a long while, “Just like you’re the one I love the most.”

“I love you too.” Anna said sincerely, sighing and falling back on the sofa so Sarah was on top of her, “I really do.”

The couple kissed, softly at first before Sarah’s kiss became more insistent. Anna let out a gasp and her fingers slid up the back of Sarah’s thighs, under her long shirt and squeezed her ass. Sarah couldn’t help smiling into their kiss, always feeling a little flash of exhilaration when Anna touched her.

Despite this moment of sensuality, Anna still had issues about her sexuality. She loved Sarah. She truly did. She ached for her when they were apart, but physically she still craved the affections of a man. Though she didn’t talk about it with Sarah, she could tell Sarah knew.

“You’ve got that look again.” Sarah frowned softly, stroking her fingers through Anna’s hair.

“What look?” Anna asked innocently.

“That look that says you miss dick.”

Anna sighed, “So what if I do? I never said I was a lesbian. I don’t want to talk about this again. And it’s not like I can just turn off my natural attraction to men. Even then I still don’t go out and cheat on you.”

“I’m sorry, I just ...” Sarah sighed, sitting up and away from Anna, “It doesn’t make me feel good knowing I’m not everything you want and yet you’re still with me.”

Anna avoided this topic as much as possible for this very reason. She knew it would upset Sarah. Despite Sarah’s often fierce exterior, she was still a fragile girl at heart. She knew though that this was something they probably needed to discuss.

“Sarah.” Anna said quickly, sitting up and clutching Sarah’s hand, “We wouldn’t have lasted this long if you weren’t the love of my life. I just ... sometimes ... wish for ... the normal life, you know? I miss being in a man’s arms. Being held, being loved. And yes, as you so crudely say, I do sometimes miss dick. I can’t change that part of me. It’s like asking someone who is gay to be ... straight. I’m not gay, I’m not straight, I’m just me and I’m sorry I’m not the perfect partner for you. I know you’ve put up with a lot from me.”

“Because I love you.” Sarah said softly, “I loved dick before I met you. And then just ... something changed and I couldn’t get you out of my head. I love you, Anna. I’m in love with you. I have been for all this time. But if you need ... something else, I wouldn’t stop you.”

“I need you.” Anna said firmly, “Despite all my hang-ups, all I ever want is to come home to you.”

Sarah couldn’t help feeling a rush of contentment at those words. It was all she wanted to hear. It was all she wanted to feel. To feel as if she truly was the one Anna loved. The one Anna wanted to be with. She smiled gratefully, stealing a lingering kiss from the girl of her dreams.

“You know ... we’re not exactly conventional and ... when Petey and Eddy were conceived we had ... you know ...” Sarah said, biting her bottom lip and looking to Anna, “If you crave a bit of man love ... why not Will or Skandar?”

“It was one thing when Petey and Eddy were conceived, but ... what you’re suggesting is ...”

“A viable solution to keeping you with me?” Sarah said sheepishly, “Maybe they need to outlet like you do. I know it’s not conventional but ... it’s just an option, yeah?”

“I don’t know. I was fine when William and Skandar wanted to conceive the boys naturally with you, but ... me?” Anna frowned, “I don’t know. If I’m with you, I’m with you.”

“But you aren’t. You’re kissing me and closing your eyes and wishing I was a man giving you the rough ride.” Sarah sighed, “Oh, and your mother called.”

“You know, you can’t give me a thought like that and then mention my mother! Both scary and disgusting!” Anna gasped in fright, “Now what are you talking about?”

“You know ... like with a phone.”

“But why?” Anna asked before she closed her eyes, “Oh ... bugger. I forgot. She’s coming to stay.”

“Here?” Sarah asked in surprise.

Anna didn’t seem to like introducing Sarah to her family. She’d met them all at various times over the years, but always fleetingly, save for Anna’s siblings who didn’t have a problem with Anna and Sarah’s relationship. Sarah wondered who had more of a problem, Anna’s parents, or Anna herself.

“Yes, here.” Anna said clinically, “She .., insisted. I don’t know how comfortable I am with this.”

“This?”

“My mother coming here to stay with us. I don’t know how comfortable I am with that.” Anna took a deep breath, “You know it’s easy to support Will and Skandar but when it comes to myself I’m all a bundle of nerves.”

“And we’ve been together for years, Anna. Don’t you think we should be past this by now?”

“I’m sorry, okay?” Anna said, “You weren’t raised the way I was. This isn’t the life I expected to lead. I thought I’d act, go to university, have a career, get married, have children. Instead ...”

“You’re shacking it up with a chick having the best sex of your life and loving it?” Sarah asked hopefully.

Anna smiled in relief, moving into Sarah’s lap and curling up, “This is why I love you.”

“I’m sorry it’s ... still difficult for you.” Sarah said, stroking Anna’s hair and kissing her softly, “It wasn’t what I imagined for myself either. But it is what we have, and it’s what I want. I love you, Anna.”

“Keep telling me that.” Anna whispered, closing her eyes and snuggling up, “Just keep telling me that.”

Read Part 2

A/N: Because LJ sucks ass, I have to break this chapter in two, just like the last one. Sorry. Please read on to Part 2.

</div>

Breathe 8 - The Circle is Unending - Part 2

suborbital — Wed, 04 Jun 2008 22:48:02 GMT

TRYING

“Ooh sreep meh?” Eddy asked William curiously, brows furrowed in confusion.

“Yes, yes, I am, actually.” William chuckled, giving Eddy a raspberry on his tummy and tickling him mercilessly, “Problem?”

“Noh, noh, noh!” Eddy laughed, “Meh otay!”

“Haha.” William smirked, sitting Eddy back up on his lap and rubbing his back, “Let’s get you ready for bed, okay?”

“Umm.” Eddy said, tapping his lips, “Noh! Haha!”

“Crazy little bugger.” William grinned, throwing Eddy over his shoulder, “Daddy! We have a little terror refusing to get ready for bed.”

“Oh well, we better trade him in for a new model, hadn’t we?” Skandar smiled, leaning his head over the railing of the floor above William, “Whenever you want the master to take over, Will, just say so.”

“I have it handled, Teacup.” William replied quickly, giving Skandar a near dirty look, “Don’t worry. Just ... carry on. Why can’t you be like Petey, Eddy? He’s a good boy and goes to sleep.”

“Dup. Petey doot boy.” Eddy nodded his head at his Poppa, “Meh noh doot boy! Haha!”

William gave Eddy a light thwap on the bottom. He chuckled as Eddy gasped and rubbed his bum before he returned the favour and slapped William’s cheeks with both hands. William gasped and stared at Eddy wide eyed before he laughed out loud and gave him a big wet kiss.

“You’re an evil little tyrant! Come on then, you’re sleeping with Poppa.”

“Noh, Daddeh!” Eddy protested, shaking his head, “Meh sreep meh Daddeh!”

“Nope.” William said firmly as he made his way upstairs, “You’re sleeping with me tonight. Daddy needs a rest from you and Petey crowding up his bed. Don’t you know he’s getting old now?”

“Hey!” Skandar called out from his office, “I’m young and hot and virile, thank you!”

William walked into Skandar’s office and moved over to the large wall window that gave a stunning view of the beach. Their success over the years had afforded many luxuries, and their stunning house and location was just one of them. It had seen a lot of work over the years and even now Skandar had plans to renovate it. William sometimes missed the simpler aspects of the house, but Skandar still seemed to give the house a very casual and comfortable feel even when it had been expanded to include an office, recording studio, and several post production facilities so he could do a lot of his work from home. His goal had always been to provide the boys with a safe, warm and loving home environment while being able to work from home himself a lot to help that.

“Such a beautiful night, Teacup.” William smiled, rather enjoying the view.

“When are you going back to work, Will?” Skandar asked, looking up from his desk, “Can’t rearrange production forever.”

“I know.” William sighed, frowning a little, “Not now, please, Skan. Just ... not now. I don’t want to deal with that yet. We just came to say goodnight.”

Skandar stood to his feet and walked over with a smile, taking Eddy from William’s arms, “Is my little tyrant sleeping with his Poppa tonight?”

“Noh.” Eddy grinned, “Meh sreep meh Daddeh.”

“Nope.” Skandar said, shaking his head, “Poppa is going to put you to bed with him so Daddy can do lots of work, ok?”

“Oooh.” Eddy said, mulling this over before he nodded, “Otay.”

“Goodnight, Daddy’s little tyrant.” Skandar smiled, giving Eddy a big wet kiss, “I love you.”

“Nahnight!” Eddy said, waving his hand as William collected him.

“Good... goodnight, Teacup.” William said as he rubbed Eddy’s back and moved hesitantly to give Skandar a kiss goodnight.

“Night, Will.” Skandar let William kiss him goodnight but turned his head to make sure it was cheek only.

William frowned at the snub but kissed Skandar’s cheek anyway. He let out a sigh and turned to leave the office and make his way back downstairs to where his guest room was located. He didn’t like sleeping here but he knew that he lucky to still be allowed to stay in the house. He needed more time alone with Skandar. More time to start fixing their relationship.

Several hours later, William woke up with a dry throat and decided to get himself a drink. Eddy was sprawled out over William’s chest, sleeping soundly. William smiled broadly, finding this simple little moment to be incredibly satisfying. His son loved and needed him, and somehow that made him feel like a better person.

“Let’s put you in your bed, Baby.” William said as he stood up with his son in his arms.

It wasn’t that he didn’t want to sleep with Eddy, but he had ulterior motives. He wanted to put Eddy to bed in his room, which would give him an excuse to walk past the master bedroom. He crept upstairs slowly, pleased to see Skandar wasn’t working late and had obviously gone to bed. He walked down the hallway past Petey’s room, poking his head in to smile at his sleeping son. He moved next to Eddy’s room and very quietly placed him in his bed before he turned the intercom on so Skandar could hear him if he cried in the night. Finally, William made his way to the master bedroom, where the door was already open. Before William had crept a few steps inside, Skandar revealed he was awake with a few terse words.

“What is it, Will?”

“Oh ...” William said quickly, “Umm ... well ... I put Eddy to bed and ... I was hoping ... I could sleep in here. With you, Teacup.”

“Eddy’s alright?” Skandar asked, propping himself up on his elbows to look at William.

William caught a breath there as he was rather taken aback by how beautiful Skandar was when only the moonlight illuminated his pale skin. While William’s skin was far more prone to golden exuberance, Skandar’s skin tended to drift from incredibly pale, to red from being sunburnt. Skandar and tan didn’t go together and William liked it that way. He loved the way freckles still dusted over his face. Loved the angular shape of his husband’s face. If possible, Skandar had become even more of a ‘hottie’ over the years. William had taken him for granted and forgotten how beautiful he was. His lean, muscular frame, deceptively strong while still seeming slight.

“God, you’re gorgeous.” William whispered, not realizing he’d said it.

“Oi!” Skandar said grumpily, pulling the sheet over his near naked frame, “Pervert!”

William frowned at this gesture. Why was he a pervert? Weren’t they married? Why wasn’t he allowed to look? He turned away and made to leave before he closed the door instead. The room was rather soundproof, as Skandar and William were quite loud when they had sex in the past and didn’t want to wake up the boys. Skandar pulled the sheet up to his eyes, frowning beneath it.

“You better not plan on getting violent.” Skandar said, narrowing his eyes sternly, “I’ll kick your ass.”

“And since when could you ever kick my ass, Skandar?” William said in slight disgust, “God, could you cut me some freaking slack, please? First I’m a pervert and then I’m planning on getting violent?”

“Well, why’d you close the door for?” Skandar said, still keeping only the top of his head visible from behind the sheet.

“So I can talk to you? So you can yell at me without waking up the boys?” William sighed as he stepped forward.

William grabbed the sheet and pulled it off in annoyance. Skandar gasped and covered his groin with a pillow. He was wearing boxers so the gesture seemed rather pointless. William’s heated temper was quickly overwhelming him. Despite the fact he knew Skandar had a right to be angry at him, he couldn’t help feeling rather angry at Skandar’s little jabs at his character. Especially when he felt these ones were rather undeserved.

“What the fuck is your problem?” William cursed, bitter tears forming in his eyes, “I’m your husband! I’m still your fucking husband!”

“Get out!” Skandar snapped at him, “Get out of my room!”

“This is my fucking room!” William roared at him, “Mine! I have a right to be here too!”

“I don’t want you here.” Skandar said, his voice much softer, “Will, please. I don’t want to fight.”

“And I don’t want to go.” William said, sighing and lowering his own voice, “I want to be here. I want to be with you.”

“I don’t want you here.” Skandar repeated, sadness in his voice, “I don’t want you touching me. Please, Will. I don’t want to fight.”

“How can you hate me so much?” William asked, “You said we could give it a second chance.”

Skandar just sighed and lay back, turning on his side with his back to William, “Fine, but don’t touch me. Tomorrow night if you’re sleeping here, I’m sleeping elsewhere.”

The next sound Skandar heard was the door slamming and then William was gone. He turned over and looked at the closed door, sighing sadly to himself. He wasn’t sure if he was disappointed that William hadn’t stayed. He knew he’d pissed William off, and that had probably been his intention. He just wanted to keep William. He just wasn’t ready to let him back in at the risk of being hurt again. As much as he could see William was trying, the past was still ever present in Skandar’s mind. He wasn’t ready to let William back into his heart, which had hardened a great deal from William’s neglect. Time would tell whether the pain both felt would be healed enough to make this attempt at reconciliation lasting.

HE HAS THE POWER

Skandar sat at the table eating his breakfast and wondered where William and Eddy were. They hadn’t come for breakfast yet. Petey ate silently, as usual. Skandar smiled at his son and reached over to stroke his cheek.

“Are you doing anything exciting in school today, Sweetheart?” Skandar asked softly.

“I’m almost finished building my castle.” Petey nodded.

“Really?!” Skandar gasped, smiling broadly, “Do you think Daddy could come and see it when you’re done?”

“A huh.” Petey nodded, “I’d like that, Daddy.”

“So would I, Son.”

“I’m finished now. May I leave the table please?” Petey asked, to which Skandar nodded with a smile.

As Petey left the table, Skandar couldn’t help but feel proud of the way he turned out. He was sweet, courteous, respectful. He was everything a father could want in a son.

William entered the dining room with Eddy, both dressed and changed to go out. Eddy reached out his hands to give Skandar a kiss and a hug, which caused a rather large amount of concern. Skandar wasn’t used to anyone but Anna or Sarah taking the kids out. With their relationship at such an awkward stage, Skandar was afraid William might be doing something rash.

“Will?” Skandar asked with wide eyes, his hands not quite letting go of Eddy.

“I’m taking him to work with me. Is that alright with you?” William asked tersely, “If it isn’t, fill out a complaint and file it with someone who cares.”

Skandar was taken aback by William’s outburst. His face tensed with anger but he let William go with a nod. They could settle this later.

“What time will you be back?” Skandar asked softly, not wanting to argue.

“After work.” William replied, “Petey! Let’s go!”

“Will ...” Skandar sighed, not really feeling comfortable with being out of the loop when it came to his sons.

“Skan.” William said, cutting Skandar off, “I have a light shooting schedule today. I want Eddy with me. I don’t need your permission, or have you forgotten that?”

“Fine.” Skandar frowned, fiddling with his breakfast.

He felt rather powerless to do anything. William still held the kids over him. Legally, William could take them away and Skandar couldn’t stop him. He rubbed his arms and stared despondently at the plate before him. His eyes began to water as he realized the truth of this. William could walk out with both the boys and Skandar couldn’t stop him. Though William had told him he could have the boys back, nothing had been done to remedy the legal formalities that granted William full custody.

“Bye, Daddy.” Petey said as he walked in with his schoolbag.

Skandar shook his head from his reverie and gave Petey a bright smile. Petey frowned, sensing Skandar was a little upset. Skandar quickly put Petey’s lunchbox into his bag so he wouldn’t have to look his son in the eyes. He scrunched his nose up and nuzzled Petey’s before he kissed his cheek and gave him a tight, overlong hug. He didn’t want to let Petey go, fearing that perhaps William wouldn’t bring him back. He’d taken them before. What would stop him doing it again? After all, William was the one with legal custody.

“Daddy loves you so much.” Skandar smiled, doing his best not to get emotional, “You know that, don’t you?”

Petey nodded and returned Skandar’s words sincerely, as he always did. Skandar watched as William left with his sons. He couldn’t bring himself to look William in the eyes as he left. The moment they were gone, Skandar broke down and buried his head in his arms, crying despairingly. He could hardly breathe. If William was trying to demonstrate how powerless Skandar was, it had worked marvellously.

A hand on Skandar’s back surprised him into sitting up and he found himself face to face with a sympathetic looking William. Skandar frowned miserably, unable to stop the tears streaming down his cheeks. William sighed, cupping Skandar’s face and kissing his tears away.

“I’m not taking them away from you. I promise.” William reassured, “I promise.

“But you can.” Skandar cried softly, “You can. And I can’t stop you.”

“Do you really not want me here that much, Teacup?”

“I can’t live without them, Will.” Skandar sobbed, “I can’t.”

“And I can’t live without you.” William said softly, “Please try and trust me. I want my boys to know me again, but it doesn’t mean I’m trying to take them from you. You used to trust me. Please, try to again.”

- To be Continued -

</div>

Breathe 8 - The Circle is Unending

suborbital — Wed, 04 Jun 2008 22:42:10 GMT

Pairing: Will/Skandar.
Rating: R
Summary: William tries to make things right.
Disclaimer: I do not own any of these characters, and they have no bearing on anyone at all. It's FICTION.
Warnings: All of them.
A/N: Breathe is the sequel series to 'Chronicles of Skandar'. Set 7 years into their marriage, this shows just how much time can change us, and how sometimes, no matter how bad things get, all we need to do is step back and just breathe.

Read past chapters of Breathe.

Breathe 8 - The Circle is Unending

REALITY IS A HARSH MASTER

William laid on the bed in the guest room of his family home, hands over his eyes, sobbing quite profusely. The enormity of his mistakes, his weakness as a father and husband, were beginning to truly make themselves known. How could he have been so selfish for so long? He still had the image in his mind of Skandar begging him to give him back his boys. He still had the image of Skandar offering everything he had in life just to have his boys back. It was in that moment that William realized, Skandar didn’t care about anything above his family. William on the other hand, had cared far too long for everything above his family.

Despite reaching a peace, William still slept in the guest room. He couldn’t bring himself to try and sleep with Skandar, knowing what he’d put him through. William realized finally that he had destroyed his family. He had destroyed his love with Skandar. He had destroyed his children’s faith and love for him. All he had was his selfish desires for fame and fortune.

“What have I done?” William cried, rubbing his arms and curling into a foetal position.

He stood up, walking through their large house to find himself upstairs and outside the master bedroom where for so long he and Skandar had consummated their love, their marriage. William stood at the doorway, cloaked in darkness. He watched Skandar sleeping, Petey on one side, Eddy on the other. They’d become a family without him. He’d abandoned them.

William covered his mouth as tears streamed down his face. Skandar. His beautiful teacup, so tired, and yet so happy to have his boys home. How could he have let this happen?

He slid down the doorframe, holding his head in his hands as he cried as silently as he could. Reality was such a harsh master. William simply could not believe how far things had truly fallen. The guilt was unbearable. All he could do was cry silently, while glancing up occasionally at the lonely figure of Skandar holding his two boys in his sleep. It was as if Skandar had been forced to let go of everything else he loved in life so he could focus on his boys. The thought of it only increased the silent tears falling down William’s cheeks. He felt beyond redemption, beyond hope, beyond forgiveness.

“I’ve failed you.” William cried, clenching his eyes shut as he rubbed the ring on his finger, “I’ve failed you.”

AT A LOSS

“Eat your pancakes, Sweetheart.” Skandar said softly, running his fingers through Petey’s hair.

“Meh wan’ bweakfash!” Eddy demanded, clenching his chubby little hands and banging the table.

“Then come here and I’ll feed you. Daddy’s gotta eat his own breakfast.” William said, pulling Eddy into his lap so he could feed him.

“Noh!” Eddy said, shaking his head, “Daddeh fee’ meh!”

Eddy refused to open his mouth. He clamped his lips shut as William tried to feed him some of his pancakes. He was tired. He’d barely slept. Skandar was doing his best to accommodate him. As usual he cooked and tended to the boys. Today more than any other William felt like he really wasn’t a productive member of the household. He realized now just how much Skandar did. Despite being more than wealthy enough to afford some hired help, Skandar was extremely private and tried to limit the presence of strangers inside his family home. This meant Skandar did the tasks most single parents had to do. Skandar wasn’t supposed to be a single parent. William was supposed to help him.

“Eat your breakfast!” William snapped in frustration, causing Eddy to pout and his eyes pooled with tears.

“Meh noh hundeh.” Eddy said as he began to shed silent tears, his head hanging in shame.

Skandar could only grit his teeth in response. He was fuming inside, but he knew arguing with William in front of the boys would only make the matter worse. Inwardly he wanted to snatch Eddy from William and kick William out the door. Outwardly he merely glared at William, who was already regretting his little outburst.

“Poppa’s sorry, Baby.” William frowned, hugging Eddy and rubbing his stomach, “Can Poppa please feed Eddy?”

“Dup.” Eddy nodded softly, opening his mouth for William to feed him.

“Thank you.” William said, relieved, kissing Eddy’s temple, “Thank you.”

Eddy gave William a bright, teary eyed smile before he leaned forward and took a bite of pancake from his Poppa’s fingers. He bit down on William’s finger, causing William to wince and chuckle. Eddy giggled and looked up at his Poppa, quite pleased with himself.

“Why you little ratbag!” William grinned, “You’re just like your Daddy!”

“Daddy, may I be excused from the table now, please?” Petey asked Edmund softly, having finished his breakfast.

“Of course, Petey.” Skandar smiled, ruffling Petey’s hair, “Poppa will be in to help you get ready for school soon, okay?”

“I can do it, Daddy.” Petey said, excusing himself from the table and disappearing down the hallway.

William watched him go, frowning a little as he turned back to Skandar, “He’s so ... grown up.”

“He’s a little you, William. He tries to help me and ... I love how courteous he is, but he shouldn’t have to do what he does.” Skandar sighed, taking a lacklustre bite of his pancake, “He’s a good boy, Will. He’s a great son.”

“Because of you.”

“No.” Skandar corrected, “Because of us. You didn’t turn into a complete ass until he was three.”

Skandar smirked and William returned the gesture. He was about to speak when he received a slap on the face when a pancake smeared against his nose. The sound of a mischievous laugh soon revealed the culprit. William let the pancake slide off and turned to a heartily laughing Eddy.

“Ooh noh fee’ meh!” Eddy laughed, clapping his hands, “Meh fee’ ooh! Haha!”

Skandar smirked and whistled innocently. Eddy certainly was a different character to his brother. Skandar quite enjoyed the contrast. Eddy certainly took after himself.

“I suppose I deserved that then.” William chuckled as Skandar leaned over and plucked Eddy from his arms, “Hey, I’m feeding him!”

“No, I’ll feed him.” Skandar said, settling Eddy on his lap, “I think it might be nice if you helped Petey get ready for school?”

“Oh.” William nodded in understanding, “Good idea.”

William stood up, smiling. He couldn’t help but feel a growing sense of belonging inside him as Skandar let him move slowly back into the daily running of the household. He knew he had a long way to go, but he was prepared to go all that way for his family. They deserved his full attention.

“Skan?” William said, turning back to Skandar.

“Yeah?” Skandar asked, smiling at Eddy before he looked up at William.

“Thank you. For this.”

“I don’t even know what this is, Will.” Skandar replied honestly, shrugging.

William nodded in reply, for he had no idea what this was either. He didn’t know what this meant for his family, or for him and Skandar. He didn’t think he belonged here yet. He didn’t think he deserved to be here yet, but he knew without a shadow of a doubt that this was right where he wanted, needed to be.

FATHER TO SON

William stood at the doorway to Petey’s room watching his son put on his uniform. He watched with somewhat sad pride when Petey managed to do up his shirt and put his school collar on. Petey seemed far too old for his tender years. William knew it was because of his own selfish acts. His own negligence. Petey was trying to be a little man for his Daddy.

William sighed and walked into the room, kneeling down beside Petey to help adjust his collar. Petey said nothing and kept looking forward. William smiled softly, stroking Petey’s cheek.

“Petey? Have I ever told you how proud I am of you?” William said with a gentle tone, rubbing his son’s back, “How proud I am that you’re my son?”

Petey turned to William, his blue eyes searching for some kind of understanding, “No, Poppa, you haven’t. I’m a good boy for Daddy.”

“You’re a good boy because you’re a good boy.” William smiled proudly, his eyes a little wet, “Poppa has not been a very good Poppa for a very long time. I’d like to be a good Poppa for you again. Will you please help me, Son?”

Petey pondered for a while before his lips curled softly in a small smile, “Will you make Daddy smile too?”

William smiled deeply at Petey’s rather touching concern for his Daddy, “I’m going to do everything I can. Everything I possibly can to make Daddy smile again, Petey. I promise you.”

“You say promise but you don’t always keep your promises.” Petey frowned, “How do I know you’ll keep this one?”

Ouch. William died a little at that comment. As deserved as it might have been, he wasn’t quite ready to hear it come from his five year old son’s lips.

“I don’t know, Petey.” William said honestly, “I can only try and hope that over time you trust me enough to believe me when I make you a promise. I used to be a good Poppa. I want to be a good Poppa again.”

“I want you to be too.” Petey said softly, holding open his arms in a rare gesture of wanting a hug from William.

William smiled so broadly he thought he would float. He pulled Petey into his arms and gasped, burying his face against his son’s neck. He wanted to cry, but knew that would mess up Petey’s uniform.

One thing William had learned from being a father was how truly forgiving children were. They were still so young where they could forgive him for his mistakes and give him a chance to be worthy of them once more. Petey was such a special boy. He’d come at such a difficult time for William. A time when he thought he would not live to see his son grow. If he knew back when he fought his cancer what he would become, William would probably have rather died.

“Come home, Poppa.” Petey whispered as William hugged him, “Come home.”

William chuckled tearfully, pulling away from Petey’s neck to look at him with a bright smile. He nodded his head, sniffling a little. Such a beautiful little soul.

“Poppa’s coming home. You just wait and see.” William promised, tapping the tip of Petey’s nose, “Poppa’s coming home.”

A CIRCLE IS UNENDING

Petey had gone to school, while Eddy was entertaining himself in the nursery with Sarah. The brief encounter William had with Sarah was just that; brief. It was also very cool and not at all friendly. While his children were forgiving of his mistakes, Sarah, Anna, and Skandar were not. William knew it would take time before they fully trusted him again.

Besides his children, the one person William was most concerned about winning back was his beloved Skandar. His husband. Just barely at that. His Teacup.

William walked out onto the upper deck of the house to find Skandar sitting alone on the beach. The sight was such a lonely one, and William couldn’t help but wonder just how many times Skandar had sat out on that beach alone. William stood on the deck, staring out at the lonely figure of his husband sitting on those desolate sands.

Anna approached William, her hand smoothing up his bare broad back. She gave his shoulder a squeeze and smiled softly as she stood beside him. He turned to her and smiled back, closing his eyes and giving her a warm kiss on the temple.

“You’ve always been there for me, Anna.”

Anna said nothing in response, she merely continued to smile softly in understanding. She leaned her head on William’s shoulder, offering a small modicum of support to the man that was her family by love, but not blood.

“Thank you.” William said softly, “Thank you.”

Anna raised her head and looked at William, “Go on. He’s waiting for you.”

“How do you know?”

“He’s still breathing, isn’t he?”

William jerked a little at those words. He wasn’t sure how profound Anna meant them to be, but they were definitely profound to him. He looked out over the beach to the sight of Skandar from behind. Skandar’s dark locks were blowing in the wind but his figure remained so very still.

William kissed Anna’s temple again in gratitude before he turned and rushed down the steps toward the pathway that led down to the beach. He walked slowly, trying to figure out what he would say, what he could say. When he finally reached Skandar, he sat down without a word. Skandar glanced at him to acknowledge his arrival but said nothing.

For a long while neither man said a word. Skandar seemed to be waiting for William to speak. William seemed to be waiting to find the right words to speak. It wasn’t until he looked down at his fingers, and then at Skandar’s, that he realized what words he needed to speak. This was one of the few times in William’s married life that he could remember Skandar not wearing his wedding ring. That was a rather powerful statement to William.

William looked at his own fingers and studied the ring that he wore so fiercely today. He was fighting for his marriage. He was fighting for his family.

“A ring ...” William began to say as he fiddled with his own wedding ring, studying it, “... is a circle. A circle is unending. The promises we made when we first wore these rings are also supposed to be unending. The promises we made when we made our vows, they were supposed to be unending as well. I’d forgotten my promises to you, Teacup. My promises ended and ceased to be the circle of the rings that bind us. Do you think you could possibly give me a chance to remember those promises? The circle is unending, Skandar. Please. Wear my circle again.”

Skandar looked at William curiously, as if he did not really expect those words. He reached into the sand in between his legs and pulled out his wedding ring. He brushed the sand from it and stared at it for a while before he turned to William. He took William’s hand slowly before he placed the ring into it and closed William’s fingers around it. William’s face distended with pain and he fought back a flurry of bitter tears, his eyes filled with emotion.

“I can’t, William.” Skandar said softly, “I just can’t.”

“But I’m home.” William gasped, tears falling freely down his face, “I’m home, Teacup. It’s me. It’s Will. I’m home.”

“Not your home anymore.” Skandar whispered, “I’ve been thinking about this since you brought the boys back. And I just don’t think I can ever ... I ... I mean, I will always love you, William. I will always love you, but I don’t think I’ll ever trust you. And if I can’t trust you, I can’t be married to you. I don’t want to stop the divorce. I still want the divorce.”

“No.” William gasped, shaking his head as he began to sob loudly, “No, Teacup. No, please. Please. It’s not too late. It’s never too late. I’m here. I’m home. Please. Please.”

“They’ll always be our boys, but I’m not your Skandar anymore.” Skandar said as he stood to his feet, squeezing William’s shoulder, “It’s too late, Will.”

“It’s not too late.” William said, grabbing Skandar’s hand quickly, forcefully, “It’s not too late, Teacup.”

William pulled Skandar down to the sand and into his arms, locking him there. He would fight for his family. He would fight for them. He would not let Skandar go, even if he no longer deserved him. He gripped Skandar in his arms, gasping and fighting to keep in his emotion.

“It’s not too late.” William repeated, his eyes closed and his face pressed against Skandar’s shoulder.

Skandar said nothing. William was rather strong. Skandar was no pushover either, but he didn’t want things to escalate into a physical confrontation. He simply sighed and let William hold him.

“I’m not letting you go.” William whispered, kissing Skandar’s cheek and squeezing him tighter as tears continued to fall, “I’m never letting you go.”

“Oh, Will.” Skandar whispered desolately, “Where have you been all this time? My Will. Where have you been?”

“I don’t know.” William cried, his tears rolling off his cheeks and over Skandar’s, “I don’t know. You can’t go, Skan. You can’t push me out. Please. I’m home. I’ll do anything just to be here with you. I’ll give it all up. I promise you. It’s all gone. All of it. Everything I am is here on this beach with you. It’s all I am. Please, Baby. Please.”

Skandar sighed in frustration. He didn’t want William anymore. He’d considered it after William brought the boys home, but he had soon realized that he’d simply adapted long ago to life without William. He didn’t want to risk loving William again only to have this same disappointment later on.

“I need space, Will. Without you. I want you to be with the boys. I want us to work that out, but I want you away from me. I don’t want you anymore.” Skandar said, quite calm and resolute about his decision, “I don’t think we have a marriage to even give up on. It’s been dead for ages, we just didn’t acknowledge it sooner.”

“I’ll give you space, if you promise to take me back after you’ve had enough of it.” William countered, “I don’t want this, Skandar. I don’t want this divorce. I want you. I want you. I’m so stupid. I’m so stupid. I’ll give everything up just to have you back. Please.”

Skandar sighed and sat up in Will’s lap, resting his chin on his knees, “I don’t even know what to say. I just don’t want you anymore.”

William fell back on the sand, staring up at the sky. He’d done. He’d blown it. All the hope he held from his children has been blown away by Skandar’s rejection. Finally he realized he’d done. He’d destroyed his marriage. Skandar wasn’t going to change his mind. He’d lost his Teacup.

“I need to breathe, and you make me feel like I can’t because I’m too busy choking over what’s going wrong in our marriage.” Skandar said as he stood up, “I needed you to come back to me so I could know for sure if I wanted you back. And I don’t. I’m sorry.”

“Yeah, I get that by now.” William whispered, “I get it.”

“Don’t make me feel guilty for adapting to a shitty marriage. What exactly did you think you could save?” Skandar asked, his voice raising a little, “Did you think you could just come back in here and paste our family back together?”

“At least I’m fucking trying!” William yelled suddenly, jumping to his feet, “I’m fucking trying! I’m here! I fucked up, I know that! I don’t care! I’m here! I’m here!”

“For how long!?” Skandar screamed back at him, “How fucking long!? How fucking long till your fucking ego sends you off overseas to stroke it and that fucking cock between your legs? What the hell makes you think I want a cheating, drugged up drunk like you back anyway!?”

William’s eyes stung with tears and he clutched Skandar’s face, gritting his teeth, “Because you love me. Because only you can save me. The kids distracted us from us. It wasn’t their fault. We got lost along the way. You with the kids, me with my career. I don’t care what I have to do, Skan. I’m fighting for you.”

“I don’t want the hassle!” Skandar cried out, pulling William’s hands from his face, “I don’t trust that this isn’t going to happen again! I need to think about myself, Will. I need to think about giving these boys a stable home. You aren’t stable. You aren’t reliable. You’re off being a superstar. Getting drunk or so fucking high you don’t even know if you cheated or not. I don’t care about your fucking excuses. I know you parked your cock where it didn’t belong. Your ego can’t turn down the stroking, Moseley.”

William felt like he wanted to throw up, “But I didn’t know, I promise. I swear. I can think of times it could have happened, but I swear to you and you can put me under a fucking hypnotherapist, I didn’t do anything while I had the power to choose.”

“You’d go lie detector for that?”

“Where do I sign up?” William demanded, “Put the whole damn list of tests you want me to do. Put them all up, Skandar, and I will do every single one of them. I’m fighting for my family. I’m fighting for you. You deserve a divorce. I know you do. But I am begging you for one more chance. I promise you, if I fail you again like this, I won’t even try and stop you leaving me.”

“You think I live to be your bitch?” Skandar asked with a sad sigh, “You took me for granted. I could have others, Will. I could find someone else to love me the way you haven’t been, but I don’t. I stayed because I love you, because I lived for our family. When I finally realized you didn’t anymore, that’s when I gave up. That’s when I knew there was no choice.”

“But there is now.” William pleaded, “There is now. No more long shoots away. No more going away for six or seven months. From now on, I don’t go anywhere my family doesn’t come with me. I promise. I lost my way, Skan. I lost my way. Please, please don’t give up on me.”

Skandar sighed, shrugging his shoulders rather noncommittally. He looked at William with tired eyes and gave a weak nod. He stood to his feet and leaned down to pick his ring up, but he didn’t put it on his finger.

“Fine.” Skandar said with very little enthusiasm, “Whatever you want, Will.”

Skandar walked up the bank of the beach behind William and headed up toward the house. William slumped in the sand, feeling incredibly miserable for a man who had jut won a second chance at saving his marriage. Skandar did not seem in the slightest bit interested in really being with William and seemed to simply have agreed to get himself some peace.

-- Read Part 2 --

</div>

Super Ninja Ed: The tale of the Chuck-God

suborbital — Tue, 27 May 2008 11:05:31 GMT

Super Ninja Ed vs. Chuck the Norris
ONESHOT
Rating: NC-Crack!fic or ermm PG-BringASenseofHumour or or PG-13!
Summary: When Chuck-God threatens to invade Narnia, Jesus-Lion calls upon Super Ninja Ed to save it!
Warnings: It's a crack!fic. It's cheeky, smartass, and likely to offend anyone without a sense of humour.
Author’s Notes: CRACK!FIC I do not know God or Jesus-Lion. I wish I knew Edmund. Do not take offense to this, unless you really must. Also, please comment me if you love me, but if you don’t, then boo for me!

Super Ninja Ed vs. Chuck the Norris

One day God looked in the mirror and said to himself, “Chuck, you have conquered the world. Canada and Mexico have been officially named the Ass and Hole of America. Paris Hilton has won the Nobel Prize for the Intelligenz. All the world has come to accept the gospel that is Walker, Texas Ranger. It is time for a new challenge.”

Chuck-God turned his head to the side, narrowing his eyes in that dramatic acting pose he used so successfully on such hits as Delta Force, Sidekicks, and the Coup de grace, Top Dog. He raised his eyebrow, his mind mulling over the wonderment of possibilities his future Chuck-God existence held. He tapped his magic mirror and spoke in a firm, powerful voice.

“Magic Seeing Mirror in my dojo, show your Chuck-God a challenge worthy of his mojo.”

The magic mirror began to blur and whirl, as magic seeing mirrors do in tales like this. A blast of light emerged from it! Chuck-God raised his eyebrow higher but did not fret, for Chuck-God the Norris did not fear anything, not even the thought of Rosie O’Donnell and Donald Trump making babies together.

“Chuck-God, Chuck-God, there is a land, filled with talking animals and a Prince Caspian whose acting is quite bland. With your great power and fierce emotion you can conquer their lands and plunder their oceans.” The mirror replied, “Narnia, Narnia be thy name, owned and loved by the mighty mane.”

“Mane!?” Chuck-God said suddenly, eyes narrowing once more to show the true range of his varied emotional responses, “I have no mane. Who is more mighty than the Chuck-God!?”

“In Narnia, only one is mightier than the Chuck-God.” The mirror replied sagely, “The Jesus-Lion.”

“Jesus-Lion!?” Chuck-God gasped, narrowing his eyes again!

“Yes! Jesus-Lion!”

“You mean ... he’s from ... Mexico!?” Chuck-God said in disbelief, “I must enter this Narnia and impose the illegal immigrant removal program!”

“No, he’s not from Me...” The mirror began to say, but it was too late.

Chuck-God had already stroked his beard. In doing so, a large tempest of mighty winds had whisked him away through the mirror to the magical land of Nyehnyehaahh.

“It’s Narnia.” The mirror said to the author.

“Nyehnyehaaah!” The author replied, laughing and ending the scene before the mirror could reply.

^_~

“Jesus-Lion!” Chuck-God said to Aslan as he appeared before him at the top of Pride Rock.

[Magic Mirror – Wrong story, Author!]

[Author - *stare of doom* It’s still Disney, shut up.]

Aslan turned in surprise, roaring mightily as Chuck-God approached him. He ducked into a pouncing gesture, ready to ... to pounce!

“Jesus-Lion! I have come to send you back to Mexico!” Chuck-God said, crossing his arms and ... narrowing his eyes!

Aslan growled, “I am not from Mexico! Do you not know who I am!? I am Jesus-Lion!”

“Yes, that is why I am sending you back to Mexico!” Chuck-God said before he nodded his head.

Chuck-God gasped, as his nod of doom did not send Aslan back across the border of Texas-land. Aslan’s eyes glinted with a ‘Hah, fuck you!’ expression. He bobbed and weaved his head, taunting his new enemy. Aslan shook his mighty mane, before he let out an even mightier roar. Chuck-God was not amused, but he was impressed. He showed this by raising one eyebrow ever so slightly.

“So, your mane truly is mighty, Jesus-Lion.” Chuck-God said, “What part of Mexico are you from?”

“Los Angeles!” Aslan roared, lunging at Chuck-God.

The two mighty beings fought, but not too roughly as Chuck-God is in his sixties and Aslan is so old, condoms weren’t even invented when his mother got spontaneously knocked up and had him in the Los Angeles Zoo.

Aslan bit Chuck-God’s arm, but Chuck-God’s bicep of steel rejected the attack. Chuck-God punched Aslan, but his hand was trapped in the mane of one colour! It was no good, the two were at a standstill. Chuck-God had never fought such a mighty opponent.

“Jesus-Lion, you are fierce, but I am the Norris. I am the Walker, and the Texas Ranger. I am the Delta and the Force. I am the only white man to ever fight Bruce Lee and keep his mojo!” Chuck-God said confidently.

Aslan purred, impressed by such credentials, “Well, Chuck-God, I am the Aslan. My Daddy rules over the sea. That way. He is the Head Lion, Mufasa!”

Aslan pointed to the Eastern Sea in the distance, just past Cair Paravel and before Tijuana. He bobbed his head and looked up at Chuck-God, ready to pounce again as he spoke. Chuck-God was still not impressed. Aslan suddenly felt afraid. Almost as afraid as when he turned down the White Witch on a date and she iced him out for a hundred years in retaliation. He would have to pull out something even more impressive for the Chuck-God.

“I ate the White Witch!” Aslan roared mightily, “Hah!”

“You ate … Rosie?” Chuck-God said, assuming an attack stance, “You are indeed mighty! I shall have to use that which I only ever use in times when the Chuck-God’s mojo is truly in peril!”

“What!?” Aslan gasped, roaring and preparing to pounce, “You cannot defeat me and my disciples!”

“A stunt double!”

Poor Aslan did not see the attack from behind. Thwap on the back of his head from Chuck-God’s stunt double, a virtual clone of the Chuck Norris, most powerful being in all the internetz. The only difference was the stunt double was actually forty years younger and did his own stunts.

“Now that Jesus-Lion is ready to be deported, this land shall be mine.” Chuck-God said, narrowing his eyes and staring intently just left of the camera, “I must find his disciples!”

^_~

“Speak your name, Strangeer. I am Preeeence Caspeeeeen!” Caspian said as he stood in the middle of the forest, flanked by two dwarves, a mouse, and a badger.

Chuck-God stood before the strange party, staring at them with his mighty eyes of doom. When that drew no reaction, he narrowed his eyes. Gasp! Reaction!

“You … you are truly stupid, are you not? Why do you not fear me?” Caspian said, gasping in surprise as he pulled out his sword and held it toward Chuck-God, “I am Preeence Caspeeeen!”

Chuck-God nodded swiftly and immediately Caspian dropped his nuts, and his sword, before he turned and ran like a sissy all the way through the forest. He was running so hard and fast, he hit his head on a sign post giving directions to Aslan’s Crib. The Aslan face on the post shook his head in shame.

“Are you truly the saviour of my Narnia?” The Aslan face spoke to Caspian.

“I am … I am … Preence Caspeeeen! Do you not like my eyes?” Caspian asked, “I am told, they will find me a gentle soul who will woo my heart and annoy something called … purists.”

“Argh.” Aslan-face scowled before he roared, “You were supposed to defeat the Chuck-God, but you have failed. There is only one who can do my bidding. Only one who can save me and free my people from the Chuck-God.”

“Me?” Caspian asked, “I am still the title character in this adventure!”

“You are a sissy boy!” Aslan roared, “There is only one thing you can do! You must summon the Super Ninja.”

“Zuper whatta?” Caspian asked, confused, “Is he … a friend of my uncle’s? Because you know, my uncle and I … veee are not really ze best of ze friends right now.”

“He caught you playing w…”

“Yes, yes.” Caspian sighed, nodding in shame, “Now tell me about ze Zuper Ninja.”

“You must blow the horn and summon the four better characters from the past of the Chuck-God’s world.” Aslan-face said auspiciously, “Only they are worthy enough to save this adventure from your mediocre skills. The four monarchs. The High King, the Valiant Queen, the Gentle Queen, and … the Super Ninja!”

“Might one of zem be … for me?” Caspian asked hopefully, staring up from the ground at the talking face on the signpost, “Might one of … oh my stars! Ze Gentle soul is … is ze Gentle queen! She is for me!?”

“Not in this story, Buddy.” Aslan-face roared, “Now activate the magic GPS locator and time-space continuum gateway key!”

“Ze vat?” Caspian asked, confused.

“Blow the horn the old man gave you!”

By this time, Chuck-God had walked, because Chuck-God never runs, all the way to Caspian and the signpost leading to Aslan’s crib. Caspian gasped in horror, before he readily pulled out the horn. It was such a lovely horn. He rather adored it. He held it to his lips and inhaled a deep breath, before he realized the Aslan-face never told him why he couldn’t have the gentle soul. This hesitation proved to be a dreaded mistake.

Chuck-God kicked the horn from Caspian’s hand before he raised his eyebrow at him. Caspian collapsed unconscious instantly and Chuck-God crossed his arms, laughing. Little did Chuck-God realize that a little mouse, Reepicheep, had scurried out of sight below leaves to reach the horn. He shook his head at the fallen Caspian before he blew the horn with all his might. Unfortunately, Reepicheep was a little creature and his blow was not very strong at all. He could only hope that it was strong enough.

^_~

“Don’t worry, Peter! I have it sorted!” Edmund, Super Ninja and Just bloody gorgeous, said as he walked through the crowd of teenagers watching Peter Pevensie receive a thorough thrashing from three of his peers.

Edmund raised his hand and bitch-slapped the first boy foolish enough to attack his brother. The other two immediately stopped and looked at Edmund. Edmund assumed his Schoolboy Wonder pose and beckoned them to come hither.

“Thou art messing with my brother, thou art messing with me.”

The two foolish boys lunged at Edmund, but they were no match. He leaped aside, holding out one arm to clothesline one boy, before he stepped toward the other and chopped him in the back of the head. They fell to the ground, groaning and gasping. Peter grumbled and stood to his feet before he sat down next to his sisters, Susan and Lucy.

“Do not speak to him, dear Sisters. There is no need for shame.” Edmund said, sitting beside Peter, “He will now say thank you, and all will be well.”

“I had it sorted, Ed.” Peter said, standing to his feet, “They just took me by surprise, that’s all.”

“Mmm.” Edmund said, nodding his head sagely.

“Mmm?” Lucy asked in surprise, “Just mmm? Don’t you have more to say, Ed?”

“Well, I would say more, but it seems the producers of this adventure believe I am more suited to saying less and doing more.” Edmund said to his sister, “They need the extra room for some other chap named Caspian.”

“Nice name.” Susan said, eyes glazing over a little.

Edmund gave her a swift clip upside the head, “No, Susan. You will not think of boys until after we return from this adventure.”

“What adventure?” Susan asked, rubbing her head and pouting before she jumped to her feet, “Someone touched my bum!”

Lucy groaned and rolled her eyes, “Susan! No one wants to touch your bum!”

Lucy suddenly jumped to her feet before Peter jerked away from Edmund, “Ed, stop pulling!”

“Do not fear, my siblings.” Edmund said, standing calmly to his feet as they all joined hands, “It is the special time-space continuum gateway with special magic GPS locator key.”

“What?”

Before Edmund could reply, they were standing on a picturesque beach in the middle of New Zealand.

[Magic Mirror – Narnia! ]

[Author – Shh, this is a shameless plug for Cathedral Cove in New Zealand! New Zealand FTW!]

“Where are we!?” Susan gasped, looking at the beach before she sped off toward the water.

Edmund narrowed his eyes as he stepped forward. He and his siblings pulled off their shoes and socks, but no more, for this is a PG-rated adventure. He could sense a great darkness in the air. Where were they indeed? While Peter, Susan, and Lucy all frolicked in the water, Edmund walked the beach with his hands on his hips.

“So … you are the ones from the prophecy!” Chuck-God said, revealing his presence behind Edmund.

“No, that was the last movie.” Edmund said calmly, turning to face this ominous presence behind him.

“It’s alright, Ed!” Peter said, rushing up the beach to stand before Edmund, facing the Chuck-God, “I’ve got this sorted. Who are you, Chuck-God?”

Chuck-God raised his eyebrow at Peter, “You just said my name.”

“Oh.” Peter said, “Right. Umm, well, I am the chosen one of Aslan! You will state your business or we will destroy you!”

Edmund stood behind Peter, performing his general role in this adventure. Stand behind, say little, but still kick the most ass out of everyone. Such a thankless role, he thought.

[Author – We feel your pain, Ed.]

“I have taken your Jesus-Lion and prepared him for deportation.” Chuck-God said in a booming voice, “Soon this land will be mine and all will come to know the Way of the Norris.”

“Jesus-Lion?” Peter asked, turning to Edmund in confusion, “Who?”

“He means Aslan.” Edmund replied, “Some people call him Jesus-Lion because they believe he is an allegory for Mexican Immigration.”

“Oh, I see.” Peter nodded, “Is he though?”

“I feel this is different for all of us, Pete. For some, he is Jesus-Lion. For others, he is Aslan. And for some others, he is Liam Neeson, famed Irish actor.”

“You really are amazing, Ed.” Peter said, awed by his brother’s insight, “I don’t know what I would do without you.”

“All in a day’s work for … Super Ninja Ed!” Edmund said before he leaped in front of Peter and before Chuck-God, “You will free Aslan, Chuck-God, or I will bring about a mighty ass whooping the likes of which was never seen in Lion, the Witch, and the Wardrobe, but totally rocked the socks off of Prince Caspian!”

Chuck-God raised his eyebrow and assumed an attack stance. He narrowed his eyes at Edmund, giving him the glare of doom. Edmund gasped before he narrowed his own eyes back at Chuck-God and the two began circling each other. Edmund’s feet moved like a cat upon the sand, while his hands moved as if he were a Shaolin Monk.

“If your Jesus-Lion can summon his special forces, I can summon mine!” Chuck-God said, before a foul wind swept over the beach.

Stunt-double leaped out of the air at Edmund, taking him by surprise. Edmund gasped and dove aside before Peter tackled the enemy. Edmund looked back at Peter in surprise, before he turned his attention back to Chuck-God.

“Don’t worry, Ed, I’ve got him sor…” Peter began to say before Stunt-double kicked him in the face, “Ow … sorted.”

“Hah!” Stunt-double said, attacking Peter with a flurry of punches and kicks.

“I can do this! I can do this!” Peter gasped, blocking one punch and headbutting Stunt-double.

No sooner had Peter knocked back Stunt-double, the beach was swarmed with soldiers. None of them had names, because if they did, we’d feel bad when the kids killed them all bloodlessly. Magically, Susan’s bow appeared in her hands and she suddenly felt empowered! She let out a Xena like cry and began letting loose with arrow after arrow.

Lucy closed her eyes and fell to her knees, clasping her hands and refusing to fight. She closed her eyes and said her timestable, hoping it would all go away like some bad dream. Where was Jesus-Lion!?

“Activate Angry High-King mode!” Peter said, letting out a lion like roar before his armour magically appeared on him, and the great sword, Rhindon, appeared in his hand, “Yes! I am Magnificent again! I knew I could do it!”

“Peter, you could always do it.” Edmund said sagely, “You just needed to believe in yourself and have writers who remember you were a High King already and have no doubt learned the great lessons. There is no need to savage your character.”

“Thanks, Ed!” Peter grinned, charging into battle.

Edmund spun on his heels and narrowed his eyes at Chuck-God, “Now it’s your turn, Chuck-God!”

“You are far more formidable than that other one, Caspeeeen.”

“Ugh. Don’t make me gag.” Edmund said as he began stalking his enemy, “And now, I shall destroy you and send you back to where you came from.”

“Stunt-double!” Chuck-God cried out, “Where are you!?”

“Ack.” Stunt-double gasped as he lay on the sand, Peter’s sword stabbing him through his chest.

Naturally, there was no blood. Stunt-double coughed, gasped, spluttered and stared up at Peter before he fell back, dead. Chuck-God gasped in surprise before he responded with sheer anger and utter ferocity! How? He narrowed his eyes just slightly.

“Damn.” Chuck-God said, “Now I have to bring in my new disciple. Miraz the Spanish Pirate!”

“Wha?” Peter said before he was knocked off his feet by a stiff punch to the face.

“What is it with people hitting my face?” Peter groaned, “Don’t they know I’m pretty!?”

Miraz appeared as if out of thin air, flanked by hundreds of his nameless, bloodless soldiers. He sneered at Peter and nodded to Chuck the Norris. He would destroy these Pevensies, despite how much he preferred them to his own nephew. He turned to Edmund, studying him curiously.

“You. I challenge you to a duel.” Miraz said confidently, “You are smaller than the blonde one. You are probably weaker too. I challenge you, and if I win, you go back to your world and you never return.”

“Ugh, that would be horrid.” Peter frowned.

“Oh it would be.” Susan said between her thirty eighth and thirty ninth victims.

[Magic Mirror – sucks for them!]

“I accept your challenge, Miraz!” Edmund said bravely, “I fear no tyrant, nor lack of lines! I still own!”

Before Miraz could reply, Chuck-God hit Edmund from behind with a stiff chop to the neck. Edmund gasped and wailed in agony before he fell to his knees and Miraz rushed him. Chuck-God folded his arms over his chest and nodded contently. The Pevensies would be defeated and this land would be his.

Miraz raised his sword as he leaped into the air, ready to slice Edmund in two with a vertical strike. Edmund, moving in slow motion because the producers liked that, cried out in pain, holding his neck. Yet just as the sword came crashing down atop him, he shot his hand out to catch Miraz’s. Miraz gasped in surprise as his sword stopped in midair.

“Super Ninja Ed mode!” Edmund cried out, before instantly his school clothes were gone and replaced with the most badass looking outfit ever.

[Magic mirror – that doesn’t really describe it, you know.]

[Author – BADASS! :P It’s badass!]

Edmund drew his two swords and immediately began duelling Miraz backward. As Miraz’s army rushed the beaches, the Pevensies fought bravely. Lucy ran away into the bushes to find Jesus-Lion, because she’d forgotten he was already being prepared for deportation. However, she managed to return with help in the form of a killer badger and a fierce looking mouse.

Peter and Susan fought side by side, one swinging blade and the other shooting arrows. Edmund of course was doing his Super Ninja best. Already he’d managed to stop half the Telmarine army, save Peter, kill some white lady stuck in ice who randomly appeared in the middle of the adventure, and all without getting a single key scene of his own.

“My mad ninja skillz are too strong for you, Chuck-God!” Edmund gasped, flying through the air atop his gryphon before he was dropped, dive tackling Chuck-God.

“Hey, I thought you were duelling me!” Miraz called out.

“No, Bitch! You’re duelling ME!” Peter cried out with a crazed grin, swinging his sword at Miraz.

Miraz was knocked back on his ass by a mighty kick from Peter and the two were immediately locked in fierce combat. Further down the beach, more Narnian were coming to the battle, led by a figure no one recognized yet.

“Hey, it’s that guy from History Boys!” Yelled a Telmarine soldier.

“The play, not the movie.” Trumpkin the cranky dwarf said before he struck the soldier dead.

“I am cooomeeeeeeeeeeeeeng to heeeeeeeeeeeeerp yooooooooou!” Caspian yelled out, galloping triumphantly down the beach with his centaur buddies.

Peter stopped mid fight with Miraz, turning to Caspian’s group, “You know … I used to have a white unicorn.”

“I bet it looked much better riding into battle than his horse, yes?” Miraz asked, “I think the dramatic effect would be more potent.”

“Oh yes, I agree.” Peter nodded, “Shall we continue?”

“Ahh right, to the death!” Miraz replied, swinging his sword.

Meanwhile, Edmund was beating Chuck-God all over the beach. Chuck-God was utterly stunned by the Super Ninja’s amazing ability to kick his ass without having to say any cheesy lines like ‘Did you kill my father!?’ or another classic ‘I am nozing like you’.

“Super Ninja Ed, wait!” Chuck-God gasped, stumbling backwards from a stiff kick Edmund had given him.

Edmund did not stop. He spun his swords around, slicing two soldiers in half before he pulled out his crossbow and shot another two dead. Since even that was not enough to show his awesome, he pulled out his torch and beat the Chuck-God senseless, deflecting all of Chuck-God’s attacks before he bopped him on the head with his torch of ultimate doom!

“You are defeated, Chuck-God!” Edmund gasped, breathing hard as he stood before the now kneeling Chuck-God, “Yield and I will show you mercy!”

“Noooooooooooo!” Chuck-God gasped, “This cannot be! I am Chuck the Norris! I can count to infinity … twice! I am the reason Waldo is hiding! I don’t cry, I narrow my eyes! I don’t get frostbite, I bite frost.”

Edmund hmphed and put his free hand on his hip, “I didn’t join the White Witch, she joined me.”

“Michael Jackson isn’t white, he’s just scared of Chuck Norris -- permanently.”

“I had the least lines of all the main characters in Prince Caspian, the movie … and people still loved me the most.” Edmund countered, “Hah!”

Chuck-God frowned, “Damn. I cannot defeat you, Super Ninja Ed.”

“You will return Aslan to Narnia and leave this world, never to return.” Edmund demanded.

The rest of the battle had stopped now, for there was only one show in town and it was the Ed show. All eyes were on Edmund the Just Badass Super Ninja as he humbled the Chuck-God in the same way only Disney could misfire the marketing of the Chronicles of Narnia – Prince Caspian film.

[Author – Go see it, it’s GREAT!]

“Alright, Super Ninja Ed.” Chuck-God groaned, holding his head from where the torch of ultimate doom had struck him, “I will do as you ask.”

Edmund nodded gratefully before he stepped back. Chuck-God stood to his feet as the theme song to Walker, Texas Ranger began playing in the background. Chuck-God raised his eyebrow and stroked his beard. Just like that, the bad Telmarines were all gone and so too was Miraz.

“Where did you send them?” Edmund asked curiously.

“Sunday School.” Chuck-God said, “Tell me Super Ninja Ed, when you are so powerful, why do you not rule the world?”

“I do not seek glory, nor extra lines or gratuitous scenes of me flirting with a character I never flirted with in the book.” Edmund said wisely, “I am Edmund the Just. I am content.”

“Chuck the Norris respects that.”

With those words spoken, Chuck-God blinked and then he was gone. The Narnians cheered when they realized Aslan was amongst them again. Edmund smiled contently as Caspian pranced around, taking all the glory. Peter walked over to Edmund, placing his hand on his shoulder.

“It’s alright, Ed. I know you’re a total badass.” Peter said proudly.

“Thanks, Pete.”

Across the beach in the middle of festivities, Caspian ran along the beach toward Susan who was pulling her bow and making pouty faces at the non-existent camera. When Caspian approached her, she turned and looked at him with a soft smile. He gazed at her and for a moment it seemed as if they would kiss.

“My dear lady, vat iz your name?” Caspian asked, looking like a lovesick puppy.

Susan suddenly deadpanned, “It’s Phyllis. Now gimmie back my horn, Dweeb.”

Caspian frowned, while in the background Aslan chuckled. He shook his head as he walked beside Lucy, her hand resting comfortably in his mane.

Lucy pondered and looked up from her feet to Aslan’s eyes, “Jesus-Lion, why didn’t you come to help us?”

“It wasn’t in the great script, my little Lioness.” Aslan said, smiling at her with his eyes, “That and something about if you don’t believe in me, I won’t help you. This is of course a pack of lies. I just knew you could do it on your own. After all, I helped you last time. If I did it the same again, it would be repetitious. Things never happen the same way twice, Lucy.”

“Of course, Aslan.” Lucy sighed, nuzzling his mane, “Aslan, you’re my favourite character in all of Narnia, because you’re just like my best friend, Jesus. That’s why you’re my Jesus-Lion.”

“I’m not from Mexico!” Aslan protested before he smiled sagely, “But you stay close to him. He’s a good one.”

While the others all celebrated, Edmund stood alone on the beach, looking very gorgeously handsome and quite badass. He was surprised when Aslan approached him, flanked by all three of his siblings. Turning to them, Edmund still said no lines but somehow had everyone’s attention.

“I knew you would not fail me, Edmund.” Aslan smiled gratefully, to which Edmund replied in kind.

As Edmund smiled softly, fangirls around the world swooned. Peter pouted a little, before he shrugged and accepted that his time in the fangirl spotlight was passing over. Caspian was still waving his hands in the distance but nobody really noticed him because he was so incredibly unremarkable. Susan grumbled something about having to kiss him and then shifted a little so he was blocked out of the camera shot.

“Edmund, you have defeated Chuck the Norris. But there is yet a greater enemy to face. Only you and your Super Ninja Ed Badass skills can defeat them.” Aslan said gravely, “You will return one day to Narnia.”

“Will I?” Edmund asked in surprise, “But why, Aslan? The Chuck-God has been defeated by my Torch of Ultimate Doom.”

“You will return nonetheless, my son. You will return for the Voyage of the Mary Sues.”

“Oh sod, not them again.” Edmund whimpered, looking to his older siblings for help.

Peter and Susan both spoke up instantly, horrified, “Count us out!”

- The End -

</div>

Save It For Later

suborbital — Sun, 25 May 2008 10:12:30 GMT

TITLE: Save It For Later

ONESHOT

Pairing: Peter/Edmund
Rating: PG
Summary: For all of time it seems that Peter has not seen what has always been there. When he finally does, will it be too late?
A/N: Having FINALLY seen Prince Caspian and jumped the fair shores and flown the fair skies to do so, I have finally returned home to revel in the wonders of Prince Caspian fanfic. Despite having written fics before PC came out, I feel rather rusty as this is the first time I have written a fanfic since it all became new again. Bear with me if this is not quite up to par. This is not quite movieverse Peter, nor is it really bookverse Peter. It is a mix of all that and whatSubwanted!Peter. I will have a review up of Prince Caspian in my journal when my thoughts have finally collated. They haven't yet. It's still too raw and fresh. All I do know is I want to see it again. I hope you enjoy this OneShot.
For the Partners in Crime, Faerie_Dance and Elexandros

Save It For Later

WHAT MY EYES HAVE SEEN

My name is Peter Pevensie. I am a High King of Narnia. I am a ruler of beasts and spirits, lands and seas. But I am lost. I am lost in the tides of time, and I fear the tide has pulled me into Narnia once more only to show me that very soon it will pull me out again.

I lived here once. I ruled here once. Thirteen hundred years ago these lands were mine. These lands were green and lush, fertile and wondrous. Now they are dark and morbid. Now my beloved Narnian retreat into trees and shadow. They retreat from the wrath of men. Telmarines who have stolen this land from my beautiful Narnian.

In my arrogance, I have lost who I am. I have sought to lord myself upon those who are not of my time. For my arrogance, the brave and loyal have fallen. For my arrogance, the gaze my sisters cast upon me is a little less hopeful, a little more sad. But there is one who seems never to judge. One who seems never to tell me that how I felt is wrong.

Edmund. He speaks little, and yet speaks louder than any other beside me. For he is always beside me. He does not judge. He does not waiver. He does not detest or chide. He exists as he always has, beside me. Always beside me.

I have perhaps realized so incredibly late just how much I value him. How necessary he has been to my function. In a life before this, thirteen hundred years ago he was the same. He learnt the lessons I am forced to learn again in my humility.

My eyes have seen so much. So much love. So much death and despair. My arrogance led us all to a raid upon the enemy. The great tyrant King Miraz, whose power I grossly underestimated. I was forced to realize the great error of my mistakes when I was made to watch helplessly as my brave Narnian were trapped behind those gates. Those damned gates.

Never before have I felt so helpless. Never before have I wished to be where death was so certain. That I could not share in their sacrifice was one last punishment served upon me for my arrogance. I was lost, and because of that, others were lost.

The great centaur Glenstorm, who reminds me so much of my beloved friend Oreius, lost his only son in that raid. How does he live? How do I live? Knowing I have lost so much, and caused so many others to lose so much as well.

Now, here I wait in my respite from a duel with the enemy in one on one combat. I feel the ominous scent of departure upon me. Is death calling? Have I taken too long to realize the depths of my mistakes? Was it so truly necessary to lose so many before I found my way again?

My heart feels heavier than this great sword I hold. Rhindon, a valiant slayer of darkness, no longer sits so easily in my hand. I grip it tightly and still feel as if my strike would not be so firm. Would not be so true. And then I look at him. I look at Edmund standing before me. He says so little, but I hear everything he says to me. Through his heart, his deeds, his eyes, he tells me. ‘I believe in you, Peter.’

“What do you think happens back home, if we die here?” I ask Edmund, before I turn and glance up at him from where I sit, “You know you’ve always been there …”

He gives me the slightest glance of acknowledgment, the slightest smile in his eyes of thanks. Then he proceeds to snap my shoulder back into place swiftly, ending the moment between us.

“Save it for later.”

He says those words so simply and then he is gone. Just like that. He does not realize how much I have come to understand that he is so much stronger than I. For moments so simple he has shown so much. If I were not already preoccupied with this dire moment of battle, of duelling, I would go to him now and … and finish telling him how I feel. But I understand why he does it. I understand why I must accept his statement and save it for later.

SAVING IT FOR LATER

“Ed?”

The duel is over. The battle is won. We’ve come home to crown a new King. King Caspian. My time here is over. For Susan and I, Aslan has told us there is no more here. No more of this place, this life.

Surprisingly, this news did not hurt me as much as I thought it would. I am ready to leave this place. Aslan is right. I have learned all I need to learn. I have done all I can do. The life we led here is long over. This world is not for us. It is for them. For Caspian and his Narnia. For his dreams and hopes. I am ready now to leave this world, this place, this life, this dream. But I cannot leave without doing what I should have done a long time ago.

“What is it, Pete?” Edmund calls back to me as I approached him in the chambers Caspian had allowed for him.

I smile softly at him, knowing this will be one of the last times I get to see him like this. One of the last times I shall gaze upon him as King Edmund the Just, rather than just Edmund Pevensie. I can’t help the swell of pride I feel at seeing him this way. My steadfast Edmund. So long has he served, and so long has he asked for nothing in return.

“Ed.” I say softly, giving him a small smile tinged with melancholy for our impending departure, “I saved it for later.”

He smiles at me, so very brightly, so very broadly. It is as if he’s been waiting all this time for me to just notice him. For me to acknowledge him. To appreciate him. Why have I waited so long to be here? Why have I waited so long to tell him? To show him?

The blush on his face is quite magnetic. The happiness my one remark has given him, returns as much to myself. We waste so much time in the waiting and the misunderstanding of ourselves and of our loves, our hopes, our aspirations. Have I wasted so much time here? Have I spent a lifetime wasted before I finally show him just how very true I love him?

I hold out my hands, palms up, as if in wait, as if in hope. He looks at me, he studies me, he smiles at me. I feel I may possibly float, and I do not know why. I do not know why I am doing this, or what I am even doing. I only know that I am doing now because the truest part of my heart is finally free of its own self despair and misguided self importance. While others called me prideful, selfish, arrogant, Edmund’s eyes did not. They always understood. He knew my pain was driven from the blame and guilt I felt for leaving Narnia. It was our departure that cast our beautiful home into disarray and foresaw this fate of sufferance for my loyal Narnian. Edmund understood my actions, while misguided, were born out of my utterly endless guilt. I failed them. Edmund knew this. It is why he did not judge when my actions were unbecoming. When my words were unseemly.

Throughout all of this, and even before it, he stood with me. And now I feel our paths are about to diverge. Is it too late to tell him I do? I do know now, Ed. I do understand. I do appreciate.

I stand with my palms still held up, my hands still outstretched. I smile at him, knowing that he would not really wish to hold my hands. But somehow I understand now that when he said he did not wish to hold my hand, he meant that he did not wish to hold my hand until I knew why I wanted to hold his. I know now.

“We’ve not much time, Ed.” I say, my voice soft and accepting, “Not much time at all.”

He looks at me with a slightly puzzled expression before he moves his hands over mine. Just that slight touch of feelings his smaller, slender hands moving over mine sends a swell of anticipation into my heart. Has it been this way all along? Have I blinded myself to this all these years?

My heart begins to race as his hands finally rest on mine. I squeeze them softly as I gaze at the coupling. The moment his hands touched mine, I knew this was not at all what I had expected, but had somehow always wanted. Now that my heart is finally free and my fate is sealed, I feel as if I can finally allow this to be.

Is this love? Has this been ever present and I have simply been too blind to understand it? Too simple to understand it?

“You’ve always been there, Ed.” I say to him, my eyes locked on his, “And I’ve never told you how much I …”

“Save it for later, Pete.” Edmund smiles at me, as if he understands me more than I understand myself, “Like you said yourself, we’ve not much time. Not much time at all.”

“I’ve … I’ve never …” I sigh, nodding my head and smiling sheepishly at him, “You already know, don’t you? I’m sorry, Ed. I’m sorry I waited this long to … to see you. To show you.”

True to form, Edmund says nothing in reply. He just looks at me, eyes smiling softly as he moves one hand up my arm to rest it upon my cheek. I close my eyes and exhale, realizing in this one moment that this … this is why I have never loved another. There is no other.

Before I can open my eyes I am surprised by the soft presence of his lips upon mine. From the first moment he touched my hands moments ago, to the moment he touched my cheek, to this moment of his lips touching mine, I do not believe I have ever felt such a nervous flutter of anticipation in my heart. Is this love? Is this what I have sought and never found in another all my life here in Narnia?

The sun is finally setting on my time in Narnia. The sun sets in the one place our love … yes, I can say it now, our love … can feel and exist. Why now?

“You’re thinking too much, Pete.” Edmund says with a small smirk, his hands now curling in my hair, his kiss bruised lips drawing my clueless gaze, “Save it for later.”

I can only smile back and nod simply as his lips return to mine. I close my eyes as the velvet touch of his tongue meets mine and I give in to this last moment, this only moment we will ever have or know before Susan and I leave for the last time.

This love could never be in another world. And while that knowledge brings despair, I choose to put it aside so I can revel in the long desired and never known feeling of utter bliss in his kiss and warm constant presence. Save the rest for later.

- The End -

</div>

JaM: The Border Wars - The End for Now

suborbital — Fri, 09 May 2008 10:49:33 GMT

Title: Just and Magnificent
Volume - The Border Wars
Chapter 12 – The End for Now
Pairing: Peter/Edmund
Rating: Whatever the highest rating is. Contains graphic sexual content at times
Summary: Edmund leads Narnia in the final charge against Ettinsmoor. Peter waits alone.
Disclaimer: C.S. Lewis owns the characters. I just love them!
Warnings: SEX, Incest, slash. Violence. Romance. Movieverse. AU. angst, fluff.

Just and Magnificent - The Border Wars

Chapter 12 – The End for Now

THE UNBEARABLE ANXIETY OF WAITING

Three weeks had passed since Peter had awoken in Cair Paravel. It had been a surreal time for the High King. Oreius’s body had been returned to Cair Paravel and a funeral with full honours was held. In many ways, Peter had already said his goodbyes to his friend but the act of the funeral had left him embittered and distant.

Besides leaving his chambers for Oreius’s funeral proceedings, Peter had been confined to his bed. Given his sombre mood, it was perhaps for the best. The only one who seemed capable of drawing his attention was Susan, and it was noted by many during this period that the two siblings saw a small thaw in their relationship. His other sister was proving to be quite a headache for him as she had begun campaigning to be allowed to go north to Ettinsmoor.

“No!” Peter snapped at Lucy, quite harshly as he sat at his bureau reading the latest news from the north.

She had just asked him yet again if she could be granted leave to venture north. Peter was growing tired at her insistence. Being mostly confined to his chambers, still mourning Oreius’s death, and worrying for his brother in the north, made Peter an irritable fellow.

Though Lucy was no longer the little girl who found Mr. Tumnus through a wardrobe, she could still pout like one. She stomped her foot and gave Peter a hurt glare before she turned and rushed out of the room. Peter sighed, about to call out to her when another visitor appeared at his doorway.

“Hello, Brother.” Susan said, casting a glance at Lucy’s retreating figure before she stepped into Peter’s chambers.

Peter sat up in surprise, smiling at her presence. She had often been a calming influence on him and he still missed the tight bond they once shared. If he was the father of Narnia, he truly felt that she should be serving as mother.

“Might I sit?” Susan asked before Peter beckoned her to sit in a chair beside his bed.

Peter tried to get out of his bed but she quickly stayed him with a hand on his chest. He smiled gratefully before she sat down beside him. For a time there was a silence, and not an awkward one at that. It was a peaceful silence. A peaceful silence that Peter truly appreciated.

When it finally came time to speak, it was of matters that were of little import. There was no talk of duty. No talk of the affairs of state. It was a simple, light conversation. At least it was simple until the topic of Lucy came to light.

“Peter, she is a woman. She is no longer a child.” Susan pointed out, “Her mind is sound, and her heart is pure. She wishes to heal, to serve, to aid our loyal Narnian. Would you deny her what is her sovereign duty?”

“I would wish to protect my baby sister.” Peter conceded, a weak smile on his face.

Susan smiled at this and nodded in understanding, “It is a hard thing when we might be faced with a conflict of heart and duty.”

“A very hard thing, Su.” Peter sighed, before he nodded, “I shall consider her request. I am certain it will not be the last time she asks me.”

“And that should be a testament to her determination and spirit.” Susan smiled, covering Peter’s hand with her own.

“Thank you, Su.” Peter said gratefully, squeezing her hand as he smiled at her, “Thank you. Your presence here has been truly comforting.”

“Which ... brings me to a matter I must discuss with you.” Susan said, “It will soon be time for me to return to the Lone Islands to oversee the trade negotiations in Narrowhaven.”

“Ever since you liberated the Lone Islands for us they have plagued your time.” Peter sighed, “I would wish for you to stay, Su, but I understand the duty that must be met.”

“I will miss you, Peter.”

“And I you, Su.” Peter said, raising her hand to his lips and kissing it, “I do hope you will hurry home. It has been such a wonderful joy to have you here during this period. I do not believe I could have endured without your presence.”

“I know you miss Edmund.” Susan said sympathetically.

“I miss you when you are gone too, Su.” Peter emphasized, “I do wish you would remain at least until this war is over.”

“Well, perhaps if Lucy does leave for the north, I shall remain here and send a representative in my place to the Lone Islands to request the trade negotiations be put on hold until I can attend to officiate myself.” Susan pondered, “Would this be agreeable?”

“Would it?” Peter gasped, his eyes lighting up at the suggestion, “You would remain here to look after your dreadful bedridden sod of a brother?”

“You are many things, Peter, but a sod is not one of them.” Susan chuckled, “At least not today.”

“Su!” Peter laughed, sitting up to pull her into a hug, “Thank you.”

After this particular meeting Peter was in a far more agreeable mood. Because of this change in his demeanour, Lucy once more pressed her campaign to be allowed to venture north to Edmund’s army. Again, on instinct, Peter refused her, but Lucy sensed he was close to concession.

“Peter!” Lucy gasped with wide eyes as he lay in his bed, “I am a Queen, not a vase! I am not just here for decoration. If we are at war, my place is there. You almost died returning here, Peter. How many of our loyal Narnian must do the same?”

“You will remain behind the frontlines of battle.” Peter frowned, still upset that he could not return himself, “You will not involve yourself in any direct engagements.”

“Peter …” Lucy said, sitting beside his bed and taking his hand, “It is no different to when we must farewell you to war.”

“Luce.” Peter sighed, squeezing her hand, “It is different. I could not bear anything happening to you.”

“Edmund will protect me.” Lucy said confidently, “I am not afraid, Peter. I must go. I must help.”

Peter sighed and finally relented. He gave Lucy a weak smile and kissed her hand. Healing was in her blood. She could not sit still when her Narnian needed her. It seemed odd that someone so focused on healing others would have to use those abilities so close to a battle that did the opposite.

Unfortunately for Peter, despite Susan’s attempt to remain, a crisis in Glasswater promptly removed her from Cair Paravel so she could tend to it. Thus, the sombre King Peter remained alone. Alone with his morbid depression and grief. Without anyone to stem his despair, Peter became a silent, solitary figure. His recovery was slow. He was aloof to those around him. He would spend his days beside Oreius’s grave and the small joy he seemed to have was when he commissioned a statue to be made in Oreius’s honour. Besides that, he continued to recover and monitor the intelligence he received from the northern front of the war. Days seemed to pass by far too slowly for him. Days that became weeks. Weeks that drove Peter further into his despair.

BEHOLD THE RECKONING

“Sire, they wish to discuss terms of surrender.” General Capies said to Edmund as they stood in Edmund’s command tent discussing strategies for the coming battle.

For four months Edmund had pressed further north into Ettinsmoor. Four months of skirmishes and advances. The Narnian Army was an arrow moving swiftly through the Ettinsmoor landscape right to Harfang. Four months after the attempted assassination of High King Peter and the attack which killed General Oreius, Edmund’s army had reached the southern outskirts of Harfang, Ettinsmoor’s capital.

Edmund’s resolve had been sorely tested. The advances made were made with the blood of his Narnian. While Ettinsmoor had suffered heavy losses before the second stage of the Border Wars, the nature of their army made them formidable even in smaller numbers. Giants and Ettin, accompanied by all manner of foul beasts. Yet still Edmund’s army had smashed the enemy at every engagement.

The Border Wars had morphed into something far more absolute. No longer was Narnia simply content to defend her borders against an aggressive enemy and potential invader. This time Narnia was fighting to end the war by crushing the enemy right at their heart.

“We offered them surrender once before.” Edmund said plainly, his face weary from months of marching and battle, “They used it to strike our High King and take General Oreius from us. I dare not offer them another chance. You and I would clearly be next on any further attempt. We are not here to offer them surrender. They have tested our resolve and ignored the peace we offered before. Now we are here to finish them with a battle that will make them forever think twice about raising arms against us. And when we are done, it shall be a very long while before they can ever do so again.”

General Capies nodded, before he turned and left the tent to relay Edmund’s orders to the army. The battle was going ahead. Edmund had grown tired of this war. He’d grown tired of a King who constantly remained behind the battle lines. No, Edmund would not stop until this coward King finally saw the battle lines himself. If necessary, he would destroy Harfang to bring him out.

The next morning the Narnian army, looking a little less glorious from the long and gruelling war, marched toward the site of the final battle. Edmund’s army would face the enemy and fight them until they were destroyed and their King brought forward to face judgment. If the King then continued to hide within his castle, Edmund’s war machine would obliterate it.

Edmund rode to the head of the army, feeling almost an ounce of sympathy for the rather dim witted enemy that stood on the other side of the battlefield. Behind the enemy was Harfang, the giant city. It was not a very spectacular site as giants were crude creatures and not of the greatest intellect. It was perhaps not much more than a giant village in Edmund’s eyes. But he was under no illusions that it would become a fort the moment Edmund’s army began to storm it.

Before Edmund could give the signal to begin the first charge, a white flag was waved by a very dumb looking giant. Edmund shook his head and frowned as the large giant, sent by a smaller and far more intelligent and devious ettin, bumbled across the battlefield.

This giant didn’t particularly look like much of a fighter. Edmund’s army had destroyed the best of Ettinsmoor’s giants several battles ago. What remained was rather motley in makeup.

Showing little fear, Edmund allowed the giant to come within speaking distance. He raised his hand to show his Narnian the giant would not be harmed. There would be enough time for battle very soon.

“I am King Edmund the Just, Duke of Lantern Waste, Count of the Western March, Knight of the Noble Order of the Table, and Master of the High Order of Justice.” Edmund said, introducing himself, “Speak!”

“King … King Halshom … Hul…ummm…” The giant said, scratching his head, “Umm … Femi dunno. Big boss.”

Edmund closed his eyes and shook his head. Giants were dumb creatures and generally feared, but he knew very well from having many giants loyal to Narnia that if handled correctly the giants could be truly warm and docile creatures. Edmund had learned that the ettin were far more dangerous than the giants. Their increased intellect allowed them to manipulate the giants to do their bidding. Still, this did not make all giants unwitting enemies. Many of the giants truly did earn their reputation as being fearsome. Some would try to torment the Narnian Army by eating them alive on the battlefield to try and scare others away. However, Edmund had the distinct impression that fearsome wasn’t quite in this halfwit’s repertoire.

“What does … King … Big Boss wish to say to King Edmund the Just?” Edmund asked with a very commanding tone.

Even on his steed, Edmund was still towered by the giant. Despite this, the giant seemed to be quite intimidated by him. Edmund certainly didn’t appear to be intimidated by the giant.

“Big … King Boss … umm Halsfom say … umm …” The giant scratched his head and turned back toward the ettin across the battlefield who had sent him, “Go uway.”

“Uway?” Edmund asked, pulling his helmet off to look up at the giant, “King Halsfom the Gregarious coward wants me to go … ‘uway’?”

“Umm … yup.” The giant nodded, “Him say … go uway … please.”

“Well … that makes all the difference, doesn’t it?”

“Femi dunno.” The giant shrugged, “Femi just say. Yup.”

Edmund smiled and shook his head, “Femi, is it? Femi, I’d like you to turn around, go back to that deviant little ettin who sent you out here and tell him to send King Hulsfom out here himself to tell me to go … ‘uway’. And this time, tell him to come out himself and not send some imposter in his place to fool me.”

“Ok. Femi say.” Femi nodded, turning and bumbling back across the battlefield.

Edmund smiled and turned to General Capies, “I would like him spared. He is no warrior. Look at their army. We’ve killed, captured, or otherwise rendered useless most of their fiercest live flesh eaters. It is those pesky ettin pulling the strings, General.”

“Then those deviant ettin shall be the recipients of our harshest fury, Sire.” Capies replied obediently.

Edmund waited patiently for a reply. He received it quite swiftly. The white flag was lowered and the enemy prepared to make their charge. Edmund cursed silently, hoping that this cowardly King Hulsfom would see reason and give this war a chance to be ended before more had to die.

“He has chosen war. Let us choose to end it today.” Edmund said to Capies, “Full press formations, General.”

“Oh, Edmund, this is absolutely horrid.” Lucy said from her horse as she cantered to Edmund’s side.

“Lucy!” Edmund said in wide eyed surprise, “Go back to field infirmary! What are you thinking!? We are about to go to battle!”

“I wanted to wish you luck, Ed.” Lucy said sadly, leaning over to kiss his cheek, “And I was hoping that somehow they would see reason and surrender.”

“This cowardly king does not see reason, Lucy.” Edmund sighed, removing his gauntlets so he could take Lucy’s hand in his own, “While I am grateful for Peter allowing you to come, I will have to throttle him for doing so. Still, your presence is truly warming. I hope I am able to speed a victory for you, my lady.”

“A swift one without so much death, if you can?” Lucy asked.

“And I shall ask them to swing their swords and clubs lightly so as not to hurt me, shall I?” Edmund asked with a slight chuckle, “Go on, Luce. I shall do my very best to ensure a victory, and a swift one.”

“Alright, Ed.” Lucy smiled, before she turned and cantered back through the ranks of the Narnian Army.

Edmund turned back to the battle as the enemy began their charge across the battlefield. He raised his sword and gave the forward motion to loose the arrows. The sky turned dark as Narnian arrows filled it on their upward arc, before they descended down upon the enemy. The moment the arrows hit, Edmund launched the next stage of attack. The gryphon cried out as they soared through the air with their cargo of Narnian satyrs.

Behind the first line of charging giants, many of whom were hit by the arrows, the gryphon deposited their soldiers. The satyr turned and charged at the giants from behind as Edmund led the charge forward. The giants were swamped from front and behind. By the time the next line of Ettinsmoor soldiers joined the battle, the first line was defeated.

“Capies!” Edmund cried out, his horse raising up on his back legs, “Close off their flanks! Let them choose surrender or death. This war ends today!”

After the Narnian Army had completely annihilated the first advance of the Ettinsmoor army, Edmund turned his forces toward the rest. In a frightening show of strength and power, the Narnian lines reformed completely into a unified stomp and repeated the same strategy. The archers fired, the gryphon flew over, but this time dropping firebombs that scattered the Ettinsmoor forces below. Again, Edmund’s forces charged forward. The machine like efficiency of the Narnian Army gave little opening for the Ettinsmoorean to launch any cohesive attack strategies of their own.

Demoralized, scattered, and comprehensively overpowered, the regular giants broke away from the ettin and began to retreat from the battlefield. Edmund breathed hard, his bloody sword held up to shield himself from the sun as he watched the enemy begin to lose resolve.

“Sire, do you wish us to pursue the retreating giants?” Capies asked as he galloped to Edmund’s side.

“Let them go. The retreating are villagers, solitary giants, workers.” Edmund said, shaking his head, “But we are not done. When we have their King, and when their army is crushed and they barely have enough to invade the next village let alone the next nation, then we will stop.”

And so the battle continued, but not for much longer. The giants who had retreated were soon running back toward the battlefield. At first Edmund cursed the giants, believing them to incredibly stupid for returning to the battle when it would most likely result in their deaths. Yet he soon realized they weren’t just running into the battle, they were bringing something onto the battlefield.

“Fast Cavalry with me!” Edmund yelled, turning his horse to intercept the giants before they could rejoin the rest of their army.

As Edmund rode closer, he realized the giants were carrying something. Unceremoniously, the giants tossed a small figure along the grass toward Edmund. When a crown rolled off the figure, Edmund could barely hide his grin. The giants were not so stupid at all. In fact, they were far more clever than Edmund gave them credit for. Since the cowardly King Hulsfom would not come to battle, the giants carried him out.

All but one of the giants suddenly turned around and ran away. The giant who remained was Femi, the giant Edmund spoke to before the battle. When the other Ettinsmoorean realized their King was on the battlefield being promptly approached by King Edmund, they began to rush toward him. Femi waved his arms to stop them as Edmund finally reached the cowardly king.

What Edmund found when he reached King Hulsfom was rather a shock. It was not a giant as he expected. It was not even an ettin. King Hulsfom was a man, a Son of Adam.

“By the Lion.” Edmund gasped, staring down at the thin, spindly little man.

Edmund got off his horse and tossed his helmet aside. He was absolutely furious. Ettinsmoor had never been a friendly place, but until the arrival of the hitherto elusive King Hulsfom, they had never been a threat to Narnia. The cowardly man held up his hands and tried to beg for mercy.

“I beg you, Master, mercy!” Hulsfom gasped.

Edmund tossed Hulsfom a sword from one of his dead Narnian soldiers. Hulsfom stared at the sword in horror and crawled away from it. Edmund threw his dagger at the ground in front of Hulsfom, growling.

“Pick it up, Coward!” Edmund growled, “Pick it up!”

Hulsfom shakily picked up the sword and stood to his feet. He was taller than Edmund, but far slighter. A sharp, weak, schemer of a man. His hair was frail and grey, and his eyes were dark as if he’d deluded himself with thoughts of power for far too long.

“Finally the giants are sick of you pushing their nation to the brink of annihilation. You mobilized them into an army and provoked a war. The cowardice in your heart is matched only by your scheming ability to somehow forge Ettinsmoor to your will. You are the opposite of us in Narnia.” Edmund growled, truly enraged that a war between Narnia and Ettinsmoor had been orchestrated by someone who wasn’t even of Ettinsmoor, “I do not know where you came from, but I do know it is not from these lands.”

“I yield!” Hulsfom said, tossing his sword away, “I am unarmed! You cannot kill me. It is not ... righteous! It is not proper form.”

“And you would know about proper form, would you?” Edmund scowled, “You had a chance to accept surrender months ago, but instead you tried to kill my High King. You know nothing of proper form.”

“Just like your proper form when you poisoned all those innocents that led to the start of this war?” Hulsfom asked contemptuously, “Where was your proper form then?”

“It was supposed to deter. There weren’t supposed to be any villagers.” Edmund cursed, “Even then you made the first attacks. You were already pressing our borders.”

“Femi sad.” Femi frowned, nodding his head, “When Big Boss say go to well, people not know it make sick. Then they die when Big Boss say keep drinking, even after sick. Me think maybe that not smart thing to do now? Femi dunno.”

“What?” Edmund asked, turning his head up to Femi in surprise, “What did you say?”

“Shut up, you giant idiot!” Hulsfom yelled up at Femi, who covered his ears and started humming to himself.

“Femi like shiny butterfly, Femi like shiny ... oooh ...” He said, opening his eyes and catching a sparkle on the ground from a sword reflecting light, “Shiny!”

Femi stomped off toward the shiny object, leaving Edmund and Hulsfom alone on the battlefield. Edmund’s eyes were locked on the once again cowering Hulsfom.

“You put them there! You made them drink enough of it to die so that the rest of the Ettin and Giants would galvanize against Narnia! You knew I was trying to deter your army and you put innocents in harm’s way!” Edmund screamed with rage, realizing this entire time that Hulsfom’s devious cowardice was behind the defining moment at the start of the Border Wars.

“I surrender!” Hulsfom said suddenly, falling to his knees and clasping his hands as if in prayer, “I am unarmed! I surrender!”

“You are a coward, Hulsfom, and you will pay for your crimes.” Edmund said, barely keeping his calm, “You will instruct your men to stop fighting and then relinquish your crown. You will then be taken to Narnia where you will stand trial.”

“Of course!” Hulsfom nodded, “Just get me away from these stupid creatures!”

Edmund growled and shook his head before he turned and started walking away. The moment he did, Hulsfom smirked and slowly rose to his feet. His eyes narrowed with intent as he pulled a dagger from his robe.

“Actually, I don’t care much to go to Narnia.” Hulsfom whispered to himself before he threw the dagger with precision at the back of Edmund’s head.

In a flash Edmund turned and caught the blade before he threw it back just as quickly as he’d caught it. The dagger pierced Hulsfom’s temple as he fell to his knees, eyes wide. Edmund marched up to him, his face grit with condemnation. Without hesitation he drew his sword, raised it high, and slammed it through Hulsfom’s neck, slicing his head clean off.

“Actually, I don’t care much to take you to Narnia.” Edmund gasped, kicking Hulsfom’s headless torso over.

Edmund turned and marched toward the middle of the battlefield where both sides were observing the encounter with little idea of how to react to it. Sheathing his sword, he spoke in a voice loud enough to be heard by both sides. His voice was raw with fatigue, but fierce with intent and a commanding aura.

“The Border Wars are over!” Edmund yelled, saying little else as he summoned his steed and mounted it.

The Ettinsmoorean all looked at each other, a little lost for what to do now. Femi had stopped looking for his shiny as he’d found Hulsfom’s crown instead. When he saw King Hulsfom’s body he frowned. He looked at Edmund and stomped over quickly, looking hesitant as he leaned down and handed Edmund Hulsfom’s crown.

“What Femi do now?” Femi asked sheepishly, frowning down at Hulsfom’s body, “No more big boss. You kill Femi now?”

“No kill Femi now.” Edmund said, tossing Hulsfom’s crown back to the giant, “King Femi now. I suggest you take this defeat well and use this time of rebuilding to create a nation of your own design. We had no war before this man, and I will see no war after him either. Am I understood, Femi?”

“Femi no fight. Femi clean up mess and make pie.” Femi nodded, “Mmm, pie good.”

Edmund smiled in approval and nodded, “Alright, make pie, King Femi.”

“Oooh, King Femi.” Femi grinned before he turned to his friends and waved his crown, “Femi say clean up! No fight no more!”

One of the ettin grumbled and Femi responded by knocking the ettin over and repeating his mandate. Edmund chuckled and turned to canter away. He was so sick of this war now, he just wanted to go home. He surveyed the battlefield and could not help but think what a waste this war had been. One greedy man had united the not so clever creatures of Ettinsmoor and manipulated them to war. Because of him, so many had died.

“It is over, Sire.” Capies said, joining Edmund as they began to filter off the battlefield, “Our casualties were low, Sire. We have been fortunate this day. You have led us to victory. The war is over.”

“A stupid victory for a stupid war, General.” Edmund sighed tiredly, “I wish King Peter could have been here to see this. To see that man face his reckoning. Now we go home and bury our dead. And then we pray that war does not visit us for a very long time. After the Great Dark War, I truly thought I’d seen my fill.”

“In comparison, this one was rather small, Sire.”

“Tell that to the Narnian who died fighting in it, General.” Edmund turned to Capies, “Let’s go home. We’ve done all we needed to do here. Ettinsmoor is defeated and the true enemy destroyed. Let’s go home.”

ALONE WITH YOUR THOUGHTS

“His majesty spends so much time there.” A servant said to Mr. Tumnus as the pair made their way toward the Royal Graveyard of Cair Paravel.

“His majesty can spend as much time where he pleases.” Mr. Tumnus replied, “He has much to ponder in his mind and heart.”

“The burden of great souls.” The servant nodded in understanding.

Peter knew he had company, but he did not move from his position beside Oreius’s grave. He did not stand to regard Mr. Tumnus or the servant. He was not particularly in the mood to speak to anyone. Ever since Lucy had left, and then Susan, Peter had felt a numbing despair weighing upon his heart. His two sisters had been gone for months now. Edmund had been gone even longer.

Here, in the quiet peace of the graveyard, Peter could let his thoughts mull over. He could imagine that the voices of those buried here were guiding him, speaking into his soul. Here, ironically, he did not feel so alone.

Mr. Tumnus dutifully placed the latest intelligence from Ettinsmoor down beside Peter. Peter looked up from the grass and thanked Mr. Tumnus with a nod. Tumnus bowed and took his leave, before Peter picked up the intelligence report and began to study it curiously.

The report included correspondence from Edmund indicating his intent to strike at Harfang. A final strike to end the war. Peter knew that given the delay in messages reaching Narnia, this final strike would have already taken place. He could only pray that the strike was successful. He wanted this war over.

“What do you think, Oreius?” Peter sighed, glancing over at his friend’s grave, “Is this war finally over?”

Peter gave the grave a pensive glance before he slowly rose to his feet. He came here almost every day now. It didn’t seem unusual to him at all. In life he would have spent some time each day with Oreius. The only difference now for Peter was where they met and the rather obvious one sided nature of their conversations.

“I think you’re right, Oreius.” Peter smiled, “I think it’s over too.”

Peter found the graveyard a rather inspiring place. He was lonely, there was no denying that. He had bouts of rather potent depression without any of his siblings around. He was almost impossible to deal with as far as Mr. Tumnus was concerned. The graveyard was often the only place Peter was not on edge or anxious or pacing. Here he was peaceful. Here he did not feel so alone.

He could only hope that his Doubt-bucket had won his battle and would be home within the season’s end. He could only hope that Lucy would return unharmed, the light of her eyes still bright. He could only hope that Susan would return and they could continue to rebuild their long weakened relationship.

Peter stopped beside a familiar gravesite. A gravesite that was far more weathered than Oreius’s. This gravesite had been here since the Great Dark War. This gravesite, this memorial, belonged to someone Peter had once called brother.

“Hello, Orrin.” Peter smiled, brushing his hand slowly over the headstone, “I don’t suppose you know how to win back our Su, do you?”

Peter sat down, placing his reports out on the grass beside Orrin’s headstone. He tapped his chin as he studied the reports in greater detail, randomly smiling as he did so. He frowned a little, biting his lip, before he finally spoke.

“You’re right, Brother.” Peter nodded, “I don’t know why I didn’t think of that myself. But if Edmund does manage to neutralize Harfang, and perhaps even kill their King, that would just leave a power vacuum in his place. Surely Edmund would select someone suitable who would lead without the seed of revenge in his heart. Still, I suppose you’re right. You know, you never talked this much when you were alive.”

“He was probably busy being dutiful.” Susan laughed, surprising Peter with her presence.

“Su!” Peter gasped in surprise, jumping to his feet and rushing to her.

“Peter!” Susan said brightly as he whisked her off her feet and hugged her tightly, “Peter, put me down!”

Peter laughed along with Susan, jumping and kissing her happily. She let out a squeal, trying not to laugh so much as he jumped with her in his arms. Finally he let her down and both caught their breath, smiling breathlessly at each other.

“Peter? Have you gone mad?” Susan gasped, chuckling and leaning against his shoulder.

“I just did not expect to see you, Su! No one told me you were coming back.” Peter said, feeling so positively enthused by her surprise return.

“But I sent word ahead, Peter. You did not get my letter?” Susan asked, a little surprised.

“Oh ...” Peter said, biting his lip and smiling impishly, “Sorry, Su. I ... haven’t been very diligent with my paperwork and correspondence.”

“That figures.” Susan droned, before she smiled and took Peter’s hand, “I see you’ve been speaking to my husband.”

Peter smiled and let out a small chuckle as they walked over to Orrin’s memorial, “He was just helping me with a few things. Did you come here to find me or were you coming to see him?”

“Both, I suppose.” Susan said, smiling affectionately at the headstone, “I think he wants me to be here, Peter.”

“I think he would as well, Su.” Peter nodded, squeezing her hand, “I have never forced you in all these years. I’ve always let you do as you needed to do, but I have always hoped you would eventually come home to us. Home to stay.”

“It is strange.” Susan said, her eyes watering up a little as she smiled, “I stayed away for so long because ... of him. Now, for the first time in so long I feel like I need to return home for him. I don’t know, Peter. I just think it’s time to come home. Time to be home more.”

“Do you ... have you ... ever thought about letting someone court you?”

“My heart is already taken, Peter. There is nothing left to court.” Susan said resolutely.

“Well, Su, for what it is worth.” Peter said as his own eyes watered and he smiled warmly, “You will always have a piece of my heart.”

“I know, Peter.” Susan smiled gratefully, kissing his cheek, “Besides, I heard you’ve been making life miserable for everyone since I left. We cannot continue such unseemly behaviour, can we?”

“Oh no, of course not, Su.” Peter grinned, squeezing her hand.

Susan placed her free hand upon her husband’s gravestone. She closed her eyes and let the breeze caress her ear as if it were a whisper. She smiled and let a small sigh, knowing it was time for her to finally return home. The time for running away, be it to the Lone Islands or to foreign lands in the guise of diplomacy, was over. It was time to come home. It was time to be with her family.

Susan mouthed a silent thank you and leaned down to kiss her husband’s gravestone. She knew that her husband was watching over her still. She smiled and kissed his gravestone once more before she stood up and moved back to Peter’s side, ready to leave.

“Let’s see if we can’t get that smile up a little more now, alright?” Susan smiled, brushing a small tear from Peter’s cheek, “We can’t have our army coming home to a miserable High King, can we? Nor our siblings.”

Peter kissed her cheek and hugged her tightly, closing his eyes and sighing in gratitude. Somehow he’d been granted a hope. Finally he felt the tide of grief receding and a hope that a long difficult period of his life would soon be over. Susan’s presence was stabilizing, reassuring. She was gentle and courageous, firm and wise. She was the one he needed to pull him back from his despair and guide him back to his rightful path.

“I love you, Su.” Peter whispered, still squeezing her tightly, “You’re home now. You’re home. Thank you.”

THE END FOR NOW

Two months after Edmund ended the Border Wars, crowned a giant named Femi as King of Ettinsmoor, and killed the coward known as Hulsfom, he led his victorious army into sight of Cair Paravel. They were finally home.

“Oh, Edmund! We’re home!” Lucy said excitedly.

Edmund smiled, grateful for Lucy’s presence. She’d spent most of the journey on the back of Edmund’s horse, holding onto him from behind. She didn’t want to be cooped up in a carriage or fly ahead on a gryphon. She wanted to ride with her brother and witness the journey with her own eyes. She wanted to see the lands, the creatures, the sights and sounds between Ettinsmoor and Narnia.

When the army first crossed the border from Ettinsmoor to Narnia, Lucy could almost feel the change in her heart. The magical sensation of being home, in a world that seemed warmer, brighter, more vivid than ever before. At that moment, she knew without having to be told, that she was home. She was home in Narnia.

Now, long after their arduous journey had begun, the two monarchs were leading their victorious army to Cair Paravel. The majestic sight of Cair Paravel sent a warm peace through both Edmund and Lucy. It was truly a sight sorely missed.

“Indeed, Lucy, we are home.” Edmund replied finally.

The morale of the army was high. Very soon they would be able to take leave to see those most beloved to them. Before they reached the outskirts of Cair Paravel, the trumpets and sounds of victory could be heard. High King Peter had spared no expense in welcoming home his brave and faithful Narnian.

Many Narnian had come from far across the land to give thanks to those brave soldiers who had survived the Border Wars to see their family. In tribute to those who had fallen in battle, including the great General Oreius, a single dove carrying a petal was let loose into the sky. Those petals were then dropped over the returning army as they entered Cair Paravel.

Edmund had to pause to take a breath as he found the emotion of the small act to be wholly overwhelming. Each death he felt, for each death was a friend, a face, a name he knew. The petals landing upon them were many, but it felt in some way fitting in the sense that those lost were still entering Cair Paravel with their fellow Narnian.

Either side of the returning army, Narnian creatures welcomed them home. Yet it was the sight of High King Peter the Magnificent standing in wait for them that made Edmund truly feel he was home. Edmund was a little surprised and rather elated to see Susan was standing beside Peter. He was even more surprised when she seemed almost pleased to see him.

Edmund stopped his horse and dismounted before he helped Lucy to do the same. He stepped forward, smiling softly at the sight of Peter and Susan. He cast a glance to the Narnian who had come to greet him before he and Lucy both gave a small bow in deference to their older siblings. Edmund fell to one knee, his head bowed and his sword placed on the ground before him.

“My King, we return home having successfully defeated our enemies in the name of Narnia, the Magnificent, and of the Lion. We honour you with our victory, my Lord. We ask to be received.” Edmund spoke, his eyes still lowered, “We ask our dead to be honoured. We ask to be granted the peace that our victory has secured.”

“King Edmund the Just, you have led our Narnian to victory against our enemies. Rise, and be welcomed home with the thanks and gratitude of your fellow Narnian.” Peter said formally before Edmund rose to his feet, sheathing his sword.

Peter raised his hand to the air and turned either side to his Narnian before they all let out a unified cheer of celebration. Once the formalities were put aside, Edmund smiled broadly and ran to Peter, jumping up into his arms and kissing him soundly. It was not very proper at all, but after their long separation, Edmund could only tolerate so much protocol.

“Doubt-bucket, you’re home!” Peter laughed, gasping against the kiss as he spun his beloved around him.

“Lucy, you’ve done so well.” Susan smiled, greeting her sister with a warm hug, “Welcome home.”

“Oh, Su, you should have seen it!” Lucy said, eyes wide with excitement, “It was so exciting and horrid at once. I’m so glad to be home. I’m so glad you’re here!”

Peter reluctantly let Edmund go so he could give Lucy a well deserved kiss and hug, “Lucy, thank you. Thank you. You’ve both come home. I could not be more grateful than I am now.”

“Well, it’s about time you and Su let us do the work for once. You can’t be the big hero all the time, Peter.” Lucy chuckled, kissing his cheek and hugging him again tightly.

Edmund moved to Susan as Peter and Lucy hugged. He gave her a small, hesitant smile, which she returned in kind. For a time the two stood regarding each other without contact before Edmund dared to step forward at almost exactly the same time as Susan did. The two embraced in a sincere, but still somewhat awkward embrace.

“It is good to have you home, Edmund. Thank you for your bravery.” Susan said as she rubbed his back.

“It has been far too long, Su. I am grateful you are here.” Edmund sighed, relieved their reunion was not more awkward.

The hug lingered for a long while, with little words said. While there was still a certain distance between them, Edmund felt a definite thaw in how Susan reacted to his presence. He was truly grateful for this small act of being able to embrace her as he would Lucy or Peter.

“You must be famished, Edmund.” Susan said finally, breaking the hug, “We have prepared a mighty celebration for all of you.”

“Might we be permitted to be bathed and changed into clean attire first?”

“Of course, of course.” Susan smiled, “We will begin the festivities in one hour.”

Edmund gave Peter a smile and turned to head into the castle alongside him. In moments their hands were clasped and fingers intertwined. Edmund could not help but feel a great sense of silent euphoria as he and his husband walked with increasing speed toward their chambers.

Once inside their chambers, any attempt at restraint was quickly tossed aside. Peter let out a scream of delight and picked Edmund up in his arms, spinning him around as they kissed madly. Edmund returned the excited kiss as he fumbled with his light armour.

“I missed you, Ed, oh did I miss you!” Peter gasped between kisses.

“I spend six months as a war leader and the moment I come home you make me feel as though a girl.” Edmund giggled, letting Peter remove the last obstacle to Edmund’s bare chest.

“After all these years, we are still to have this argument, Doubt-bucket?” Peter chuckled, his lips traversing the exposed chest of his husband.

“I’m supposed to be getting changed.”

“I’m helping!” Peter laughed, still hurriedly removing every last item from his beloved’s body.

“Peter, I just got home!” Edmund laughed after being tossed naked onto the bed, “Should we not be having some warm, romantic walk through the fields while holding hands and reading poetry to each other?”

“I thought you didn’t want to be a girl.” Peter said in a deadpan voice, stopping himself in the middle of removing his tunic.

Edmund laughed and jumped to his feet, kicking Peter playfully in the chest with his bare foot, “I’ll show you a girl!”

“Not now, Doubt-bucket, I’ve no time to see anyone but you.” Peter grinned, leaping at Edmund and tackling him back down to the bed.

Edmund laughed and squealed, his legs flailing on either side of Peter’s hips. Peter tickled his husband relentlessly while his lips feasted upon the soft flesh of his pale neck. Edmund smiled when Peter began to finally relent and traced kisses up his chin before reaching his lips.

“No more wars, Doubt-bucket.” Peter smiled, smoothing his fingers through Edmund’s raven hair, “After this, it’s just us. No more wars.”

“Just us.” Edmund smiled softly, his eyes locked with Peter’s, “From now until the end.”

“A bind that never breaks.” Peter whispered, unable to help the soft, gentle smile across his face.

Edmund returned the sentiment, his face at peace, infused with love and adoration, commitment and endearing, “A bind that cannot break.”

Peter closed his eyes and let his forehead rest upon that of his husband. He let himself be enveloped by the soft sound of breath escaping his beloved’s lips. He let himself be overwhelmed by the heat emanating from his lover.

Peter could not believe that his time of solitude was finally over. The Border Wars had come and gone, and with them he hoped the greatest trial of his marriage would go as well. He kept his eyes closed and let his fingers trace over the supple skin of his one and only love.

For all the trials they’d endured, they’d found each other once more. Through times of torment and miscommunication, times of grief and death, they had endured. Peter would never again allow himself to be separated from his beloved again. He would never leave him. He would never let him go. He would never go where his Edmund could not follow.

In his own heart he swore these words with all the testament his heart could make. Perhaps in many ways Peter kept his word. There were no more wars. No more wars until the end. One day however, Peter did indeed venture where Edmund could not follow. That, however, is another story. This is the end of their story... for now.

The End

Author's Notes: Well that's the end of my series, The Border Wars. Set during Just and Magnificent. If you haven't read Just and Magnificent, ermm why did you read this series? lol. If you want to know chronologically what happens after this chapter, then read the last chapter of Just and Magnificent 'Goodbye'. I would urge you to read that chapter even if you've read it before. It'll give you a refresher of the whole JamVerse and tell you the end of Peter and Edmund's story. At least as it is for now.

*** SPOILER WARNING ***

Most of you would've read Just and Magnificent if you read this, so you know already that Edmund dies after the events of this chapter and side-series, The Border Wars. This may be my last Narnia fanfic in the LWW timeline, or the JaM-Verse. There were two more stories that I intended to write two years ago. One was Just Peter Pevensie, a small one shot which follows Peter after he stepped through the wardrobe, without Edmund. That one I wrote way back when and have just been waiting for The Border Wars to wrap so I could post it. The other fic, my take on Prince Caspian and the sequel proper to Just and Magnificent; Beyond Magnificent. I don't honestly know if I'm going to write that since it would be as big as Just and Magnificent in scope. I always intended to, but it took this long to finish this lot! Still, with Prince Caspian about to release, the timing actually seems pretty good. So who knows. Either way, I hope you enjoyed The Border Wars, and the other fics that made up the Just and Magnificent universe. Thank you for reading!

</div>

'The Chronicles of Narnia: Prince Caspian' World Premiere Super Post!

suborbital — Thu, 08 May 2008 04:46:42 GMT

'The Chronicles of Narnia: Prince Caspian' had its world premiere today!

So to celebrate I have collated the best bits from the net for your viewing pleasure. Hit the jump for some piccars and clips! Be warned, there's a lot under the cut.

EDIT - Added After Party pictures

First up, here's some piccars. I'm just going to start with some pics of William Moseley aka Peter the very bloody Magnificent from the Conference Call in NYC a few days ago. Also with a little appearance from Georgie! [Lucy].

Dimples!!!!! I want to eat him!

Trying to do his best het impersonation???

Little Lucy sure turned into a pretty little girl. They're so cute.

Premiere Pictures!

Skandar Keynes! Georgie Henley, William Moseley, and Anna Popplewell aka the Awesome Foursome. The Pevensies!

Skandar, Georgie, Some Dude, Anna, William!

Skandar, Georgie, Some Creepy Dude hitting on Skandar, Willow, Anna, William, Funny Short Dude, God.

These were all from earlier on today at the World Premiere in New York City. Below is a clip from the red carpet by ET. It has a funny little snippet from the other God. And also has some William and Skandar in there. Enjoy! Only a week left for lucky Americans, and two hundred years for everyone else. BOOOO!!!!

** ADDED ** - After Party Pictures

William, Anna, and Georgie

Anna and Skandar!

Return of the Converse!

William, Anna, Georgie, and GOD!

Liam Neeson just waggled his finger at me for saying that. If any good stuff comes, I'll edit this post again or maybe just make a new one. who knows!?

</div>

JaM: The Border Wars - A Bind that Cannot Break

suborbital — Wed, 30 Apr 2008 12:16:28 GMT

Title: Just and Magnificent
Volume - The Border Wars
Chapter 11 – A Bind that Cannot Break
Pairing: Peter/Edmund
Rating: Whatever the highest rating is. Contains graphic sexual content at times
Summary: Peter's life hangs in the balance.
Disclaimer: C.S. Lewis owns the characters. I just love them!
Warnings: SEX, Incest, slash. Violence. Romance. Movieverse. AU. angst, fluff.

Just and Magnificent - The Border Wars

Chapter 11 – A Bind that Cannot Break

The winds of change blow
and the old world will not remain.
Separate we are vulnerable,
together we may hope
to conquer the shadow.

Listen to the voices
on the wind,
the voices of your forefathers.
Do not be afraid!
There is a choice to make
and none can help you.
Listen, your instinct will lead you.

Download Song

A BIND THAT CANNOT BREAK

The flight from the Narnian Army Camp in the south of Ettinsmoor, to Cair Paravel in Narnia, was a long and arduous one. A day into their journey, and even with only limited stops along the way, Roan and Peter still had only just crossed over the northern end of the Great River bordering with Ettinsmoor. There was still a very long way to go, particularly for one in as critical a condition as Peter.

Peter was now delirious with fever, amongst other afflictions of significant concern to Roan. He could see his precious cargo lulling in and out of consciousness, all while mumbling incoherently and moaning in pain. He knew he had to ride the wind as never before to save his High King.

While Peter was lucid enough at times to look around himself, he spent most of his time in a feverish slumber. He was plagued by dreams and nightmares. Memories and imaginings, all vied for his attention.

His condition was worsening, and the rocking caused by the winds certainly did little to help. As his condition worsened, the visions and memories became more vivid, more real.

The memory that flooded Peter’s mind took him back years to a time before the Dark Great War truly overwhelmed the war. While the seeds were well and truly planted already, the storm had not yet come to pass. In this particular memory Peter found himself reliving a moment of supreme bliss at the return of his beloved Doubt-bucket from a mission to the north. A time before the two kings were joined in marriage. A time when Peter’s patience was sorely tested by an absent and doubting love.

Edmund had just returned to Cair Paravel after a length absence that followed a truly tumultuous time of loss and battle. Battle against the hag, Dalzell, and loss of the mighty Shian Empire, with all but Prince Orrin now remaining. Now Peter’s mind took him to his chambers where a returned Edmund now stood before him.

“Hello.” said a shy, self conscious Edmund, “Hello, Peter.”

“Ed? Doubt-bucket?” Peter asked in a gentle, almost pleading voice, “Did you not miss me? Are you angry with me?”

“Did … did you miss me?” Edmund replied, looking as equally unsure as Peter, “It has been … a while. Did … did you miss me, Peter?”

“Oh sod this!” Peter yelled before he rushed Edmund.

In an instant, Peter’s mouth was smashing against Edmund’s so hard he pushed the younger king back against the wall. Months of tension knew no bounds now as lips devoured lips with a passion. An open mouthed kiss did little to quell the ache in Peter’s heart. Soon Edmund’s armor was tossed aside by Peter as his lips devoured the younger king’s neck.

“By the stars, I missed you.” Peter moaned as he bit Edmund’s shoulder, “Must you always be so bloody doubting?”

“Less talking!” Edmund yelled, shoving Peter back onto the bed.

He fumbled with his boots, and stripped down to his undergarments. Peter seemed a little surprised by Edmund’s forwardness, but was quickly imitating his actions. In a minute, they were back on each other again in a mess of mouths and fumbling hands, anxious cries and desperate kisses.

“Is everything alright in there?” called Mr. Tumnus.

“Sod off!” Peter screeched, his voice almost needy, “We’re busy!”

As a delirious Peter smiled at the memory, he could not help but recall how nervous he had been at the time. Dalzell had tricked him into a situation that compromised his love with Edmund. It was a conflict that pervaded the act of ‘betrayal’ to even their eventual wedding night. But it was another wedding that overwhelmed his mind now.

“Peter! I don’t know what I’m doing!” Susan gasped, rushing back and forth in her chambers tossing about all manner of clothing and appendages.

Servants rushed about, picking up after her. She was being fitted yet again for her wedding dress. For someone who thrived on a logical, calm, and orderly approach to matters, Susan was rather frantic in matters relating to her coming wedding to Prince Orrin, the last of the Shian.

“Peter!” Susan screamed, flustered tears in her eyes as she threw her hands up.

“Su!” Peter laughed, rushing to her and hugging her from behind, “My dearest Su, you are all a fluster with nonsensical madness.”

“In my mind it makes perfect sense, Peter.” Susan said, calming instantly in his arms.

Susan turned to face Peter, staring at him with eyes that were curious, anxious, nervous, excited, and no doubt many more conflicting emotions. Peter moved his hands up to rub her arms, smiling reassuringly at her.

“My dearest Su, you must not fret. It will not delay or hasten the wedding at all. All it will do is frustrate the poor servants who are doing their best to make sure you looking absolutely breathtaking on your wedding day.”

Susan closed her eyes and leaned her head on his shoulder, letting his arms wrap around her. She let herself absorb the comfort of his arms, the soothing strength of his presence. She could always count on him. She could always depend on him. In this nerve wracking time, he was her lifeline. Particularly since it had been two days since she was allowed to see Orrin. She only had one day left till she could see him. That day would be their wedding day.

Shian custom dictated the betrothed couple would not be allowed to see each other for three days prior to their wedding. This time would be used to reflect on the journey leading to the coming wedding day. It would be a time to reflect on the love shared between the two promised ones. During this time if either party felt cause to call off their wedding after reflecting without distraction, that call would be honoured. It was this slight detail that was driving Susan quite mad.

“Peter? You don’t think he’ll change his mind?” Susan asked, her eyes glistening at the very prospect of it, “You don’t think he’ll come to his senses without me being there to badger him into marrying me?”

“You badgered him into proposing to you?” Peter asked with a cheeky chuckle.

“Oh you behave, Peter Pevensie.” Susan smiled, “And I’ll have you know my badgering skills are exemplary. I have an incredibly refined art of diplomacy after all. I simply applied diplomacy to a threat of life if he did not ask.”

“You did not.” Peter laughed, kissing her temple, “I happen to know it was nothing like that at all. Orrin was very determined to have your hand and your heart. It was nothing like you badgering, Jester Su.”

“No, it wasn’t.” Susan gushed, her eyes glazing over with memory, “It was … it was perhaps one of the most defining moments of my entire life, Peter. He … he made me, Peter. He made me into … into more. I could no longer define myself without him.”

Her face was plainly serious. And it was in this plain seriousness that Peter truly felt and appreciated the depth of Susan’s love for her Prince Orrin. He kissed her temple once more and lifted her chin so their eyes met.

“Then why now do you fret when you know very well just how much he loves you?”

Susan looked into Peter’s eyes with an unblemished clarity, “Because I love him. Because I breathe him. He defines me.”

Peter tossed and turned in his basket, even though he was secured down. Delirious as he was, he began to wail and gasp and cry.

“Su!” Peter cried out, tears running down his cheeks.

His eyes were still closed, but his face was contorted in agony. Agony from both his physical wounds and the wound in his heart that he still felt for his sister. The wound on their family was so great from Orrin’s death that even now it had not healed.

“Su …” Peter sobbed, gasping weakly, “So sorry …”

Once more he stilled, much to Roan’s relief. It pained him to hear such cries from his king and to be powerless to give him comfort. It spurred him on however to yet another memory. A memory far more recent and no doubt called upon by his subconscious to help balance out the pain of his last recollection.

“Peter! I win!” Edmund laughed, running barefoot along a sandy beach in Galma.

Peter gave Edmund a deadpan look of utter displeasure. He was not impressed. Edmund had just seen fit to bury him in the sand after he’d fallen off to sleep on the beach. Now Peter was buried from neck to toe while Edmund ran off, thoroughly pleased with his little prank.

Peter could not help but smirk a little. How he managed to sleep through such a thing was still a bit of a mystery. He and Edmund had come for a well deserved holiday together, their first in far too long a time. Peter’s smirk quickly faded when he caught sight of a rather fearsome looking crab emerging from the surf. The crab possessed a pincer claw that looked large enough to cause some rather painful damage to Peter’s exposed head.

“Ahh, Doubt-bucket!” Peter gasped, half laughing, half panicked, “Could you please come back here!?”

Edmund was halfway down the beach now, humming idly to himself as he skipped nakedly along the shallow surf. He turned back to Peter, grinning mischievously. He couldn’t see the crab through the mound of sand Peter was buried under. Edmund still however made his way back toward Peter.

“A little faster please, Doubt-bucket!” Peter called out, trying to wriggle out of the well packed sand.

Peter tilted his head away from the approaching crab. It was less than a metre away from his head now and he was growing rather anxious to get out of its warpath. He still couldn’t help chuckling nervously at the absurdity of it all. With still a few moments to spare, Edmund stepped over the mound, one leg either side of Peter’s hips. He grinned down at Peter, leaning down to nuzzle his nose affectionately.

“Does my love require my presence?” Edmund asked softly, smiling and not in the least concerned about the crab now heading toward his foot.

Peter’s anxiety slipped away, only to be replaced by a rather warm sensation of contented bliss. He smiled back up at Edmund, their eyes meeting in the simplest of exchanges that still spoke volumes to their love.

“When my love calls, I will always come.” Edmund whispered happily, before he calmly picked up the crab and carried it a safe distance away from Peter.

If Peter thought he could possibly float away, he would have. Even after being married for several years, Edmund could still melt his heart in ways he did not think were still possible. Peter could only turn his head and gaze adoringly, wondering how truly blessed he was to have Edmund by his side in life.

“Doubt-bucket …” Peter gasped, his face covered in a feverish sweat, “Doubt-bucket …”

Even in his weakened and tenuous state, Peter managed to smile peacefully at the memory of his beloved. Unfortunately, as sweet and healing as the memory was spiritually, it did nothing to improve Peter’s physical condition. His face was deathly pale. Roan would glance down periodically as he flew, growing increasingly worried as the sun illuminated the critical state of his High King.

“Do not let these winds spirit you away, my King.” Roan said desperately, soaring speedily through the air upon his very deepest hopes, “Do not leave us.”

A BIND THAT CANNOT BREAK

The Narnian Army had dismantled their camp and begun a sudden march north. No more would they settle for border skirmishes. They would march into Harfang and drive the enemy to their knees. They had barely been marching an hour, but already Edmund was struggling to keep himself focused on the journey.

“Sire, you look pale.” Captain Capies said as he cantered up alongside Edmund.

Edmund truly was not feeling the best. He’d been growing weaker by the hour since Peter’s departure. He glanced at Capies and realized, now that Oreius was dead, he would have to elevate another in his place. The other was almost certainly always going to be Capies.

“Captain, I am hereby bestowing upon you the field rank of General.” Edmund said, his voice a little hoarse, “When we return to Cair Paravel, it shall be formalized. I apologize for the lack of ceremony afforded to your advancement in rank, but rest assured you will be properly honoured once this war is over.”

“Sire …” Capies said, quite overwhelmed by Edmund’s actions, “I do not seek to take reward in the death of one so mighty as Oreius. I give you my word that I shall do all in my power to honour him and this duty you have bestowed upon me.”

“General Capies, I …” Edmund gasped before he suddenly clutched his hand over his heart.

The Just King landed with a thud on his back, his face contorted in pain. Capies immediately halted the march as Edmund was quickly tended to. His armour was quickly removed as his pale face began to bead with sweat. The healers could not explain his sudden downturn.

“We cannot keep marching! He needs to be treated.” The chief healer said to Capies.

“Peter!” Edmund cried, clutching his now bare chest as he gazed up at the sky, “Peter!”

His soldiers did not understand the nature of his ailment, but Edmund knew full well what the cause was. A bind that cannot break. Edmund knew that Peter was dying. With Peter fading, the power that allowed Edmund to return from his fallen fate would fade as well. Years had passed since Edmund’s return to Narnia from Salei Barion, beyond the veil, yet the remnants of that tumultuous time were evident in his current state.

Edmund dared not reveal the reason for his weakening condition. He truly cared little for his own life in comparison to the life of his High King, of the Magnificent, of his husband, his Peter. His pain was not for himself, but his beloved.

“Peter!” Edmund cried out weakly, tears streaking his pale cheeks, “Peter!”

RIDE THE WINDS OF HOPE

“Mercies, spare my High King.” Roan gasped, soaring as high as he could to catch the fastest winds to Cair Paravel.

The mighty gryphon was incredibly fatigued himself, but he simply refused to stop now. If he had to drop dead upon arrival in Cair Paravel just to get Peter to Queen Lucy, he would do so. He knew Peter was dying. He knew death called to Peter with increasing volume.

Peter was barely moving now in a basket that looked increasingly like an open casket carrying a corpse. His eyes remained closed and his face was a rather morbid mix of grey and purple. The only sign of life could not be seen from without, but within. In the depths of his soul, in the eye of his mind, Peter lived, Peter dreamed, Peter saw.

In the middle of an empty field, Peter found himself sitting alone. As far and wide as he could see, there was blue sky and green fields. He felt happy. He felt at peace. He felt content.

“Am I dead?” Peter asked himself rather abruptly, “Hello?”

Peter stood to his feet and realized he was dressed in very simple attire. His casual dress matched the peaceful nature of his surroundings. He could not help but smile.

“I must be dead.” Peter said to himself, not certain why this fact didn’t really bother him, “Hello!?”

Peter looked around himself, but still saw nothing in any direction except for green fields and blue skies. The gentle, rolling hills were the only part of the landscape to offer any kind of variance. It was over one of these small hills that Peter heard the sound of footsteps. Yet the beat of the steps was perhaps a little fast for footsteps.

“No, not footsteps.” Peter said to himself, setting off in that general direction.

“Greetings, Sire.” Oreius said as he appeared over the rise of the hill before Peter.

“Hoofsteps!” Peter gasped, smiling broadly as he ran toward Oreius.

Though Peter’s first inclination was to hug Oreius he knew centaurs did not favour such displays of affection. Being such stoic creatures, a sincere nod would often suffice. Peter could not help though but squeeze Oreius’s arms as he smiled at him.

“My old chap, it looks like we’ve both ended up here!” Peter laughed, quite amused at the whole concept, “How unfortunately fortuitous!”

“Sire, this is not what you think it is.” Oreius said plainly, “If you were truly dead, would you not expect more company?”

“Well … maybe, but I … well … I don’t really know, Oreius.” Peter shrugged, “I’ve never quite been dead before. At least not to this point.”

“That is because … you are not dead, Sire.”

“Oh.” Peter said, clearly perplexed by this revelation, “I … well … what am I?”

“You are possibly delirious and mad, Sire.” Oreius stated, “Perhaps near death, but not quite dead.”

“Well … I don’t know if I like that very much, Old chap.” Peter frowned, “I know I should already believe this because of my Doubt-bucket’s past, but … there is life … after death, isn’t there?”

“Given my current state of being dead, Sire, I would certainly hope so.” Oreius said as he turned and began walking side by side with Peter.

“I don’t remember you being this funny when you were alive.”

“I was not attempting to be funny, Sire.”

“Well, that explains it then.” Peter chuckled, “You know, for someone who is nearly dead, I feel quite happy.”

“When one is faced with the inevitability of oblivion, one has a habit of finding peace.”

“I should only hope that my beloveds can find peace now that I have left them.” Peter said sadly, “I didn’t want to leave them. I still do not, Oreius.”

“Ahh yes.” Oreius nodded sagely, “Neither does King Edmund. It is most unfortunate in both your cases.”

“What?” Peter asked, confused, “What are you on about, Oreius?”

“Once you die, the bond will be broken.” Oreius said, “Therefore, King Edmund will die as well.”

“But …” Peter gasped, before he suddenly realized what Oreius had reminded him of, “Oh, bother. Oh … oh … bloody … bother.”

“You’d forgotten?”

“Well forgive my ignorant bliss, Old chap, but it really hadn’t come to mind in the last seven or however many years it has been since that blasted Great Dark War.” Peter said in a panic, “Alright then, get me back to life, Oreius. I can’t very well leave my Doubt-bucket if it means killing him too.”

“But you are fated to leave him, Sire.”

“What?” Peter asked, shaking his head, “No, no. I don’t believe in fate when it becomes an excuse not to do something I intend to do. And that intent is to never bloody leave my Doubt-bucket. Now come on, Oreius. You said I was nearly dead. I’m not all dead. I remember Edmund telling me something like this before. I never entertained the notion then and I certainly don’t intend to start now.”

Oreius gave Peter what to others would look like nothing, but to Peter truly looked like a faint smile. Peter returned it with a hint of anxiety. He was anxious now to fully return himself to the land of the living and reconnect the bond that literally was not allowed to break.

“Well, you’d best wake up now, Sire.”

“That’s it?” Peter asked in surprise, “I just … wake up?”

“Yes.” Oreius nodded slightly.

“That sounds awfully easy.”

“Some things are easy, and some things only appear to be. The fates are with you, Majesty. It is not your time.”

“Alright, so … I just wake up.” Peter said, taking a deep breath and closing his eyes.

Peter stood for a few moments with his eyes closed, before he suddenly opened them. He looked at Oreius intently, stepping closer to him. Oreius tilted his head slightly in question.

“Sire? Is something wrong?”

“Oreius …” Peter said softly, “You … you’re dead.”

“Yes, Sire, I am.”

“So …” Peter frowned, “… you can’t … wake up too?”

“Where you are mostly dead, I am unfortunately completely dead.” Oreius said with a hint of sadness, “But do not grieve for me, Sire. If I have regret, it is only that I am not able to stand beside you any longer.”

“Will we ever see each other again, Old friend?” Peter asked, a despair in his eyes.

“I don’t know, Sire. Am I really here? Or am I simply a figment of your creation? Does it truly matter? Is there more that awaits us beyond our mortal bounds?” Oreius asked curiously, “I do not know, my King. I only know that we each carry a part of the other with us along the journey. A part of me will always remain with you, and a part of you will always remain with me. But I will tell you this, Sire. The part of me that goes, will very much miss the part of you that stays. Perhaps one day if there is more than this life I leave, those parts will become one again. Until that time, goodbye, my King.”

With those words spoken, Oreius gave Peter a deep bow and turned to walk away slowly. Peter shed tears as freely as he ever had in his life. Seeing his proud and loyal friend walk away before fading into the winds was truly heartbreaking. He reached out but Oreius was gone.

Peter closed his eyes and breathed deeply. He breathed as deeply as he ever had in his life and imagined a love he could not leave. He imagined a land he loved too much to abandon. Without sight, he imagined the fields around him becoming the shape of his beloved Narnia. He imagined the faces of those loyal Narnian who looked to him for guidance and love. He imagined his sisters, smiling softly and waiting with welcome arms. He imagined his Edmund, smiling humbly and hopefully. A smile graced Peter’s face, before he opened his eyes … and breathed.

A BOND UNBROKEN

Edmund sat up suddenly, clutching his sweaty chest and opening his eyes. There was no longer any pain. He did not feel short of breath. He did not feel faint as though he was slipping from this world. He felt stronger, renewed. He knew why. He knew exactly why.

“Peter.” Edmund smiled, lips curling on his sweaty face, “Peter.”

The healer rushed to Edmund, amazed by his miraculous and sudden recovery. Edmund cried tears of joy and relief, chuckling as he stood to his feet. He walked out of his tent, naked and uncaring. He looked up to the sky and smiled contently.

“A bind that cannot break.” Edmund said before he charged his fist into the air and cheered, much to the concerned gaze of those around him.

Edmund gave a sheepish and happy grin to all before he waved and promptly marched back into his tent. This was going to be a very good day after all.

RISE, MAGNIFICENT, RISE

“Peter?”

Peter opened his eyes as the gentle voice called him from the darkness. His blurred vision struggled to focus against the rush of light. When his sight began to clear, he was greeted with the image of a face. A familiar, reassuring face.

“Su.” Peter croaked, a faint smile on his lips.

“You gave us quite the scare, Peter.” Susan said softly, smiling down at him as she sat beside his bed.

Peter realized he was now in his chambers. He was home in Cair Paravel. He turned his head to see Lucy sitting on the other side of his bed, smiling down at him. He did not know how much time had passed, but he knew now that all would be well. He was home. He was loved. He breathed, and a bond remained unbroken.

“You could not have gotten here a moment later, Peter.” Lucy said with a warm smile, stroking his cheek, “You have had the cordial, and you have been treated. You’ve been asleep for a very long while, and you will need much time to recover. The most important thing, is that you are home. I will go and tell the healers you are awake finally. Welcome home, Peter.”

Lucy leaned down and kissed Peter’s cheek, smiling before she crawled off the bed and dashed out of the room. Susan smiled at Peter, patting his hand and gazing at him affectionately. Yet there still remained a distance between them.

“I should let you rest.” Susan said softly, gracefully standing to her feet.

Peter stayed Susan’s movements with a clasp of his hand upon hers. Their eyes met and Susan gave him a look of confusion. She did not quite understand his gesture.

“Su.” Peter said, pulling her down so he could reach up and cup her face.

“Peter?” Susan asked, a little bewildered.

Peter said nothing. He simply stared at her, trying to convey all the emotions he felt with his eyes. He could not explain why he felt this sudden need to have her see he loved her. That she was never unloved, never alone.

Without a word, he pulled her down onto the bed and gingerly put his arm around her. Susan was still confused by his actions, but when he kissed her temple and simply held her, she understood he simply wanted to be near her.

Peter felt tears prick his eyes. Tears that never fell, but nonetheless glistened his eyes. He felt such a sense of joy for this simple pleasure and closeness that had been lacking for so very long. There was a sadness and regret in his heart for things he knew could not be changed, but a hope for what could be.

“Oh, Su.” Peter whispered, sniffling as he kissed her temple once more and squeezed her a little tighter.

Susan was careful to remain to the side of him, so as not to hurt him, but she held the embrace. It had been a long time since he’d simply held her like this. Since he’d reassured her, comforted her. She began to cry softly, weeping for what she understood had been lost for so long. Perhaps this was a start. Perhaps this was a hope.

“Oh, not without me!” Lucy gasped, eyes bright as she skipped onto the bed and laid on Peter’s other side, “You’ve had cordial, so toughen up a little, Peter Pevensie.”

Peter made an oomph sound and chuckled but was truly blessed and content to have his dear sisters so close. He closed his eyes and let their warmth lull him into a truly peaceful slumber. He was home. He was loved. And a bond remained unbroken.

</div>

JaM: The Border Wars - The Sacrifice of Honour

suborbital — Tue, 29 Apr 2008 09:22:34 GMT

Title: Just and Magnificent
Volume - The Border Wars
Chapter 10 – The Sacrifice of Honour
Pairing: Peter/Edmund
Rating: Whatever the highest rating is. Contains graphic sexual content at times
Summary: Narnia and Ettinsmoor meet to discuss the terms of Ettinsmoor’s surrender.
Disclaimer: C.S. Lewis owns the characters. I just love them!
Warnings: SEX, Incest, slash. Violence. Romance. Movieverse. AU. angst, fluff.

Just and Magnificent - The Border Wars

Chapter 10 – The Sacrifice of Honour

ONE STEP TO PEACE

“Do you believe this meeting will yield the outcome we desire, Peter?” Edmund asked as he lay with Peter in their tent.

Peter stopped massaging Edmund’s foot for a moment as he pondered his answer. He frowned a little as his mind mulled over the possibilities of the coming meeting between himself and the King of Ettinsmoor. It was widely believed and accepted that Ettinsmoor would concede defeat. Narnia would then demand the systematic disarmament of forces along the border between the two nations. Ettinsmoor was hardly in a position to challenge their resounding defeat in the last battle.

“Well, Doubt-bucket.” Peter said thoughtfully. He pressed a kiss against his husband's ankle before he moved up his body. He laid his chin atop Edmund's bare chest, sighing softly, “One can only hope that since reason has failed previously, the resounding call of defeat will succeed in its place. We will ensure today that the terms of non-aggression are absolute.”

“Then we best ensure the High King is up and dressed, shan’t we?” Edmund said with a soft smile.

Edmund rolled Peter onto his back before he moved down, kissing Peter’s hair, his ear, his cheek, his chin, his nose, and finally his lips. For a time, the couple revelled in the chaste, warm kiss. Peter let his hands roam up Edmund’s lean back, pressing his fingers into Edmund’s shoulder blades. Edmund chuckled softly against Peter’s lips, before he let out a content sigh.

“And this is going to help that cause, my love?” Peter chuckled, stealing another soft kiss.

“Not at all.” Edmund smiled, moving slowly atop Peter, “But it will help me feel very positive about the day.”

“Well then, we must continue.”

Peter laughed softly, his lips meeting his husband’s before the couple descended into a myriad of lovemaking positions. They had used their reunion to rekindle the bonds of love with great fervour. Nights and mornings were filled with all manner of gasps and cries.

For many in the camp, there was a hope that the reunited kings would bring a stronger offensive from Narnia. A hope that a victory would come swift and true. That victory had come and now the camp had a hopeful aura. The time for Ettinsmoor’s official surrender had come.

When the two kings had completed their morning of love, they both prepared for the day ahead. Servants made sure both men were dressed in armour that was polished and cleaned to its very best. Edmund paced back and forth outside his tent, his mind mulling over the events ahead.

“You will be very careful, Doubt-bucket?” Peter asked as he stepped up to Edmund, cupping his face and pressing a kiss to his nose.

Edmund was leading the forward party which would venture ahead to the meeting area to ensure it was secure before Peter made his way over after the Ettinsmoor King had arrived. This would act as a security precaution for Narnia’s High King and give Edmund a first glance at a hitherto unseen enemy.

“Of course, Peter.” Edmund reassured, tilting his head slightly to share a lingering kiss.

“A bind that never breaks?” Peter asked softly, somewhat tentatively.

Despite the warm and love filled time of reunion between the kings, Peter was still apprehensive about speaking the first half of such a potent tradition. It was such a bold question, a bold statement, and one that Peter had not been able to say since before the Border Wars began. Their tense relations made him even now fear that Edmund might reject him. For a moment, Peter could see the slight hesitation on Edmund’s face. Their bond was not absolute. The hint of hesitation sent a shiver of despair through Peter, but before he could vocalize his thoughts, Edmund responded.

Edmund pulled Peter’s coif back so he could run his fingers through Peter’s hair. He leaned forward, kissing Peter’s ear, his cheek, his opposite ear and cheek, his nose, his temple, his chin, and finally his lips. By this time, Peter was halfway between chuckling and gushing. It was almost as if he was being blessed by love itself.

“A bind that cannot break.” Edmund whispered finally, smiling at Peter.

Though Peter still felt the moments of hesitation, he was truly grateful for Edmund’s return to his statement. He had no doubt their marriage needed attention. It would receive his full attention upon the settling of this war.

“I love you, Doubt-bucket.”

“And I you, Peter.” Edmund smiled softly, “And I you.”

Peter cupped Edmund’s face for a moment, “Still?”

There was a questioning in Peter’s eyes as though he could not shake the tenuous state of their marriage. He was certain their time apart had done them no favour, but he was hopeful that there was still enough of a bond to rebuild upon.

“Always.” Edmund said sincerely, “Always.”

“Then go in peace, Ed.” Peter said with a small smile, “Go in peace.”

Peter watched as Edmund left, mounting his steed and giving Peter one last glance and smile before he rode away with his party. Peter watched on with pride, marvelling at how fine a warrior Edmund had become. He would trust none above Edmund to stand by his side in battle.

When the afternoon sun came over the Narnian camp, Peter was ready and waiting to depart for his meeting with the Ettinsmoor King. Gryphon scouts had patrolled the distance between the Narnian camp and the meeting area. The meeting area was halfway between both camps.

“The way is clear, Sire!” Roan cried from overhead, “Our forward party is waiting at the meeting area!”

“We are ready to depart on your order, Sire.” Oreius said as he cantered slowly to Peter’s side.

“Is today a day for peace, Oreius?” Peter asked his loyal friend as he mounted his unicorn and looked up to the clear skies.

“It is if the enemy wishes to survive this day.” Oreius said plainly.

“Then we shall hope they wish to survive it, yes?” Peter chuckled, “We shall hope.”

A MEETING AT LAST

“Behold, the King of Ettinsmoor, Hulsfom the Gregarious!” An ettin bellowed.

Edmund stood in the middle of a field where banners from both Narnia and Ettinsmoor billowed in the firm breeze. He looked up as the shadow from one of the largest ettin he’d ever seen walked onto the field. He was flanked by four giants and four ettin. It was a far larger party than Edmund expected.

While Ettin were smaller than giants, their four arms and keener intellect meant they usually dominated over their larger, dumber counterparts. The giants were clearly being led by the ettin. This didn’t surprise Edmund. What did surprise Edmund was that Ettinsmoor had become cohesive enough to form an army in the first place. Ettin and giants were tribal and were more interested in themselves than to building any sense of community, let alone an army.

“Gregarious?” Edmund whispered to Roan the gryphon.

“Indeed, Sire.” Roan replied evenly, “It is an interesting title, is it not?”

“That’s one way of putting it, Old friend.”

Both Narnian were interrupted by the bellowing of the large ettin, “I am Halsfom, King of Ettinsmoor!”

Edmund stepped forward to greet Hulsfom. It was his duty to present the demands Narnia had for Ettinsmoor’s surrender. Once he had, Hulsfom would have time to deliberate and negotiate easier terms. High King Peter would then arrive after the meeting and ratify it. As a show of Narnia’s displeasure with Ettinsmoor, Peter would not speak to or acknowledge Halsfom directly.

Yet as Edmund began to read his official statement to the Ettinsmoor King in the middle of that lonely windswept field, he could not help but feel as though there was something amiss. He paused mid sentence to look up at Halsfom. The way the ettin almost had a mocking look in his eyes, Edmund’s instinct told him there was an air of deception here today.

“What troubles you, Narnian King?” Halsfom’s booming voice called from above Edmund, “Do we not seem sufficiently humbled?”

Edmund pondered for a moment before he spoke, “No, actually, you do not …”

ONE STEP TO WAR

High King Peter the Magnificent’s party continued to march toward the designated meeting area. His party’s spirits were high, anticipating a surrender by Ettinsmoor and a swift return home. Peter truly hoped today would grant his army their wish. This war had cost enough lives.

“Oreius, what do you thi…” Peter said before he let out a mighty cry of agony.

Peter was thrown off his horse by the force of a spear that now impaled him through his chest and out under his right shoulder. An ettin smashed himself out from under his hiding place in the thick of trees. Three more spears in hand, the ettin threw each toward Peter, intending to kill the High King before he realized what had hit him.

Oreius was immediately in front of Peter, using his two swords to smash two spears before he used his head to buck the last off course. Peter was still reeling on the ground, struggling to recover himself. His loyal Narnian surrounded him instantly as Oreius galloped toward the assassin.

Four more ettin smashed themselves up out of their earthen hiding places. It had clearly been a trap on their part to lure the High King away from the bulk of his army in the name of peace. A giant joined the fray, smashing through trees to get to the Narnian party.

The assassin charged at Oreius, but the mighty centaur proved far too powerful an enemy, even for the huge ettin. The centaur threw his two swords at the ettin before turning on his heels and bucking his back legs up against the ettin’s knee. The ettin cried out as its leg smashed from the force of the blow.

Oreius pulled the two swords from the ettin’s chest and slashed through his chest, piercing his heart. The ettin fell to the ground, another victim of Oreius’s fearsome skills as a warrior.

“To arms, Narnia! Defend your King!” Oreius cried out, lunging into battle.

Though Peter’s Narnian were loyally surrounding him. They were being picked off by the Ettinsmoor soldiers. The smaller party was simply overpowered by the enemy forces.

Gravely injured as he was, Peter still pulled himself to his feet and snapped the spear from in front of his chest. He let out a mighty scream of battle fury, and his cry seemed to be laced with the majesty of a lion’s roar. Peter charged into the fray, slashing through ankles where he could.

Oreius sped to Peter’s side, along with three other Narnian who tried to form a protective shield around Peter. Blood spewed from Peter’s mouth as he fought, but he relented not at all. With a mighty abundance of courage, the small Narnian party refused to yield their King. They refused to fall without fight, without giving their all first.

Peter dived aside just as an ettin swung one fist at him. A satyr who rushed to Peter’s aid suffered an instant death when the sole giant stomped him dead with one blow. Peter threw himself at the giant’s foot, screaming as he slammed Rhindon into the boot. The giant let out a mighty howl of pain before he smashed Peter back into a bracket of bushes. Peter cried out in agony as the giant’s blow had smashed the last of the spear from his back.

Peter was losing blood incredibly fast now. More than this, two ettin had come to finish him off. The sole giant Peter had stabbed through the foot was shaking the ground with one legged hops as he held his foot in agony.

The first of two ettin reached Peter and picked him up in its four hands. Peter used all his might to slash Rhindon up, slicing a wrist of the ettin. The ettin let Peter drop and grabbed its arm. The second ettin seized on the moment and swung at Peter with a clawed iron fist. The blade like nails ripped at Peter’s back and his pained cry could be heard from all around.

The clawed hand soon fell to the ground as Oreius sliced through it cleanly with one of his broadswords. The ettin swung at Oreius with his other arms, causing Peter to fall once more to the ground. He was critically wounded and Oreius knew if he did not fight with every ounce he had, his King would die.

Refusing to let anyone else come near Peter, Oreius stood his ground, slashing and bucking. One of the ettin fell to Oreius’s swift blades, bleeding from where his head was once attached to his neck. The second ettin used an iron claw to slash at Oreius’s rear, sending blood spraying over Peter.

Oreius turned in agony just in time to see the ettin raise the claw, preparing to strike down at Peter and kill him. A tired, injured Oreius threw himself in front of the claw, only to have another slash at his back. He screamed but did not relent. He stabbed his sword into the ettin’s thigh, causing it to double over and give Oreius enough time to send his second sword up through the chest cavity.

The ettin fell dead and Peter had been saved. Oreius staggered toward Peter, wobbling but standing firm and holding both swords. He breathed hard, his eyes dulling from blood loss. The hopping giant had now recovered itself and set off toward Peter.

Oreius raised his swords and tried to gallop toward the giant. His injured back legs gave out and allowed the giant to slam his fist down on the centaur’s back. Oreius grunted as the entire hind end of his horse half was broken. Now with only two good legs, Oreius still limped toward the giant. The giant swung his fist down at Oreius to finish the mighty centaur off.

Valiantly Oreius swung both swords in such a way that one sliced through the fingers of the fist, and the second sword sliced through the wrist almost cleanly. The giant’s right fist was now hanging grotesquely and a weakened Oreius tried to capitalize. Yet even now the giant was simply too strong. One swift kick sent Oreius to the ground. He had no more strength to get up. Still the centaur did not stop trying to defend his king.

When the giant staggered and cried in agony toward Peter, the now prone centaur swung his sword at the giant’s ankle just as it passed him. The giant screamed and turned to Oreius before he raised his foot and slammed it down on the centaur. Oreius was almost completely crushed. The giant raised his foot again, but before he could slam it down, there was a mighty cry from a gryphon above.

Oreius looked up to see Roan high above the giant letting King Edmund drop like a torpedo toward it. With a fierce battle cry Edmund fell straight down with his two swords pointing down ahead of him. His swords stabbed through the top of the giants head, piercing his brain and killing him instantly.

When the troublesome giant fell, Edmund was standing victoriously atop its head, pulling out his swords. More gryphon from Edmund’s party came with reinforcements, allowing the Narnians to quickly turn the tide and kill the last of the assassins. Unfortunately, they were too late to save many of Peter’s party who had given their lives to protect their critically wounded king.

“Peter!” Edmund cried out, seeing Peter in a great pool of his own blood.

Peter however was still moving. In fact he had moved himself to Oreius’s side, crawling across grass to reach his friend. Oreius’s body was almost completely smashed. Seeing the mighty centaur in such a state immediately caused Edmund’s eyes to glisten. As he knelt down beside Peter and Oreius, he knew the centaur was doomed.

“Forgive me … Sire ….” Oreius gasped weakly as Peter nursed his head, “I … should have … sensed the … attack.”

“You did wonderfully.” Peter cried, ignoring his own horrific injuries, “I … ugh …”

“Peter, you need help.” Edmund said quickly, “Roan! To me!”

“No!” Peter protested, shaking his head and sobbing weakly as he looked down at Oreius.

Peter knew Oreius was going to die. He was simply too horrifically smashed. The end was coming far too quickly for Peter. Oreius had been his constant companion since he first met Aslan. The realization that their loyal partnership was about to end was too much for the High King.

“Do not … weep for me, Sire.” Oreius whispered, breathing laboured, “I am sorry … I shall not … be able … to stand by your side … once more.”

“Oreius.” Peter sobbed, “Please, I …”

Oreius gave Peter a small smile, “We fought well.”

“You fought as you always fought; heroically. Oreius …” Peter cried, kissing his temple, “… thank you. Thank you.”

“No, Sire.” Oreius whispered faintly, “Thank you. We fought well … to the end …”

“To the end.” Peter repeated, breaking into fierce and harsh cries as Oreius breathed his last.

The moment Oreius was dead, Edmund nodded to Roan and forcibly pulled Peter away from him. Peter protested but was far too injured to do so effectively. Edmund knew there was no time to waste. He did as best he could to seal Peter’s gaping wounds before Roan picked him up into the air.

“To the camp to heal him enough to travel, Roan, and then straight back to Cair Paravel! He needs the cordial!” Edmund cried out as Peter gazed down at him with dull eyes.

“Doubt … bucket …” He whispered, “Don’t … leave me …”

Edmund’s eyes were filled with worried and tormented tears. The moment Peter was far out of sight he looked around at the carnage. He knelt down beside Oreius, finally taking his own moment to pay his respects for the fallen centaur. He placed his hand upon Oreius’s temple and leaned down to kiss it.

“You died as you lived, with valiant courage and unending loyalty. We shall never know another like you, Old friend. Thank you for saving him. Thank you … for all that you have given us, Oreius.” Edmund cried softly, “You will live on in our hearts. Rest well, mighty hero, rest well.”

YOU HAVE TO GO

It was several hours later when Edmund arrived back at the camp, only to find Peter was still being treated in the camp triage. The healers were not comfortable sending him on for treatment by Queen Lucy until he had been stabilized. His condition was critical and many feared he would not survive a trip back to receive Queen Lucy’s fireflower cordial.

“How long till he can be taken back?” Edmund asked the chief healer anxiously.

“We hope to have him stabilized enough to travel in the hour. We know he must receive the cordial soon.” The healer replied, “But even then, he will require a great deal of time to recover and rehabilitate himself from his injuries.”

“But first we must get him the cordial or he will be dead before he can even recover, yes?”

“Yes, Sire.” The healer said gravely.

“Please, do all you can.”

Edmund knew he didn’t even have to make such a request. Peter was not just regarded, he was not just respected, he was loved by his subjects. They would do all they could to save him. Yet still Edmund could not help the rising fear in his stomach. The anxiety that his husband would leave this world.

Few realized the bond the two men shared. Few realized just how much the Just depended on the Magnificent. Few realized that if Peter left this world, more than one would be lost.

This however had no consequence at all in Edmund’s mind. The thought of Peter dying and leaving this world behind was simply too much for him to bear. He realized now that their tensions of the past paled in the face of such potential loss.

“We have stabilized him, Majesty.” The chief healer told Edmund.

Edmund breathed a great sigh of relief. He nodded in gratitude before he rushed into the tent, just wanting to see his love. He sat beside Peter’s bed, staring at his horrifically broken love with anguish and pain. Edmund couldn’t have let Peter go without seeing him first. The gryphon would be here soon to take Peter. The tent was already being dismantled around them so they wouldn’t have to move Peter and the gryphon could simply fly right over and take hold of a bar set to carry the weight of Peter in his makeshift transport bed.

“Doubt…bucket?” Peter whispered with difficulty, moving his fingers toward Edmund.

Edmund instinctively moved his hand to Peter’s, to save his husband the effort, “Peter? Do not move, my love. They’re taking you home. Soon you will be recovering in Cair Paravel.”

“O…O…reius, Ed …” Peter gasped, barely managing to open his eyes to look at Edmund.

“I know, Peter. I know.” Edmund said miserably, “His body will be flown back so you may give him the honour he deserves.”

Peter struggled to speak through his growing tears. His dear friend and loyal General, Oreius, had been lost. Lost in a foolish war in an even more foolish ambush. Such an end was not fitting for one so truly great. But the end did fit in that Oreius had given his life fighting against supreme odds without hesitation. He had fought for King and country, refusing to succumb until the very end. Peter would honour him, but more than this, he would truly miss him.

“I’m sorry, Peter.” Edmund cried, his voice soft as his eyes welled up, “I promise you, they will pay.”

“Ed …” Peter gasped, still trying to quell his tears, “Peace …”

“Will be ours.” Edmund said sternly, “I promise you, Love. I promise you. It will be ours because I will rip it from them. We offered them a chance to war against us no more today, and they betrayed that offering. Now, they have decided their fate. I will end this war for you. I promise.”

“Come back to me, Doubt-bucket.” Peter pleaded, his voice a pale whisper, “Come back to me.”

Edmund’s stern demeanour quickly softened. He kissed Peter’s hand by gently leaning down to it. He didn’t want to move Peter, even though he knew Peter would soon be moving along the wind. Peter had been secured as best he could, and Roan himself was going to be carrying him back to Cair Paravel.

As the tent was dismantled and the roof exposed, Edmund looked up as Roan hovered above. One of Narnia’s own giants raised the bar for Peter’s bed. Edmund knew it was time for Peter to go. He leaned over and kissed him gently upon the lips.

“I promise, I will come back to you.” Edmund whispered.

“A bind … that never breaks?” Peter asked weakly, his eyes fixated on Edmund.

Edmund smiled immediately, his eyes twinkling tearfully as he spoke with conviction, “A bind that cannot break.”

Peter smiled with relief and closed his eyes. He could leave now. Edmund stepped back from the bed as it raised into the air by the might of the one of the most powerful gryphon.

Edmund looked up at Peter, smiling softly. He was grateful that Peter was finally leaving. He knew Lucy would take care of him. It was now for Edmund to finish this war. He found that a bitter irony since he himself had perhaps inadvertently started it.

“Goodbye, Peter.” Edmund whispered into the night as he watched his husband fade from view.

THE COST OF BETRAYAL

“Sire, what do we do now!?” Captain Ansara asked Edmund.

Edmund stood in his tent before a gathering of the army’s highest ranking members. It was now the morning after Peter had been taken away to Cair Paravel. Edmund was now completely in charge of the renewed war effort. The army, once hopeful for peace, was now bristling with anger at the death of General Oreius and the near fatal assassination attempt on High King Peter.

Around a map table, Edmund consulted with his and Peter’s most trusted and capable. Outside the chants of the many loyal Narnian soldiers could be heard. Edmund, still simmering with anger at yesterday’s cowardly attack was livid and resolute. He glanced at those around him before he turned and stormed out of the tent with the stride of a champion about to enter battle. This was not so far from the truth.

“War!” Edmund screamed with power as he walked into the crowd.

The gathering parted like the Red Sea in his wake. The sea of soldiers, all manner of creatures, all cheered in support of the call. Though many of them wished to go home, they were loyal to Narnia. They knew that peace for their country would not be seen now unless they took it by force. The time for talk was over. The enemy had spoken and now it was Narnia’s turn.

Edmund’s presence, his demeanour, his eyes were all fierce and commanding. Without even a word the entire gathering of his army silenced. He glanced from soldier to soldier, as if boring into their very souls.

“Narnia!” Edmund cried suddenly, breaking the eerie silence, “The enemy has struck us firm and true! We have been taken in the lull of peace to the now absolute call of war! They have taken from us our greatest! Our High King! No more can he lead us! No more can he lead us into the fire! It is to us to rise up! It is to us to avenge the enemy’s betrayal and strike against our High King! But he will at least be there when the drums of victory welcome us home!”

Edmund spoke with a mighty anger. Each step had the presence of an earthquake. Each glance sent a tornado of shivers into all who met it. Each word seemed to carry the very force of Aslan himself.

“Oreius!” Edmund screamed, raising his sword, “They have taken our greatest centaur! Our most revered General! The most loyal Oreius! Our friend and mentor, whose courage and moral fortitude remained unblemished to the end! His life will inspire for generations to come! But in the here and now our grief must fire our resolve! Honour his memory with your courage! Honour his loyalty by remembering the brother who stands beside you in the coming days of war! Honour his life by fighting for the lives of those behind us in our beloved home of Narnia! I command you now, my loyal Narnian, to rise up your arms and march forward to the enemy! Let them hear our coming and tremble! Rise, Narnia, rise!”

JaM: The Border Wars - When Love is Done

suborbital — Fri, 18 Apr 2008 10:53:52 GMT

Title: Just and Magnificent
Volume - The Border Wars
Chapter 9 - When Love is Done
Pairing: Peter/Edmund
Rating: NC-17
Summary: The burden of love weighs upon Peter's soul.
Disclaimer: C.S. Lewis owns the characters. I just love them!
Warnings: SEX, Incest, slash. Violence. Romance. Movieverse. AU. angst, fluff.
A/N: I'm on a roll! I'm trying to finish this series quick smart! I'm just feeling it. Reviews are love!

Just and Magnificent - The Border Wars

Chapter 9 – When Love is Done

A BATTLE TO REMEMBER

“Second cavalry, charge!” Peter cried out, waving his sword in the air as a line of centaur charged into the battle.

The engagement Peter had planned for was now in full swing. Narnia had forced the Ettinsmoor forces to group, allowing the Narnian to pincer them from two sides. On their right flank, Edmund’s forces were already devastating the enemy. Peter’s forces were baring the brunt of the Ettinsmoor might, but Peter knew he had to secure a crushing victory in order to render Ettinsmoor unable to continue a war effort.

The new Ettinsmoor ruler had yet to make his presence felt in battle. Something that Peter found rather cowardly. Still, his intelligence sources had informed him that the Ettinsmoor army couldn’t survive another stunning defeat.

His armour covered in blood, Peter galloped toward a giant, riding right under its legs and slashing at its ankles. He narrowly avoided getting knocked off his horse in the process. As the giant staggered, three centaur charged at it, leaping up to stab at its thighs while a rhino knocked out the giant’s legs.

Before the giant fell it grabbed hold of one centaur and tore it in half without flinching. It was a frightening show of power from the giant. Unfortunately this meant the giant was shown no mercy and when it hit the ground, the remaining centaur swiftly rendered him deceased.

“Ready crush!” Peter cried out, his voice hoarse but his message was well received.

Overhead, Gryphon began emerging from trees all around the battlefield. They carried large clumps of sawdust mixed with fireweed. Fireweed was known to irritate the giants greatly and cause them to scratch at themselves. While many gryphon wings dropped their sawdust bombs over the giants, more gryphon followed by dropping large boulders overhead as well.

Edmund’s army capitalized on this coordinated attack by forcing his own army to the rear of the Ettinsmoor forces. They were pinned in now and forced to fight on all sides. Victory was in sight, but not guaranteed.

Sensing their defeat, the giants began attacking with brutal desperation. They stomped, smashed, and ripped apart any living thing around them. Edmund was truly horrified at the sight of so many Narnian meeting such horrific ends.

With his army fully committed, Edmund knew he had to do more than he already was. Though he didn’t profess the virtues he possessed as the Rogue Warrior, he always brought them to bear in battle when needed. He kicked his horse into a gallop and charged at the deadliest group of Ettin and Giants. Two ettin and three giants.

“Pretty good odds!” Edmund gasped as he drew his two swords and held them out like wings.

His horse charged through the legs of one giant, allowing Edmund to slice through its Achilles tendon. Or at least what he assumed was the giant equivalent. The giant screamed and fell into one of its comrades, taking them both to the ground. An ettin spotted Edmund, swinging at him.

Instead of running, Edmund kicked his heels to rear his horse up. At the top of the horse’s raise, Edmund jumped on its back and kicked off toward the ettin. As ettin were shorter than giants, this gave Edmund near head level with it.

The ettin swung his fist at Edmund as Edmund flew toward it. Taking the punch would’ve likely meant a sudden exit from the battle for Edmund, and so he twisted his body in midair, moving his legs to catch the blow and used them as his own momentum to leap toward the ettin’s face. Two seconds later half the ettin’s face was on the ground.

War was never pretty. Despite his ability to kill with practiced ease, it was rarely a joy for Edmund. Still, he was here to do just that and so he continued his one man carnage.

Peter caught a glimpse of Edmund’s heroics and cursed inwardly. His husband was altogether completely bonkers. Flying through the air, leaping, jumping, doing all manner of acrobatics and strength shows. Despite his faith in Edmund’s long proven abilities since returning from Salei Barion years ago, Peter never grew complacent that his husband was invincible.

He knew as well as any that Edmund was quite the target for the Ettinsmoor forces because of his deadly efficiency. Edmund had at least three enemy giants upon him and more heading toward him. Peter galloped toward the melee involving his husband and quickly added himself to the mix.

“Hello, Peter!” Edmund gasped, rolling under a hammer crush from a giant before he leaped on top of it and ran up the giant’s arm, slashing all the way.

“Doubt-bucket, you are quite mad!” Peter cried out parrying with a troll who fought with the giants, “When this is over, remind me to give you a lesson in playing nicely with others! I think you rather enjoy battle too much!”

Peter was knocked off his horse by the troll, and soon found himself with a troll standing on his chest. He let out a gasp and stabbed his sword up into the troll’s thigh. The troll jumped back, allowing Peter to roll to his side and then forward, rising with a half circle slash that cut the troll up its middle.

Peter smashed his way through the split torso and ran toward Edmund. Despite all his senses, Edmund couldn’t fight off all his enemies. As another troll ran toward Edmund from behind, Peter ran toward it at a perpendicular angle. He threw himself into a shoulder charge just as the troll was about to impale Edmund from behind.

The troll howled as Peter’s shoulder charge sent it flying into a nearby boulder. Before it had a chance to recover, Peter’s sword clanged into the boulder right through the troll’s neck. He turned to Edmund, gasping heavily for breath.

“Oh, thanks, Peter!” Edmund called out, still busy weaving through giant attacks.

“Death of me.” Peter said, hands on his knees as he caught his breath.

“Peter, behind you!” Edmund cried suddenly.

Peter turned just in time to see an axe coming down on his head, but not in time to react. It all happened in a flash. He felt his life flashing before his eyes, but before he could make peace with his end, the shadow of a mighty centaur leapt over his head. The centaur parried the axe just before it killed Peter.

Peter gasped in stunned surprise, before he focused himself and raised his sword. He needn’t have bothered. The owner of the axe was on the ground dead, with a charged Oreius standing over it.

“Sire.” Oreius said regally, nodding to Peter.

“Oreius, I love you.” Peter grinned gratefully, before he turned and rejoined the battle.

“Of course, Sire.” Oreius replied, before he too joined his King’s side.

It was a formidable sight. Three of Narnia’s greatest in battle, side by side. High King Peter, King Edmund, General Oreius. They were a fearsome fighting force. The mighty cry overhead of another loyal friend Roan was also heard before he too joined the fray.

Indeed, it seemed apparent now that Narnia’s side was rapidly ascending to victory. When that victory finally came, Peter fell to his knees, closed his eyes and let out a cry of release. The war had been long and arduous and all Peter wanted was for it to be over. Surely with the bulk of Ettinsmoor’s forces defeated, they would not dare try to invade Narnia.

THE BURDEN OF LOVE

“My loyal Narnian!” Peter cried out later that evening, “Today we celebrate a stunning victory against our enemy! But we do so with heavy hearts for the cost of one of our own is a pain we all must bear. To those whose lights have left us, we honour them now!”

Peter raised his goblet high just as many others did. Around the Narnian camp many were partaking in the celebrations. The cleanup of the battlefield had paused for the day, but most of the dead Narnian had been recovered already.

“We pray now that this battle, this victory we have forged today will make the enemy realize that Narnia will suffer no invaders! I give you my word that we will protect our lands and never again suffer the tyranny of a dictator. No Jadis, no coward King who does not fight with his own army will overrun our lands. Those brave souls who gave their lives today did so because we believe in our right to exist, to live, to breathe in free Narnian air. Let us never forget all those who are not here today. The souls we leave in the meadows and the burrows and cottages and palaces of home, they are why we fight. They are why we die. My beloved sisters. Your beloved children, your wives, your daughters, your sons, your fathers, your mothers, all those you love and live for. For them we cannot accept anything other than total and complete victory. I thank you all for the courage you show, the courage you give me. With Aslan’s grace the march toward home shall begin in but a week or two. Let us all bow our heads and give a moment for our brave lost.”

Edmund bowed his head and closed his eyes, letting his mind reflect on the punishing battle of the day. Many were injured, but would hopefully see home soon. Many had died, and would never see home soon. Edmund’s eyes were sombre when he opened them, feeling a swell of emotion as he looked up and found an equally sombre Peter staring at him.

Edmund stepped forward and rubbed Peter’s arm softly, “Good words, my love.”

“My love?” Peter asked with a soft smile, “Those are good words, Edmund. I wish you would share them with me more.”

“Well, we mustn’t be greedy, Peter.” Edmund smiled, leaning in to give Peter a soft kiss on the lips.

“You are usually so aloof at times like this.” Peter said softly, grateful for Edmund’s affection, “Trying so hard to be … hard, so that others will not believe you otherwise. Because for some strange reason you seem to feel you are less of a man than I. And yet I am certain that we are both very much the same in that regard. Anatomically speaking, at least.”

“That’s a big word, Peter.” Edmund grinned playfully, giving Peter another kiss.

“I’d best use smaller ones then so you will understand me, Doubt-bucket.”

“Oooh, we are very smart today, aren’t we?”

Peter chuckled and interlaced his hand with Edmund’s as they walked through the camp slowly, greeting and smiling at those who fought, those who were aided, and those who suffered injuries in the battle. Despite the sadness over the losses endured in this long campaign of war, the mood was hopeful and upbeat. Many believed this would mark the end of the Border Wars.

“Do you think this King of the Giants will concede now?” Edmund asked softly as the couple walked.

“One can only hope he will see reason in the face of such staggering defeat. We have shown him the resolve of Narnia and our ability to defend ourselves. I do have such little respect for a leader who does not lead the charge.”

“First into battle, last to retreat, right, Peter?” Edmund asked, kissing Peter’s hand thoughtfully.

“Yes, Doubt-bucket. You know this as well as I. One of us would always be here to lead our Narnian. It is our duty.” Peter pulled Edmund into his arms and kissed his cheek, before they both stood holding each other in the night for a while.

“When we get home, Peter, I hope … things will be better for us.” Edmund said softly, nestling his face in the crook of Peter’s neck.

“I will work tirelessly until they are, my dear Ed.” Peter whispered, truly revelling in this tender moment.

“Peter?”

“Yes, Ed?”

“Try not to die, please.” Edmund said quietly, kissing Peter’s neck as he spoke, “You almost let yourself be taken today. Were it not for Oreius, I would be mourning you.”

“And if I hadn’t saved you, I would be mourning you, Doubt-bucket.” Peter countered, squeezing Edmund a little as he spoke, “You would not wish that upon Narnia. Such grief would consume the land.”

“I was never at risk, Peter. I am the Rogue Warrior!” Edmund smiled, sighing contently on Peter’s shoulder.

“I thought the Rogue Warrior was retired, Ed.”

“Retired? I’m too young to be retired. Besides, once a warrior, always a warrior. A warrior’s heart can never retire.” Edmund said sagely, softly, “A warrior’s heart fights for what he believes in at all times. It is a way of life that I can never retire from.”

“Why does that give me little comfort and much anxiety?” Peter asked with a chuckle, inhaling the scent of Edmund’s hair, “Oh, Ed, you do not know how truly happy I am to have you here with me.”

“You don’t know how surprised I am at how happy I am to be here with you.” Edmund said, squeezing a little closer to Peter, “I will confess I have had my misgivings. I do not speak of divorce, for it is as you saw, a cowardly path. We made oaths and our integrity binds us to those oaths. But … it has just been so long, Peter. And before we parted last things were so … difficult for us. I wasn’t certain I wished to see you because I didn’t want to go back to where we were then.”

“You break my heart, Ed.” Peter whispered, his eyes pained from Edmund’s words, “You break my heart with your words. I am a fool for your heart, because even when we fight, I still ache to see you, to hold you, to touch and smell you.”

“You are a better man than I, Peter.”

Peter picked Edmund up in his arms, smiling a little emotionally, “Do not argue. Do not complain about me treating you like a woman. I wish to carry you to our tent and make love to you.”

“The last time we had reunion sex, Peter, you rode me like I was some horse.”

“That was … seven months ago, Ed. I remember well how you liked to neigh.” Peter said softly as he carried Edmund, “But I confess, tonight is not that night. Tonight I wish to love you. Tonight I wish to honour you.”

Edmund could feel the emotion in Peter’s voice. He could feel Peter’s hurt and anguish. He knew a lot of it was due to the burden Peter carried as High King. The burden of this war and all those dead and maimed in battle. It broke Edmund’s heart to feel such deep emotion residing within his husband. Edmund knew Peter was not just a great man, he was a good man. A good man with a true heart.

“I always like it when you’re gentle.” Edmund said, his fingers tracing Peter’s lip and his own voice surprisingly shaky with emotion, “I always like it when you love me, Peter.”

“Then you shall always like, Doubt-bucket. For I shall always love.” Peter whispered, stopping at the entry to their tent.

He leaned down and pressed a kiss to Edmund’s lips before the guards pulled aside the entry. Peter stepped through with his beloved in his arms, stopping at the bed and sitting down on the edge. Without letting Edmund out of his arms, he managed to wedge off his boots. He pulled Edmund’s off and began rubbing his slender feet.

Peter smiled at the touch of the surprisingly soft feet. Edmund hated to hear it, but he had very slender and almost feminine feet and hands. Long, slender, soft. Peter couldn’t help but admire them as he rubbed.

“That feels nice, Peter.” Edmund whispered, eyes closed as he curled up against Peter’s chest, letting Peter rub his feet.

“You feel nice, Doubt-bucket.” Peter said softly, “You feel … like an angel.”

Another time Edmund might feel inclined to make light of Peter’s comment. Tonight however, sensing Peter’s vulnerability, Edmund only smiled gracefully in response. He couldn’t help but feel the pain Peter felt, lingering just below the surface. He opened his eyes and tilted his head up to look at Peter before he reached up and cupped his cheek.

“You feel like a King.” Edmund whispered proudly, “A brave, noble King who cares so deeply for his kingdom and his subjects that he wears the pain of their suffering and loss on him like a mantle. You feel like righteousness given life. But such goodness sometimes means you cannot help but feel sadness for the loss of other goodness.”

Peter’s eyes began to water a little as he looked down at Edmund. Edmund’s words truly hit the heart of his pain. He nodded as Edmund spoke before he began to weep openly and soon he was sobbing.

“I promised myself we would not have another war after the darkness that filled our world took so much.” Peter cried, easing Edmund onto the bed so he could curl onto his chest, switching their positions as he shed his emotions.

Edmund held Peter’s head to his chest, letting him cry. He couldn’t help but feel tears stinging his own eyes. His fingers curled through Peter’s golden locks and he wondered how such beauty, how such magnificence could know such pain and torment. The depth of Peter’s heart truly knew no bounds.

“It isn’t your fault, Peter.” Edmund whispered, “It was mine, remember? You did not bring this war to Narnia. I brought this war to Narnia. If you wish to blame, blame me, Peter.”

“Now it is almost over, I … I feel it all starting to settle upon me, Ed. The guilt, the loss, all of it.” Peter cried softly into Edmund’s tunic.

“Love it away, my King.” Edmund said softly, “Love it away in me. Please.”

Peter looked up at Edmund, tears in his eyes. He truly didn’t feel inclined to let free feelings of lust. However, he understood what Edmund was saying. He could not help but marvel at the beautiful symmetry of it all. Edmund was his completion. They completed the best and worst parts of one another. When he would stumble, Edmund would rise as he did now.

The anguish and guilt Peter felt for all those lost in this cursed war was overwhelming. Only love could keep it from driving him to despair. He knew no greater love than the one he felt right now for his Edmund, for his Doubt-bucket.

Tearfully, Peter slid Edmund’s tunic up and placed the softest kiss atop his bare stomach. Edmund let out a gasp and closed his eyes. Tonight would not be for laughter or joking as they would often do. Tonight would be for love, for the sharing of grief, and the merging of hearts.

Peter’s calloused fingers played across the exposed skin and he let out a small cry of anguish, tears falling from his eyes and onto Edmund’s slender waist. Peter kissed his own tears from Edmund’s skin as he slid the tunic up further. Willingly Edmund raised his arms and allowed Peter to remove his tunic completely.

With a sombre smile of thanks, Peter placed a small kiss upon Edmund’s freckled cheek. He slowly began a journey of tender touches and soft kisses down Edmund’s defined torso, stopping once he reached his leggings.

Slowly the process continued. Peter gently and carefully removing each item Edmund wore. When Edmund was completely naked, he lay on their bed, gazing up at Peter.

Peter mustered a small smile for Edmund, though his eyes were still laced with emotion. He let out a sigh of approval, marvelling at Edmund’s angelic beauty. He truly was, even now, still so untainted. Still so very … Edmund.

When Peter removed his own tunic, he felt every scar, he followed every line on his body. He no longer felt like the Peter of old. He simply felt … old. He felt hollow. He felt emptier than on that hallowed day when he ascended the throne with such bright enthusiasm.

When Peter was naked, he felt naked. It was so starkly opposite to that of his love, his Doubt-bucket. Peter simply sat on the bed awhile, looking at the differences between he and his husband. His own hands felt so battle worn. His body was hardened with muscle from fighting and battles. He felt worn and used, and so very hollow.

He lay down beside Edmund, on his side so he could just look at him. So he could take in the wonder that was his love, his salvation. He felt so unworthy and yet he would never say it. Could never say it. Such words would hurt his love, and could never be spoken.

“I love you.” Peter whispered, reaching one hand out to rest on Edmund’s chest.

Edmund covered that hand with his own and turned to look at Peter, “And I you, Peter.”

Peter did not need to say the words he felt he should. The request for permission was granted in Edmund’s eyes. The understanding was granted in Edmund’s voice. The love existed simply from Edmund’s presence.

Peter needed that love. He needed all that Edmund could offer him so that he would feel whole again. So that he would feel again.

Their lips met as Peter descended upon his love. Their kiss was soft, yet sure. Their fingers moved with growing confidence. Yet it was Edmund who silently, subtly nudged Peter toward the act of love.

Fingers to lips, resting on hips, sharing the silent love between two souls, two kings. There were no words needed to accompany the act between them. No words needed to worry lips between teeth. No words needed to trace the muscled arms laced with freckles. No words needed to press one love into another.

Lips continued to merge. Fingers gripped at tense muscle on backs. Gasps met in time with the slow, gentle rhythm of love.

There was no rush to seek conclusion. No hurry to end the act of union. There was only time. Time for love to find expression, to find completion.

When love was finally done, the candles had long burned out. The moonlight illuminated Peter’s greatest hope, his greatest joy, his greatest love. It was at that moment, long after the cries of battle had faded. Long after toasts were made and songs were sung. Long after the pleasure filled gasps had filled the night sky. Long after all of this, love was finally done.

In this moment, Peter finally found the one thing only love could give him. A smile. The smallest and faintest and truest of smiles. A smile gazed upon his slumbering salvation. Tonight, love was indeed done.

</div>